Contract Purchase of Fire Vehicles

Contract Purchase of Fire Vehicles

MASON, GRIFFIN & PIERSON

A PROFESSIONAL CORPORATION

COUNSELLORS AT LAW

To:

From:

Date:

Re:

MEMORANDUM

Mayor and Council of Princeton

Lisa M. Maddox, Esq.

Assistant Princeton Attorney

August 27, 2015

Purchase of Fire Vehicles from Pierce Manufacturing, Inc.

Attached for the Mayor and Council's consideration at its September 15, 2015 meeting is an agreement and authorizing resolution for the purchase of equipment from Pierce

Manufacturing, Inc. ("Pierce").

During the past several months the Princeton Fire Department ("Department") has been working with OEM Director Robert Gregory to secure the purchase of fire equipment for use by the Department, and specifically a fire vehicle with heavy duty aerial ladder and fire vehicle with triple combination pumper. During this time, the Department and Mr. Gregory researched equipment that would achieve their goals and determined that the sought-after vehicles could be purchased from Pierce through a nationally-recognized cooperative purchasing contract with the

Houston-Galveston Area Council (“H-GAC”). Other New Jersey municipalities have made similar purchases through the H-GAC.

N.J.S.A. 52:34-6.2b.(3) authorizes Princeton to purchase the equipment without public bidding under the Local Public Contracts Law. Under the law, Princeton may participate in a nationally-recognized and accepted cooperative purchasing contract that has been developed utilizing a competitive bidding or contracting process by another contracting unit within New

Jersey or another state. H-GAC is a regional organization of governments operating under the laws of the State of Texas and is a political subdivision of the State of Texas. The cooperative purchasing agreement has been awarded by H-GAC to Pierce utilizing a competitive contracting process. Also, Mr. Gregory has determined that the use of the cooperative purchasing contract will result in cost savings to Princeton. Attached is supporting information regarding the savings from Pierce.

Enclosures cc: Marc D. Dashield, Administrator

Kathryn Monzo, Assistant Administrator/Dir. of Finance

Linda S. McDermott, Clerk

Robert Gregory, Director, OEM

Trishka W. Cecil, Esq., Princeton Attorney

MUNICIPALITY OF PRINCETON

END USER AGREEMENT IN CONNECTION WITH PURCHASE OF:

ARROW XT 75’ REAR MOUNTED LADDER (PRODUCT NO. UA02)

AND

ARROW XT PUMPER (PRODUCT NO. UC06)

THIS AGREEMENT

(also “contract”), made the 15 th

day of September, 2015, by and between

THE MUNICIPALITY OF PRINCETON, a municipal corporation of the State of New

Jersey, with offices at 400 Witherspoon Street, Princeton, New Jersey, 08540,

("MUNICIPALITY") and

PIERCE MANUFACTURING, INC., a corporation of the State of Wisconsin, with offices at 2600 American Drive, P.O. Box 2017, Appleton, Wisconsin, 54912-2017,

("CONTRACTOR").

In connection with CONTRACTOR's Proposal Documents, and the MUNICIPALITY's notice of award dated ______________, 2015, the MUNICIPALITY and CONTRACTOR hereby agree as follows:

1. Scope of Work

CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to furnish the goods and services specified in the

“CONTRACTOR’S Proposal Documents,” which shall include an Arrow XT 75’

Rear Mounted Ladder and Arrow XT Pumper

(collectively “equipment”), and more specifically described in the following:

Exhibit A

– Arrow XT 75’ Rear Mounted Ladder Proposal Documents:

A-1 Contract Pricing Worksheet for

Arrow XT 75’ Rear Mounted Ladder (Dated

9/10/15)

A-2 Narrative proposal and specifications for same

A-3 Side Roll and Frontal Impact Protection

A-4 Turning Performance Analysis

Municipality of Princeton

1

END USER Agreement – Revised

Exhibit B

– Arrow XT Pumper Proposal Documents:

B-1 Contracting Pricing Worksheet for Arrow XT Pumper (Dated 9/10/15)

B-2 Narrative proposal and specifications for same

B-3 Side Roll and Frontal Impact Protection

B-4 Turning Performance Analysis

CONTRACTOR’S Proposal Documents, and the provision of its goods and services provided pursuant thereto, are (and shall at all times) be consistent with the terms of the “Contract Between Houston-Galveston Area Council (H-GAC) and Pierce Manufacturing, Inc.,” effective from December 1, 2013 to November

30, 2015

(“H-GAC Agreement”).

2. Contract Sum and Payment

A. Based upon the unit prices set forth in A-1 and B-1 of Exhibits A and B, the amount of the contract, subject to any adjustments made in accordance with the Contract Documents, is: $781,608.18 for the Arrow

XT 75’ Rear Mounted Ladder and $546,188.60 for the Arrow XT Pumper, for the total not to exceed contract amount of $1,327,796.78.

B. In accordance with the H-GAC Agreement, the MUNICIPALITY agrees to pay CONTRACTOR upon receipt and acceptance of the Arrow XT 75’

Rear Mounted Ladder and Arrow XT Pumper. The MUNICIPALITY shall pay CONTRACTOR within thirty (30) days of receipt of CONTRACT

OR’S properly executed and audited invoice and municipal voucher.

3. Time of Completion

A. The goods and services to be provided under this contract shall be commenced and completed as set forth in the Notice of Award and/or

Notice to Proceed to be provided by the MUNICIPALITY. In accordance with CONTRACTOR’S Proposal Documents, the equipment shall be delivered within twelve (12

) months of CONTRACTOR’S receipt of

MUNICIPALITY’S purchase order.

B. The failure to provide the goods and services within the number of calendar days set forth in the Notice of Award and/or Notice to Proceed and herein, including any extension granted thereto as determined by the

MUNICIPALITY, shall entitle the MUNICIPALITY to liquidated damages in the amount of five hundred dollars per day ($500.00/day).

4. Buy American

Only manufactured and farm products of the United States, wherever available, shall be used in connection with this contract, pursuant to N.J.S.A. 40A:11-18.

Municipality of Princeton

2

END USER Agreement – Revised

5. Indemnification and Hold Harmless

CONTRACTOR shall hold harmless, indemnify and defend the MUNICIPALITY and its consultants, officers, employees and agents from and against any and all claims, demands, suits, proceedings, liabilities, judgments, awards, losses, damages, costs and expenses

(including but not limited to attorney’s fees) directly or indirectly arising out of the negligence or fault of the CONTRACTOR or its officers, agents, servants or employees and/or any other person or persons relating to, or in connection with the performance or nonperformance of the work required by the Contract Documents, and whether or not such claims, demands, suits or proceedings are just, unjust, groundless, false or fraudulent, except to the extent caused by the negligence or fault of the MUNICIPALITY.

CONTRACTOR’s indemnification obligations shall not be limited by the amounts of insurance required to be carried by CONTRACTOR under this contract.

6. Contract Documents

The Contract Documents as defined herein are incorporated into this Agreement and made a part hereof by reference. The Contract Documents shall include this

Agreement and all exhibits (A through C, inclusive) attached hereto, along with the following:

“Contract Between Houston-Galveston Area Council (H-GAC) and Pierce

Manufacturin g, Inc.,” effective from December 1, 2013 to November 30,

2015

CONTRACTOR’S Pay to Play Forms (Affidavit Required in Connection with the Execution of Certain Contracts, Campaign Contributions

Disclosure Statement and Campaign Contributions Affidavit), Non-

Collusion Affidavit, Stockholder Disclosure Certification and Certification of

Investment Activities in Iran.

7. Affirmative Action Regulations

CONTRACTOR specifically agrees to comply with the affirmative action requirements set forth in the attached Exhibit C, which requirements are incorporated herein and made a part hereof as if fully restated.

8. Business Registration and Sales and Use Tax Requirements

P.L. 2004, c.57, as amended by P.L. 2009, c.315 (N.J.S.A. 52:32-44) requires

CONTRACTOR to provide the Municipality with its business registration of prior to the time a contract is awarded. In addition:

A. A subcontractor named in the proposal shall provide a copy of its business registration to CONTRACTOR who shall provide it to the MUNICIPALITY as required above. No contract with a subcontractor shall be entered into

3

Municipality of Princeton END USER Agreement – Revised

by any contractor under any contract with the MUNICIPALITY unless the subcontractor first provides CONTRACTOR with proof of a valid business registration.

B. The MUNICIPALITY will retain the proof of business registration in the file where documents relating to the contract are maintained.

C. CONTRACTOR shall maintain and submit to the MUNICIPALITY a list of subcontractors and their addresses that may be updated from time to time during the course of the contract performance. A complete and accurate list shall be submitted before final payment is made for goods provided or services rendered under the contract.

D. For the term of this contract, CONTRACTOR and each of its affiliates shall collect and remit to the Director of the Division of Taxation in the

Department of the Treasury the use tax due pursuant to the “Sales and

Use Tax Act,” P.L. 1966, c.30 (C.54:32B-1 et seq.) on all their sales of tangible personal property delivered into this State.

In the event CONTRACTOR subcontracts any of its work, said

CONTRACTOR shall include within its subcontracts the requirement that, for the term of this contract, the subcontractor and each of its affiliates shall collect and remit to the Director of the Division of Taxation in the

Department of the Treasury the use tax due pursuant to the “Sales and

Use Tax Act,” P.L. 1966, c.30 (C.54:32B-1 et seq.) on all their sales of tangible personal property delivered into this State.

9. Pay to Play Compliance; Political Contributions

A. CONTRACTOR certifies that said CONTRACTOR (including persons and other business entities having an interest in CONTRACTOR as defined by

N.J.S.A. 19:44A-20.7) has neither made a contribution, that is reportable pursuant to the Election Law Enforcement Commission pursuant to

N.J.S.A. 19:44A-1 et seq. (i.e., in excess of $300.00), in the one (1) year period preceding the award of the contract that would, pursuant to P.L.

2004, c.19 affect its eligibility to perform the contract , nor will it make a reportable contribution during the term of this contract to any municipal committee of a political party if a member of that political party is serving in an elective public office for Princeton when the contract is awarded, or to any candidate committee of any person serving in an elective public office for Princeton when the contract is awarded.

B. CONTRACTOR is advised of the responsibility to file an annual disclosure statement on political contributions with the New Jersey Election Law

Enforcement Commission (ELEC) pursuant to N.J.S.A. 19:44A-20.27 (P.L.

2005, c.271, §3) if CONTRACTOR receives contracts in excess of

Municipality of Princeton

4

END USER Agreement – Revised

$50,0000 from public entities in a calendar year. It is

CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to determine if filing is necessary. Additional information on this requirement is available from ELEC at (888) 313-3532 or at www.elec.state.nj.us.

10. Document Retention

– State Comptroller

CONTRACTOR shall maintain all documentation related to products, transactions or services under this contract for a period of five years from the date of final payment. Such records shall be made available to the New Jersey

Office of the State Comptroller upon request.

11. Assignment

This contract shall not be assigned, transferred, conveyed or otherwise disposed of without the prior written consent of the MUNICIPALITY.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement the day and year first written above.

MUNICIPALITY OF PRINCETON ATTEST:

_____________________

Linda S. McDermott, Clerk

ATTEST:

By:_____________________

Liz Lempert, Mayor

PIERCE MANUFACTURING, INC.

______________________ By:_____________________

Municipality of Princeton

5

END USER Agreement – Revised

Contract Pricing Worksheets

Rev 02-05-07

NOTE: Purchase Orders are not valid unless a copy of the completed worksheet and the customer's order are faxed to HGACBuy at:

713-993-4548

This Workbook contains three versions of HGACBuy's Contract Pricing

Worksheet. One is for Standard Equipment / Services, one is for

Catalog or Price Sheet type purchases, and the third is for Motor

Vehicles only. See tabs at bottom to select appropriate Worksheet.

Please contact H-GAC staff about use of the worksheets if you have any questions.

CONTRACT PRICING WORKSHEET

For MOTOR VEHICLES Only

Contract

No.:

FS12-13

Date

Prepared:

9/10/2015

This Worksheet is prepared by Contractor and given to End User. If a PO is issued, both documents

MUST be faxed to H-GAC @ 713-993-4548. Therefore please type or print legibly.

Buying

Agency:

Contact

Person:

Phone:

Princeton

Linda McDermott, Clerk

609-924-5704

Contractor:

Prepared

By:

Phone:

Pierce Manufacturing

David Russell

920-832-3000

Fax: Fax:

Email:

Product

Code:

UA02

Description:

Arrow XT 75' rear mounted ladder

A. Product Item Base Unit Price Per Contractor's H-GAC Contract:

Email:

[email protected]

$ 705,362.00

B. Published Options - Itemize below - Attach additional sheet(s) if necessary - Include Option Code in description if applicable.

(Note: Published Options are options which were submitted and priced in Contractor's bid.)

Description

Cost

Description

Cost

Subtotal From Additional Sheet(s):

$ 74,625.00

Subtotal B:

$ 74,625.00

C. Unpublished Options - Itemize below / attach additional sheet(s) if necessary.

(Note: Unpublished options are items which were not submitted and priced in Contractor's bid.)

Description

Cost

Description

Cost

Subtotal From Additional Sheet(s):

$ 4,121.18

Subtotal C:

$ 4,121.18

Check: Total cost of Unpublished Options (C) cannot exceed 25% of the total of the Base Unit

Price plus Published Options (A+B).

For this transaction the percentage is:

1%

D. Total Cost Before Any Applicable Trade-In / Other Allowances / Discounts (A+B+C)

Quantity Ordered:

1

X Subtotal of A + B + C:

E. H-GAC Order Processing Charge (Amount Per Current Policy)

F. Trade-Ins / Other Allowances / Special Discounts / Freight / Installation

Description

Vendor to Pay HGAC fee

Multi-unit discount

Cost

$ (2,000.00)

$ (2,500.00)

Delivery Date: 12 months from PO

784108.18

Description

= Subtotal D:

$ 784,108.18

Subtotal E:

$ 2,000.00

Cost

Subtotal F:

$ (4,500.00)

G. Total Purchase Price (D+E+F):

$ 781,608.18

Pride

Number Qty

105

118

Description

1 Silicone hoses

1 Cummins ISL9 engine to Cummins ISX12 engine

1 Cummins ISX12 engine to Detroit Diesel DD13 engine 119

210

212

214

402

403

415

420

422

482

483

5

1

1

1 Add front bumper line (including hose tray & restraint)

1 Add 19" extended steel painted bumper

1

1

Upgrade sCBA brackets to Hands Free

Raised roof, custom cab

Q2B siren each additional transverse preconnect 2.5 or 3" plumbing

Increase pump from 1250 to 1500 gpm

1 Increase pump from 1500 to 2000 gpm

1 LED under cab/body lighting (8)

484

554

999

1015

2 12v LED brow light

4 12v LED recessed or surface mounted

1 Diesel generator 7.5kw

1 AC power to tip

676248

679919

66627

1 LED aerial section lighting

1 Brackets only, roof ladder, base section, inboard of boom panel RHS, 75' HAL

1 Cover, Diesel Generator

1 Reel, Elect Cable, Hannay 1600 (4) wire

66632

619620

1

1

Cord Electric 10/4 black 4-wire

Box, junc., Akron, 4wire 2-20a 120v SB, 2-20A 240v TL

Published Unpublished

Options Options

$654.00

$25,499.00

#########

$3,245.00

$1,903.00

$3,547.00

$2,886.00

$2,346.00

$2,816.00

$5,014.00

$6,751.00

$1,791.00

$3,524.00

$6,956.00

$12,910.00

$2,119.00

$3,776.00

$442.23

$890.34

$1,955.53

$365.03

$468.05

Base Bid

Published Options

Total Published Options

Unpublished Options

Total Options w/o HGAC Fee

#########

$ 74,625.00

#########

$ 4,121.18

#########

0.53%

20.63

Pierce Mfg. is pleased to submit a proposal to Princeton Fire Department for a Pierce®75' Heavy Duty

Aerial Ladder per your request for quotation. The following paragraphs will describe in detail the

apparatus, construction methods, and equipment proposed. This proposal will indicate size, type, model and make of components parts and equipment, providing proof of compliance with each and every item

(except where noted) in the departments advertised specifications.

PIERCE MANUFACTURING was founded in 1913. Since then we have been building bodies with one philosophy, "BUILD THE FINEST". Our skilled craftsmen take pride in their work, which is reflected, in the final product. We have been building fire apparatus since the early "forties" giving Pierce

Manufacturing over 60 years of experience in the fire apparatus market. Pierce Manufacturing has built and put into service more than 51,000 apparatus, including more than 27,000 on Pierce custom chassis designed and built specifically for fire and emergency applications. Our Appleton, Wisconsin facility has over 757,000 total square feet of floor space situated on approximately 97 acres of land. Our

Bradenton, Florida facility has 300,000 square feet of floor space situated on approximately 38 acres of land.

Our beliefs in high ethical standards are carried through in all of our commitments and to everyone with whom we do business. Honesty, Integrity, Accountability and Citizenship are global tenets by which we all live and work. Consequently, we neither engage in, nor have we ever been convicted of price fixing, bid rigging, or collusion in any domestic or international fire apparatus market.

Pierce has only one brand of fire apparatus "Pierce", ensuring you are receiving top of the line product that meets your specification.

In accordance with the current edition of NFPA 1901 standards, this proposal will specify whether the fire department, manufacturer, or apparatus dealership will provide required loose equipment.

Images and illustrative material in this proposal are as accurate as known at the time of publication, but are subject to change without notice. Images and illustrative material is for reference only, and may include optional equipment and accessories and may not include all standard equipment.

GENERAL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

To control quality, ensure compatibility, and provide a single source for service and warranty, the custom cab, chassis, pump module and body will be entirely designed, assembled/welded and painted in

Pierce owned manufacturing facilities. This includes, but not limited to the cab weldment, the pumphouse module assembly, the chassis assembly, the body and the electrical system.

QUALITY AND WORKMANSHIP

Pierce has set the pace for quality and workmanship in the fire apparatus field. Our tradition of building the highest quality units with craftsmen second to none has been the rule right from the beginning and we demonstrate that ongoing commitment by: Ensuring all steel welding follows American Welding

Society D1.1-2004 recommendations for structural steel welding. All aluminum welding follows

American Welding society and ANSI D1.2-2003 requirements for structural welding of aluminum. All

1 of 117

sheet metal welding follows American welding Society B2.1-2000 requirements for structural welding of sheet metal. Our flux core arc welding uses alloy rods, type 7000 and is performed to American

Welding Society standards A5.20-E70T1. Furthermore, all employees classified as welders are tested and certified to meet the American welding Society codes upon hire and every three (3) years thereafter.

Pierce also employs and American Welding Society certified welding inspector in plant during working hours to monitor weld quality.

Pierce Manufacturing operates a Quality Management System under the requirements of ISO 9001.

These standards sponsored by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) specify the quality systems that are established by the manufacturer for design, manufacture, installation and service. A copy of the certificate of compliance is included with this proposal.

In addition to the Quality Management system, we also employ a Quality Achievement Supplier program to insure the vendors and suppliers that we utilize meet the high standards we demand. That is just part of our overall "Quality at the Source" program at Pierce.

To demonstrate the quality of our products and services, a list of at least ten (10) fire departments/municipalities that have purchased vehicles for a second time is provided.

DELIVERY

The apparatus will be delivered under its own power to insure proper break-in of all components while the apparatus is still under warranty. A qualified delivery representative shall deliver the apparatus and remain for a sufficient length of time to instruct personnel in proper operation, care and maintenance of the equipment delivered.

MANUAL AND SERVICE INFORMATION

At time of delivery, complete operation and maintenance manuals covering the apparatus will be provided. A permanent plate will be mounted in the driver's compartment specifying the quantity and type of fluids required including engine oil, engine coolant, transmission, pump transmission lubrication, pump primer and drive axle.

SAFETY VIDEO

At the time of delivery Pierce will also provide one (1) 39-minute, professionally produced apparatus safety video, in DVD format. This video will address key safety considerations for personnel to follow when they are driving, operating, and maintaining the apparatus, including the following: vehicle pretrip inspection, chassis operation, pump operation, aerial operation, and safety during maintenance.

PERFORMANCE TESTS

A road test will be conducted with the apparatus fully loaded and a continuous run of no less than ten

(10) miles. During that time the apparatus will show no loss of power nor will it overheat. The transmission drive shaft or shafts and the axles will run quietly and be free of abnormal vibration or noise. The apparatus when fully loaded will not have less than 25 percent nor more than 50 percent on

2 of 117

the front axle, and not less than 50 percent nor more than 75 percent on the rear axle. The apparatus will meet NFPA 1901 acceleration and braking requirements.

SERVICE AND WARRANTY SUPPORT

Pierce dealership support will be provided by Fire & Safety Services LTD. by operating a Pierce authorized service center. The service center will have factory-trained mechanics on staff versed in

Pierce fire apparatus. The service facility will be located within fifty (50) miles of the fire department.

In addition to the dealership, Pierce has service facilities located in both, Weyauwega, Wisconsin and

Bradenton, Florida. Pierce also maintains a dedicated parts facility of over 100,000 square feet in

Appleton, Wisconsin. The parts facility stocks in excess of $5,000,000 in parts dedicated to service and replacement parts. The parts facility employs a staff dedicated solely for the distribution and shipment of service and replacement parts.

Service parts for the apparatus being proposed can be found via Pierceparts.com which, is an interactive online tool that delivers information regarding your specific apparatus as well as the opportunity to register for training classes.

As a Pierce customer you have the ability to view the complete bill of materials for your specific apparatus, including assembly drawings, piece part drawings, and beneficial parts notations. You will also have the ability to search the complete Pierce item master through a parts search function which offers all Pierce SKU's and descriptions offered on all Pierce apparatus. Published component catalogs, which include proprietary systems along with an extensive operators manual library is available for easy reference.

Pierce Manufacturing maintains a dedicated service and warranty staff of over 35 personnel, dedicated to customer support, which also maintains a 24 hour 7 day a week toll free hot line, four (4) on staff

EVTs, and offers hands-on repair and maintenance training classes multiple times a year.

COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE

Certification of insurance coverage will be enclosed.

SINGLE SOURCE MANUFACTURER

Pierce Manufacturing, Inc. provides an integrated approach to the design and manufacture of our products that delivers superior apparatus and a dedicated support team. From our facilities, the chassis, cab weldment, cab, pumphouse (including the sheet metal enclosure, valve controls, piping and operators panel) body and aerial device will be entirely designed, tested, and hand assembled to the customer's exact specifications. The electrical system either hardwired or multiplexed, will be both designed and integrated by Pierce Manufacturing. The warranties relative to these major components

(excluding component warranties such as engine, transmission, axles, pump, etc.) will be provided by

Pierce as a single source manufacturer. Pierce's single source solution adds value by providing a fully engineered product that offers durability, reliability, maintainability, performance, and a high level of quality.

3 of 117

Your apparatus will be manufactured in Appleton, Wisconsin.

NFPA 2009 STANDARDS

This unit will comply with the NFPA standards effective January 1, 2009, except for fire department directed exceptions. These exceptions will be set forth in the Statement of Exceptions.

Certification of slip resistance of all stepping, standing and walking surfaces will be supplied with delivery of the apparatus.

A plate that is highly visible to the driver while seated will be provided. This plate will show the overall height, length, and gross vehicle weight rating.

The manufacturer will have programs in place for training, proficiency testing and performance for any staff involved with certifications.

An official of the company will designate, in writing, who is qualified to witness and certify test results.

NFPA COMPLIANCY

Apparatus proposed by the bidder will meet the applicable requirements of the National Fire Protection

Association (NFPA) as stated in current edition at time of contract execution. Fire department's specifications that differ from NFPA specifications will be indicated in the proposal as "non-NFPA".

VEHICLE INSPECTION PROGRAM CERTIFICATION

To assure the vehicle is built to current NFPA standards, the apparatus, in its entirety, will be thirdparty, audit-certified through Underwriters Laboratory (UL) that it is built and complies to all applicable standards in the current edition of NFPA 1901. The certification will include: all design, production, operational, and performance testing of not only the apparatus, but those components that are installed on the apparatus.

A placard will be affixed in the driver's side area stating the third party agency, the date, the standard and the certificate number of the whole vehicle audit.

INSPECTION CERTIFICATE

A third party inspection certificate for the aerial device will be furnished upon delivery of the aerial device. The certificate will be Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Type 1 and will indicate that the aerial device has been inspected on the production line and after final assembly.

Visual structural inspections will be performed on all welds on both aluminum and steel ladders.

On critical weld areas, or on any suspected defective area, the following tests will be conducted:

- Magnetic particle inspection will be conducted on steel aerials to assure the integrity of the weldments and to detect any flaws or weaknesses. Magnets will be placed on each side of the weld while iron powder is placed on the weld itself. The powder will detect any crack that may

4 of 117

exist. This test will conform to ASTM E709 and be performed prior to assembly of the aerial device.

- A liquid penetrant test will be conducted on aluminum aerials to assure the integrity of the weldments and to detect any flaws or weaknesses. This test will conform to ASTM E165 and be performed prior to assembly of the aerial device.

- Ultrasonic inspection will conducted on all aerials to detect any flaws in pins, bolts and other critical mounting components.

In addition to the tests above, functional tests, load tests, and stability tests will be performed on all aerials. These tests will determine any unusual deflection, noise, vibration, or instability characteristics of the unit.

PUMP TEST

The pump will be tested, approved and certified by Underwriter's Laboratory at the manufacturer's expense. The test results and the pump manufacturer's certification of hydrostatic test; the engine manufacturer's certified brake horsepower curve; and the manufacturer's record of pump construction details will be forwarded to the Fire Department.

GENERATOR TEST

If the unit has a generator, the generator will be tested, approved, and certified by Underwriters

Laboratories at the manufacturer's expense. The test results will be provided to the Fire Department at the time of delivery.

BREATHING AIR TEST

If the unit has breathing air, Pierce Manufacturing will draw an air sample from the air system and certify that the air quality meets the requirements of NFPA 1989, Standard on Breathing Air Quality for

Fire and Emergency Services Respiratory Protection.

PIERCE/VCOS PARTNERSHIP

For every fire or emergency apparatus sold to a volunteer or combination fire department, Pierce

Manufacturing will make a $100 donation to the Volunteer Chief Officers Section (VCOS) of the IAFC

Partnership when the apparatus is delivered. The VCOS will invest these funds in leadership education,

NFPA Technical Committee representation and VCOS general operations.

DELIVERY

Apparatus, to insure proper break in of all components while still under warranty, will be delivered under it own power. A qualified delivery person representing the contractor shall deliver the apparatus and remain for a sufficient length of time to instruct personnel in the proper operation, care and maintenance of the delivered unit (s).

5 of 117

DELIVERY TRAINING

Factory authorized delivery training will be provided by Fire and Safety Services, LTD, the New Jersey representative for Pierce Manufacturing, Inc. This training will consist of a Power Point presentation, using images and descriptions of the customer's own apparatus, as well as hands-on training in the use and proper care of the apparatus. A copy of the Power Point presentation will be provided to the purchaser, to be used in subsequent training of new and existing personnel.

INSPECTION TRIP(S)

The bidder will provide two (2) factory inspection trip(s) for 5 customer representative(s). The inspection trip(s) will be scheduled at times mutually agreed upon between the manufacturer's representative and the customer. All costs such as travel, lodging and meals will be the responsibility of the bidder.

AFTERMARKET SUPPORT WEBSITE

Pierceparts.com will provide Pierce authorized dealer access to comprehensive information pertaining to the maintenance and service of their customer's apparatus. This tool will provide the Pierce authorized dealer the ability to service and support their customers to the best of their ability with factory support at their fingertips.

Pierceparts.com is also accessible to the end user through the guest login. Limited access is available and vehicle specific parts information accessible by entering a specific VIN number. All end users should see their local authorized Pierce dealer for additional support and service.

The website will consist of the following screens at the dealer level:

My Fleet Screen

The My Fleet screen will provide access to truck detail information on the major components of the vehicle, warranty information, available vehicle photographs, vehicle drawings, sales options, applicable vehicle software downloads, etc.

Parts Screens

The Parts screens will provide parts look-up capability of Pierce Manufacturing sourced items, with the aid of digital photographs, part drawings and assembly drawings. The parts search application will permit the searching of parts by item description or function group (major system category). The parts application will provide the ability to submit electronically a parts order, parts quote, or parts return request directly to Pierce Manufacturing for processing.

Warranty Screen

The Warranty screens will provide dealers the ability to submit electronically warranty claims directly to

Pierce Manufacturing for reimbursement.

My Reports Screens

6 of 117

The My Reports screens will provide access to multiple dealer reports to allow the dealership to maintain communication with the customer on the status of orders, claims, and phone contacts.

Technical Support Screens

The Technical Support screens will provide access to all currently published Operation and Maintenance and Service Publications. Access to Pierce Manufacturing Service Bulletins and Work Instructions, containing information on current service topics and recommendations will be provided.

Training

The Training screens will provide access to upcoming training classes offered by Pierce Manufacturing along with interactive electronic learning modules (Operators Guides) covering the operation of major vehicle components will be provided. Access to training manuals used in Pierce Manufacturing training classes will be provided.

About Pierce

Access to customer service articles, corporate news, quarterly newsletters, and key contacts within the

Customer Service Department will be provided. The current Customer Service Policy and Procedure

Manual, detailing the operation of the Customer Service group will also be accessible.

BID BOND

A bid bond as security for the bid in the form of a 10% bid bond, not to exceed $20,000.00 has been supplied as per the requirements in the purchasing authority's specifications. See the appropriate section of the bid package for the bond.

PERFORMANCE BOND, 1 YEAR

The successful bidder will furnish a Performance and Payment bond (Bond) equal to 100 percent of the total contract amount within 30 days of the notice of award. Such Bond will be in a form acceptable to the Owner and issued by a surety company included within the Department of Treasury's Listing of

Approved Sureties (Department Circular 570) with a minimum A.M. Best Financial Strength Rating of

A and Size Category of XV. In the event of a bond issued by a surety of a lesser Size Category, a minimum Financial Strength rating of A+ is required.

Bidder and Bidder's surety agree that the Bond issued hereunder, whether expressly stated or not, also includes the surety's guarantee of the vehicle manufacturer's Basic One (1) Year Limited Warranty period included within this proposal. Owner agrees that the penal amount of this bond will be simultaneously amended to 25 percent of the total contract amount upon satisfactory acceptance and delivery of the vehicle(s) included herein. Notwithstanding anything contained within this contract to the contrary, the surety's liability for any warranties of any type will not exceed one (1) year from the date of such satisfactory acceptance and delivery, or the actual Basic One (1) Year Limited Warranty period, whichever is shorter.

7 of 117

APPROVAL DRAWING

A drawing of the proposed apparatus will be prepared and provided to the purchaser for approval before construction begins. The Pierce sales representative will also be provided with a copy of the same drawing. The finalized and approved drawing will become part of the contract documents. This drawing will indicate the chassis make and model, location of the lights, siren, horns, compartments, major components, etc.

A "revised" approval drawing of the apparatus will be prepared and submitted by Pierce to the purchaser showing any changes made to the approval drawing.

ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS

Two (2) electrical wiring diagrams, prepared for the model of chassis and body, will be provided.

ARROW XT CHASSIS

The Pierce Arrow XT™ is the custom chassis developed exclusively for the fire service. Chassis provided will be a new, tilt type custom fire apparatus. The chassis will be manufactured in the apparatus body builder's facility eliminating any split responsibility. The chassis will be designed and manufactured for heavy duty service, with adequate strength, capacity for the intended load to be sustained, and the type of service required. The chassis will be the manufacturer's heavy duty line tilt cab.

WHEELBASE

The wheelbase of the vehicle will be 226.50".

GVW RATING

The gross vehicle weight rating will be 53,000.

FRAME

The chassis frame will be built with two (2) steel channels bolted to five (5) cross members or more, depending on other options of the apparatus. The side rails will have a 13.38" tall web over the front and mid sections of the chassis, with a continuous smooth taper to 10.75" over the rear axle. Each rail will have a section modulus of 25.992 cubic inches and a resisting bending moment (rbm) of 3,119,040 in-lb over the critical regions of the frame assembly, with a section modulus of 18.96 cubic inches with an rbm of 2,275,200 in-lb over the rear axle. The frame rails will be constructed of 120,000 psi yield strength heat-treated 0.38" thick steel with 3.50" wide flanges.

FRAME LINER

A full-length mainframe liner will be provided.

The liner will be an inverted "L" design that transitions to an internal "C" design towards the rear of the liner. It will be heat-treated steel measuring 12.00" x 3.00" x .25" through the "L" portion of the liner transitioning to 9.38" x 3.00" x .25" through the "C" portion of the liner.

8 of 117

Each liner will have a section modulus of 7.795 cubic inches, yield strength of 110,000 psi, and rbm of

857,462 in-lb. Total rbm at wheelbase center will be 3,976,502 in-lb.

FRONT NON DRIVE AXLE

The Oshkosh TAK-4® front axle will be of the independent suspension design with a ground rating of

24,000 lb.

Upper and lower control arms will be used on each side of the axle. Upper control arm castings will be made of 100,000-psi yield strength 8630 steel and the lower control arm casting will be made of 55,000psi yield ductile iron.

The center cross members and side plates will be constructed out of 80,000-psi yield strength steel.

Each control arm will be mounted to the center section using elastomer bushings. These rubber bushings will rotate on low friction plain bearings and be lubricated for life. Each bushing will also have a flange end to absorb longitudinal impact loads, reducing noise and vibrations.

There will be nine (9) grease fittings supplied, one (1) on each control arm pivot and one (1) on the steering gear extension.

The upper control arm will be shorter than the lower arm so that wheel end geometry provides positive camber when deflected below rated load and negative camber above rated load.

Camber at load will be zero degrees for optimum tire life.

The ball joint bearing will be of low friction design and be maintenance free.

Toe links that are adjustable for alignment of the wheel to the center of the chassis will be provided.

The wheel ends must have little to no bump steer when the chassis encounters a hole or obstacle.

The steering linkage will provide proper steering angles for the inside and outside wheel, based on the vehicle wheelbase.

The axle will have a third party certified turning angle of 40 degrees. Front discharge, front suction, or aluminum wheels will not infringe on this cramp angle.

FRONT SUSPENSION

Front Oshkosh TAK-4™ independent suspension will be provided with a minimum ground rating of

24,000 lb.

The independent suspension system has been designed to provide maximum ride comfort. The design will allow the vehicle to travel at highway speeds over improved road surfaces and at moderate speeds over rough terrain with minimal transfer of road shock and vibration to the vehicle's crew compartment.

9 of 117

Each wheel will have a torsion bar type spring. In addition, each front wheel end will also have energy absorbing jounce bumpers to prevent bottoming of the suspension.

The suspension design will be such that there is at least 10.00" of total wheel travel and a minimum of

3.75" before suspension bottoms.

The torsion bar anchor lock system allows for simple lean adjustments, without the use of shims. One can adjust for a lean within fifteen minutes per side. Anchor adjustment design is such that it allows for ride height adjustment on each side.

The independent suspension was put through a durability test that simulated 140,000 miles of inner city driving.

FRONT SHOCK ABSORBERS

KONI heavy-duty telescoping shock absorbers will be provided on the front suspension.

FRONT OIL SEALS

Oil seals with viewing window will be provided on the front axle.

FRONT TIRES

Front tires will be Goodyear 425/65R22.50 radials, 20 ply G296 tread, rated for 24,400 lb maximum axle load and 68 mph maximum speed.

The tires will be mounted on 22.50" x 12.25" steel disc type wheels with a ten (10)-stud, 11.25" bolt circle.

REAR AXLE

The rear axle will be a Meritor™, Model RS-30-185, with a capacity of 33,500 lb.

TOP SPEED OF VEHICLE

A rear axle ratio will be furnished to allow the vehicle to reach a top speed of 60 mph.

REAR SUSPENSION

The rear springs will have a ground rating of 33,500 lb. Spring hangers will be castings with provisions for lubrication. The grease fittings will be 90-degree type and will be accessible without removing the wheels or cutting any sheet metal. Two (2) top leaves will wrap the forward spring hanger pin and the top leaf will wrap the rear spring hanger pin on both the front and rear suspensions.

Kaiser spring pins will be provided, with double figure-eight grease grooves and a layer of electroless nickel plating, 1.0 mil thick, around the entire pin. The bushing that holds the spring pin in place will also have a grease groove.

REAR OIL SEALS

Oil seals will be provided on the rear axle.

10 of 117

REAR TIRES

Rear tires will be four (4) Goodyear 315/80R22.50 radials with 20 ply G289 WHA tread, rated for

36,360 lb maximum axle load and 68 mph maximum speed.

The tires will be mounted on 22.50" x 9.00" steel disc type wheels with a ten (10) stud,11.25" bolt circle.

TIRE BALANCE

All tires will be balanced with Counteract balancing beads. The beads will be inserted into the tire and eliminate the need for wheel weights.

TIRE PRESSURE MANAGEMENT

There will be a VECSAFE LED tire alert pressure management system provided that will monitor each tire's pressure. A chrome plated brass sensor will be provided on the valve stem of each tire for a total of six (6) tires.

The sensor will calibrate to the tire pressure when installed on the valve stem for pressures between 20 and 120 psi. The sensor will activate an integral battery operated LED when the pressure of that tire drops 8 psi.

Removing the cap from the sensor will indicate the functionality of the sensor and battery. If the sensor and battery are in working condition, the LED will immediately start blinking.

CHROME LUG NUT COVERS

Chrome lug nut covers will be supplied on front and rear wheels.

WHEEL CHOCKS

There will be one (1) pair of folding Ziamatic, Model SAC-44-E, aluminum alloy, Quick-Choc wheel blocks, with easy-grip handle provided.

WHEEL CHOCK BRACKETS

There will be one (1) pair of Zico, Model SQCH-44-H, horizontal mounting wheel chock brackets provided for the Ziamatic, Model SAC-44-E, folding wheel chocks. The brackets will be made of aluminum and consist of a quick release spring loaded rod to hold the wheel chocks in place. The brackets will be mounted ahead of the rear axle, on the drivers side.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

The vehicle will be equipped with a Meritor WABCO 4S4M, anti-lock braking system. The ABS will provide a 4-channel anti-lock braking control on both the front and rear wheels. A digitally controlled system that utilizes microprocessor technology will control the anti-lock braking system. Each wheel will be monitored by the system. When any particular wheel begins to lockup, a signal will be sent to the control unit. This control unit then will reduce the braking of that wheel for a fraction of a second and then reapply the brake. This anti-lock brake system will eliminate the lockup of any wheel thus helping to prevent the apparatus from skidding out of control.

11 of 117

BRAKES

The service brake system will be full air type.

The front brakes will be Knorr/Bendix disc type with a 17.00" ventilated rotor for improved stopping distance.

The brake system will be certified, third party inspected, for improved stopping distance.

The rear brakes will be Meritor™ 16.50" x 8.63" cam operated with automatic slack adjusters.

AIR COMPRESSOR, BRAKE SYSTEM

The air compressor will be a Bendix®, Model BA-921, with 15.80 cubic feet per minute output at 1,250 rpm.

BRAKE SYSTEM

The brake system will include:

Bendix® dual brake treadle valve with vinyl covered foot surface

Heated automatic moisture ejector on air dryer

Total air system capacity of 5,198 cubic inches

Two (2) air pressure gauges with a red warning light and an audible alarm, that activates when air pressure falls below 60 psi

Spring set parking brake system

Parking brake operated by a push-pull style control valve

A parking "brake on" indicator light on instrument panel

Park brake relay/inversion and anti-compounding valve, in conjunction with a double check valve system, with an automatic spring brake application at 40 psi

A pressure protection valve to prevent all air operated accessories from drawing air from the air system when the system pressure drops below 80 psi (550 kPa)

The air tank will be primed and painted to meet a minimum 750 hour salt spray test.

To reduce the effects of corrosion, the air tank will be mounted with stainless steel brackets.

BRAKE SYSTEM AIR DRYER

The air dryer will be WABCO System Saver 1200 with spin-on coalescing filter cartridge and 100 watt heater.

BRAKE LINES

Color-coded nylon brake lines will be provided. The lines will be wrapped in a heat protective loom in the chassis areas that are subject to excessive heat.

12 of 117

AIR INLET

One (1) air inlet with male coupling will be provided. It will allow station air to be supplied to the apparatus brake system through a shoreline hose. The inlet will be located mounted ahead of crew cab door at driver's side of cab. A check valve will be provided to prevent reverse flow of air. The inlet will discharge into the "wet" tank of the brake system. A mating female coupling will also be provided with the loose equipment.

ALL WHEEL LOCK-UP

An additional all wheel lock-up system will be installed which applies air to the front brakes only. The standard spring brake control valve system will be used for the rear.

ENGINE

The chassis will be powered by an electronically controlled engine as described below:

Make:

Model:

Power:

Torque:

Governed Speed: 2080 rpm

Emissions Level: EPA 2013

Fuel:

Cylinders:

Displacement:

Starter:

Fuel Filters:

Coolant Filter:

Diesel

Six (6)

781 cubic inches (12.8L)

Delco Remy 39MT™

Dual cartridge style with check valve, water separator, and water in fuel sensor

Cartridge style with shut off valves on the supply and return line

Detroit™

DD13®

500 hp at 1800 rpm

1650 lb-ft at 1200 rpm

The engine will include On-board diagnostics (OBD), which provides self diagnostic and reporting. The system will give the owner or repair technician access to state of health information for various vehicle sub systems. The system will monitor vehicle systems, engine and after treatment. The system will illuminate a malfunction indicator light on the dash console if a problem is detected.

HIGH IDLE

A high idle switch will be provided, inside the cab, on the instrument panel, that will automatically maintain a preset engine rpm. A switch will be installed, at the cab instrument panel, for activation/deactivation.

The high idle will be operational only when the parking brake is on and the truck transmission is in neutral. A green indicator light will be provided, adjacent to the switch. The light will illuminate when the above conditions are met. The light will be labeled "OK to Engage High Idle."

13 of 117

ENGINE BRAKE

A Jacobs® engine brake is to be installed with the controls located on the instrument panel within easy reach of the driver.

The driver will be able to turn the engine brake system on/off and have a high, medium and low setting.

The engine brake will be installed in such a manner that when the engine brake is slowing the vehicle the brake lights are activated.

The ABS system will automatically disengage the auxiliary braking device when required.

CLUTCH FAN

A Horton® fan clutch will be provided. The fan clutch will be automatic when the pump transmission is in "Road" position, and fully engaged in "Pump" position.

ENGINE AIR INTAKE

The air intake with an ember separator will be mounted high on the passenger side of the cab, to the front of the crew cab door. The ember separator is designed to prevent road dirt and recirculating hot air from entering the engine. The ember separator will be easily accessible through a hinged stainless steel grille, with one (1) flush quarter turn latch.

EXHAUST SYSTEM

The exhaust system will include a diesel particulate filter (DPF) and a selective catalytic reduction

(SCR) device to meet current EPA standards. The exhaust system will be stainless steel from the turbo to the inlet of the SCR device and will be 5.00" in diameter. An insulation wrap will be provided on all exhaust pipes between the turbo and SCR to minimize the transfer of heat to the cab. The exhaust will terminate horizontally ahead of the passenger side rear wheels. A tailpipe diffuser will be provided to reduce the temperature of the exhaust as it exits. Heat deflector shields will be provided to isolate chassis and body components from the heat of the tailpipe diffuser.

RADIATOR

The radiator and the complete cooling system will meet or exceed NFPA and engine manufacturer cooling system standards.

For maximum cooling performance, the radiator core will be made of copper fins having a serpentine design, soldered to brass tubes. The tubes will be welded to brass headers using the patented Beta-Weld process for increased strength, longer road life and solder-bloom corrosion protection. The radiator core will have a minimum frontal area of 1,396 square inches. Steel supply and return tanks will be bolted to the core headers and steel side channels to complete the radiator assembly. The radiator will be compatible with commercial antifreeze solutions.

The radiator will be mounted in such a manner as to prevent the development of leaks caused by twisting or straining when the apparatus operates over uneven ground. The radiator assembly will be isolated from the chassis frame rails with rubber isolators.

14 of 117

The radiator will include an integral de-aeration tank, with a remote-mounted overflow tank. For visual coolant level inspection, the radiator will have a built-in sight glass. The radiator will be equipped with a 15 psi pressure relief cap.

A drain port will be located at the lowest point of the cooling system and/or the bottom of the radiator to permit complete flushing of the coolant from the system.

A heavy-duty fan will draw in fresh, cool air through the radiator. Shields or baffles will be provided to prevent recirculation of hot air to the inlet side of the radiator.

COOLANT LINES

Gates® silicone hoses will be used for all engine/heater coolant lines installed by the chassis manufacturer.

The chassis manufacturer will also use Gates brand hose on other heater, defroster and auxiliary coolant circuits. There will be some areas in which an appropriate Gates product is not available. In those instances a comparable silicone hose from another manufacturer will be used.

Hose clamps will be stainless steel constant torque type to prevent coolant leakage. They will react to temperature changes in the cooling system and expand or contract accordingly while maintaining a constant clamping pressure on the hose.

FUEL TANK

A 65 gallon fuel tank will be provided and mounted at the rear of the chassis. The tank will be constructed of 12-gauge, hot rolled steel. It will be equipped with swash partitions and a vent. To eliminate the effects of corrosion, the fuel tank will be mounted with stainless steel straps.

A 0.75" drain plug will be located in a low point of the tank for drainage.

A fill inlet will be located on the rear of the body and is covered with a hinged, spring loaded, stainless steel door that is marked "Ultra Low Sulfur - Diesel Fuel Only".

A 0.50" diameter vent will be installed from tank top to just below fuel fill inlet.

The fuel tank will meet all FHWA 393.67 requirements including a fill capacity of 95 percent of tank volume.

All fuel lines will be provided as recommended by the engine manufacturer.

DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID TANK

A 4.5 gallon diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) tank will be provided and mounted in the driver's side body forward of the rear axle.

A 0.50" drain plug will be provided in a low point of the tank for drainage.

15 of 117

A fill inlet will be located on the driver's side of the body and be covered with a hinged, spring loaded, polished stainless steel door that is marked "Diesel Exhaust Fluid Only".

The tank will meet the engine manufacturers requirement for 10 percent expansion space in the event of tank freezing.

The tank will include an integrated heater unit that utilizes engine coolant to thaw the DEF in the event of freezing.

AUXILIARY FUEL PUMP

An auxiliary electric fuel pump will be added to the fuel line for priming the engine. A switch located on the cab instrument panel will be provided to operate the pump.

FUEL COOLER

An air to fuel cooler will be installed in the engine fuel return line.

TRANSMISSION

An Allison 5th generation, Model EVS 4000P, electronic, torque converting, automatic transmission will be provided.

The transmission will be equipped with prognostics to monitor oil life, filter life, and transmission health. A wrench icon on the shift selector's digital display will indicate when service is due.

Two (2) PTO openings will be located on left side and top of converter housing (positions 8 o'clock and

1 o'clock).

A transmission temperature gauge with red light and buzzer will be installed on the cab instrument panel.

TRANSMISSION SHIFTER

A six (6)-speed T-Handle shift module will be mounted to right of driver on console. Shift position indicator will be indirectly lit for after dark operation.

The transmission ratio will be 1st - 3.51 to 1.00, 2nd - 1.91 to 1.00, 3rd - 1.43 to 1.00, 4th - 1.00 to 1.00,

5th - 0.75 to 1.00, 6th - 0.64 to 1.00, R- 4.80 to 1.00.

TRANSMISSION COOLER

A transmission oil cooler will be provided that is integral to the radiator and located at the bottom of the radiator. The cooler will use engine coolant to control the transmission oil temperature.

DRIVELINE

Drivelines will be a heavy-duty metal tube and be equipped with Spicer® 1810 universal joints.

The shafts will be dynamically balanced before installation.

16 of 117

A splined slip joint will be provided in each driveshaft. The slip joint will be coated with Glidecoat® or equivalent.

STEERING

Dual Sheppard, Model M110, steering gears, with integral heavy-duty power steering, will be provided.

For reduced system temperatures, the power steering will incorporate an air to oil cooler and an Eaton,

Model VN20, hydraulic pump with integral pressure and flow control. All power steering lines will have wire braded lines with crimped fittings.

A tilt and telescopic steering column will be provided to improve fit for a broader range of driver configurations.

STEERING WHEEL

The steering wheel will be 18.00" in diameter, have tilting and telescoping capabilities, and a 4-spoke design.

LOGO AND CUSTOMER DESIGNATION ON DASH

The dash panel will have an emblem containing the Pierce logo and customer name. The emblem will have three (3) rows of text for the customer's department name. There will be a maximum of eight (8) characters in the first row, 11 characters in the second row and 11 characters in the third row.

The first row of text will be: "no text"

The second row of text will be: Princeton

The third row of text will be: Fire

BUMPER

The bumper will be manufactured from .25" formed steel with a 3/8" bend radius. The bumper will be

10.00" high with a 1.5" top and bottom flange. The bumper will be one piece. With the front face of the bumper to be 81.00" with a 9.00" 45 degree corners with side plates extending back approximately

10.00". The bumper will be metal finished and painted job color.

The bumper will be extended 19.00" from front face of cab.

GRAVEL PAN

A gravel pan, constructed of bright aluminum treadplate, will be furnished between the bumper and cab face. The gravel pan will be properly supported from the underside to prevent flexing and vibration of the aluminum treadplate.

LEFT SIDE HOSE TRAY

A hose tray will be placed in the left side of the extended bumper.

The tray will have a capacity of 100' of 1.75" double jacket cotton-polyester hose.

17 of 117

Black rubber grating will be provided at the bottom of the tray. Drain holes will be provided.

BUMPER HOSE RESTRAINT

There will be two (2) pairs hose tray restraint straps located over the left side mounted tray.

The restraints will be a pair of 2.00" wide black nylon straps with Velcro fasteners provided. The strap(s) will be used to secure the hose in the tray.

LIFT AND TOW MOUNTS

Mounted to the frame extension will be lift and tow mounts. The lift and tow mounts will be designed and positioned to adapt to certain tow truck lift systems.

The lift and tow mounts with eyes will be painted the same color as the frame.

TOW HOOKS

No tow hooks are to be provided. This truck will be equipped with a lift and tow package with integral tow eyes.

SIGHT RODS

There will be two (2) Bores, Model 848-211, lighted polished stainless steel sight rods mounted to the outside corners of the front bumper extension.

The lights at the end of each rod will be activated when the running lights are activated.

The lights will also flash with the respective directional light.

LINE-X® COATING - FRONT BUMPER

Protective Line-X coating will be provided on the outside exterior of the top front bumper flange. It will not be sprayed on the underside of the flange. The protective coating will be red in color.

The lining will be properly installed by an authorized Line-X dealer.

CAB

The Arrow XT cab will be designed specifically for the fire service and will be manufactured by the chassis builder.

The cab will be built by the apparatus manufacturer in a facility located on the manufacturer's premises.

For reasons of structural integrity and enhanced occupant protection, the cab will be of heavy duty design, constructed to the following minimal standards.

The cab will have 12 main vertical structural members located in the A-pillar (front cab corner posts), Bpillar (side center posts), C-pillar (rear corner posts) and rear wall areas. The A-pillar will be constructed of solid A356-T5 aluminum. The B-pillar and C-pillar will be constructed from 0.25" heavy wall extrusions. The rear wall will be constructed of two (2) 4.00" x 2.00" outer aluminum extrusions and two (2) 3.00" x 2.00" inner aluminum extrusions. All main vertical structural members will run

18 of 117

from the floor to 6.50" x 4.875" x 0.1875" thick roof extrusions to provide a cage-like structure with the

A-pillar and roof extrusions being welded into a 0.36" thick corner casting at each of the front corners of the roof assembly.

The front of the cab will be constructed of a 0.25" thick gusset plate, covered with a 0.090" front skin

(for a total thickness of 0.34"), and reinforced with a 95.00" wide x 11.13" deep x 0.50" thick cross-cab support located just below the windshield. The cross-cab support will run the full width of the cab and weld to each A-pillar, the 0.25" thick gusset plate and the front skin.

The cab floors will be constructed of 0.1875" thick aluminum plate and reinforced at the firewall with an additional 0.50" thick cross-floor support providing a total thickness of 0.6875" of structural material at the front floor area. The front floor area will also be supported with one (1) 0.50" plate bolted to one (1)

0.78" plate that also provides the mounting point for the cab lift. This tubing will run from the front of the cab to the 0.187" thick engine tunnel, creating the structure to support the forces created when lifting the cab.

The cab will be 94.75" wide (outside door skin to outside door skin) to maintain maximum maneuverability.

The forward cab section will have an overall height (from the cab roof to the ground) of approximately

103.00". The crew cab section will have a 10.00" raised roof, with an overall cab height of approximately 113.00". The overall height listed will be calculated based on a truck configuration with the lowest suspension weight ratings, the smallest diameter tires for the suspension, no water weight, no loose equipment weight, and no personnel weight. Larger tires, wheels, and suspension will increase the overall height listed.

The raised roof section of the crew cab will have a 58.00" wide x 10.00" high square notch in the center section of the roof. This will allow the aerial device to be bedded in the same location as a non-raised roof.

The floor to ceiling height inside the crew cab will be 54.00" in the center and 69.25" in the outboard positions.

The crew cab floor will measure 40.12" from rear wall to the back side of engine tunnel.

The engine tunnel, at the rearward highest point (knee level), will measure 47.75" to the back wall.

The crew cab will be of the totally enclosed design with access doors constructed in the same manner as the driver and passenger doors.

The cab will be a full tilt cab style.

A 3-point cab mount system with rubber isolators will improve ride quality by isolating chassis vibrations from the cab.

19 of 117

INTERIOR CAB INSULATION

The cab will include 1.50" insulation in the ceiling and side walls, and 2.00" insulation in the rear wall to maximize acoustic absorption and thermal insulation.

FENDER LINERS

Full circular inner fender liners in the wheel wells will be provided.

WINDSHIELD

A curved safety glass windshield will be provided with over 2,754 square inches of clear viewing area.

The cab windshield will have bright trim inserts in the rubber molding holding the glass in place.

Economical windshield replacement glass will be readily available from local auto glass suppliers.

All cab glass will be tinted.

WINDSHIELD WIPERS

Two (2) electric windshield wipers with washer will be provided that meet FMVSS and SAE requirements.

The washer reservoir will be able to be filled without raising the cab.

GLOVE BOX

A glove box with a drop-down door will be installed in the front dash panel in front of the officer's position.

ENGINE TUNNEL

Engine hood side walls will be constructed of 0.50" aluminum. The top will be constructed of 0.19" aluminum and will be tapered at the top to allow for more driver and passenger elbow room.

The engine hood will be insulated for protection from heat and sound. The noise insulation keeps the dBA level within the limits stated in the current NFPA 1901 standards.

CAB REAR WALL EXTERIOR COVERING

The exterior surface of the rear wall of the cab will be overlaid with bright aluminum treadplate except for areas that are not typically visible when the cab is lowered.

CAB LIFT

A hydraulic cab lift system will be provided consisting of an electric powered hydraulic pump, dual lift cylinders, and necessary hoses and valves.

The hydraulic pump will have a manual override for backup in the event of electrical failure.

Lift controls will be on a panel located on the pump panel or front area of the body in a convenient location.

20 of 117

The engine will be easily accessible and capable of being removed with the cab tilted. The cab will be capable of tilting 45 degrees and 90 degrees with crane assist.

Cab will be locked down by a 2-point automatic spring-loaded hook mechanism that actuates after the cab has been lowered.

The hydraulic cylinders will be equipped with a velocity fuse that protects the cab from accidentally descending when the control is located in the tilt position.

For increased safety, a redundant mechanical stay arm will be provided that must be manually put in place on the driver side between the chassis and cab frame when the cab is in the raised position. This device will be manually stowed to its original position before the cab can be lowered.

Cab Lift Interlock

The cab lift system will be interlocked to the parking brake. The cab tilt mechanism will be active only when the parking brake is set and the ignition switch is in the on position. If the parking brake is released, the cab tilt mechanism will be disabled.

GRILLE

A bright finished aluminum mesh grille screen, inserted behind a bright finished grille surround, will be provided on the front center of the cab.

MIRRORS

A Velvac®, Model 2010, west coast mirror will be mounted on each side of the front cab door. Mirror dimensions will be 7.00" wide x 16.00" high, and will be heated and motorized. The shell will be bright annealed stainless steel.

Both mirrors will be heated and have a remote control that is convenient to the driver.

FRONT CROSS VIEW MIRROR

There will be one (1) 8.00" diameter eyeball mirror provided on the passenger side front corner of the cab. It will be mounted high, above the windshield. The mirror will provide the driver with a view of the front bumper and the front of the truck.

The mirror housing, tubing, clamps and hardware will be constructed of corrosion resistant stainless steel.

Mirror head will be K-10, EB50S-S, 8.00" stainless steel housing with three (3) arms.

DOORS

To enhance entry and egress to the cab, the forward cab doors will be a minimum of 37.50" wide x

61.75" high. The crew cab doors will be located on the sides of the cab and will be constructed in the same manner as the forward cab doors. The crew cab doors will measure a minimum of 34.88" wide x

71.75" high.

21 of 117

The forward cab and crew cab doors will be constructed of extruded aluminum with a nominal material thickness of 0.125". The exterior door skins will be constructed from 0.090" aluminum.

A flush mounted, chrome plated paddle type door handle will be provided on the exterior of each cab door. Each door will also be provided with an interior flush paddle handle.

The cab doors will be provided with both interior (rotary knob) and exterior (keyed) locks as required by

FMVSS 206. The locks will be capable of activating when the doors are open or closed. The doors will remain locked if locks are activated when the doors are opened, then closed.

A full length, heavy duty, stainless steel, piano-type hinge with a 0.38" pin and 11 gauge leaf will be provided on all cab doors. There will be double automotive-type rubber seals around the perimeter of the door framing and door edges to ensure a weather-tight fit.

A chrome grab handle will be provided on the inside of each cab and crew cab door.

The cab steps at each door location will be located below the cab doors and will be exposed to the exterior of the cab.

DOOR PANELS

There will be a full height brushed stainless steel door panel installed on the inside of all cab doors. The cab door panels will be removable without disconnecting door and window mechanisms.

MANUAL CAB DOOR WINDOWS

All cab entry doors will contain a conventional roll down window.

CAB STEPS

The forward cab and crew cab access steps will be a full size two (2) step design to provide largest possible stepping surfaces for safe ingress and egress. The bottom steps will be designed with a grip pattern punched into bright aluminum treadplate material to provide support, slip resistance, and drainage. The bottom steps will be a bolt-in design to minimize repair costs should they need to be replaced. The forward cab steps will be a minimum 24.75" wide, and the crew cab steps will be 21.25" wide with an 8.00" minimum depth. The inside cab steps will not exceed 18.00" in height and be limited to two (2) steps. Three (3) step entrance designs will not be acceptable due to safety concerns.

A slip-resistant handrail will be provided adjacent to each cab door opening to assist during cab ingress and egress.

STEP LIGHTS

For reduced overall maintenance costs compared to incandescent lighting, there will be four (4) white

LED step lights provided. The lights will be installed at each cab and crew cab door, one (1) per step.

The lights will be located in the driver side front doorstep, driver side crew cab doorstep, passenger side front doorstep and passenger side crew cab doorstep.

22 of 117

In order to ensure exceptional illumination, each light will provide a minimum of 25 foot-candles (fc) covering an entire 15.00" x 15.00" square placed 10.00" below the light and a minimum of 1.5 fc covering an entire 30.00" x 30.00" square at the same 10.00" distance below the light.

The lights will be activated when the adjacent door is opened.

FENDER CROWNS

Rubber fender crowns will be provided around the cab wheel openings.

Crowns will be black.

CAB INTERIOR

The left and right side dash and center console will be a flat faced design to provide easy maintenance and will be constructed out of painted aluminum.

The engine tunnel will be padded and covered with 46 ounce leather grain vinyl resistant to oil, grease and mildew.

The headliner will be installed in both forward and rear cab sections. Headliner material will be vinyl.

A sound barrier will be part of its composition. Material will be installed on aluminum sheet and securely fastened to interior cab ceiling.

Forward portion of cab headliner will provide easy access for servicing electrical wiring or for other maintenance needs without removing the entire unit.

CAB INTERIOR UPHOLSTERY

The cab interior upholstery will be dark silver gray.

CAB INTERIOR PAINT

A rich looking interior will be provided by painting all the metal surfaces inside the cab gray, vinyl texture paint.

CAB FLOOR

The cab and crew cab flooring will be constructed with bright aluminum treadplate.

CAB DEFROSTER

There will be a 41,000 BTU defroster in the cab located under the engine tunnel.

The defroster ventilation will be built into the design of the cab dash instrument panel and will be easily removable for maintenance.

The defroster will have a 3-speed blower and temperature controls accessible to the driver and officer.

The defroster ducts will be designed to provide maximum defrosting capabilities for the front cab windows.

23 of 117

CAB/CREW CAB HEATER

Two (2) auxiliary heaters with 32,000 BTU each will be provided in the cab. The heaters will have a 3speed blower and temperature controls accessible to the driver and officer. There will also be louvers located below the rear facing seat riser and below the driver and officer positions for airflow.

The heaters will be mounted, one (1) within each rear facing seat riser.

AIR CONDITIONING

A high-performance, 24-volt DC customized air conditioning system will be furnished inside the cab and crew cab. A 19.10 cubic inch compressor will be installed on the engine.

The air conditioning system will be capable of cooling the average cab temperature from 100 degrees

Fahrenheit to 75 degrees Fahrenheit at 50 percent relative humidity within 30 minutes. The cooling performance test will be run only after the cab has been heat soaked at 100 degrees Fahrenheit for a minimum of 4 hours.

A roof-mounted condenser that meets and exceeds the performance specification will be installed on the cab roof. Mounting the condenser below the cab or body would reduce the performance of the system and will not be acceptable.

An evaporator unit that meets and exceeds the performance specification will be installed in the cab, located in the center of the cab ceiling over the engine tunnel. The evaporator will include two (2) high performance cores and plenums with multiple outlets, one (1) plenum directed to the front and one (1) plenum directed to the rear of the cab.

The evaporator unit will be provided with adjustable air outlets strategically located to direct air flow to the driver, officer and crew cab area.

All hose used will be class 1 type to reduce moisture ingression into the air conditioning system.

The air conditioner refrigerant will be R-134A and will be installed by a certified technician.

The air conditioner will be controlled by a single electronic control panel. For ease of operation, the control panel will include variable adjustment for temperature and fan control and be conveniently located on the dash in clear view of the driver. The control panel will include robust knobs for both fan speed and temperature adjustment.

SUN VISORS

Two (2) smoked Lexan™ sun visors provided. The sun visors will be located above the windshield with one (1) mounted on each side of the cab.

There will be no retention bracket provided to help secure each sun visor in the stowed position.

24 of 117

GRAB HANDLE

A black rubber covered grab handle will be mounted on the lower portion of the driver's side cab entrance to assist in entering the cab. The grab handle will be securely mounted to the post area between the door and steering wheel column.

A long rubber grab handle will be mounted on the dash board in front of the officer.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT LIGHT

An engine compartment light will be installed under the engine hood, of which the switch is an integral part. Light will have a .125" diameter hole in its lens to prevent moisture retention.

ACCESS TO ENGINE DIPSTICKS

For access to the engine oil and transmission fluid dipsticks, there will be a door on the engine tunnel, inside the crew cab. The door will be on the rear wall of the engine tunnel, on the vertical surface. The door will be 17.75" wide x 12.75" high and be flush with the wall of the engine tunnel.

The engine oil dipstick will allow for checking only. The transmission dipstick will allow for both checking and filling. An additional port will be provided for filling the engine oil.

The door will have a rubber seal for thermal and acoustic insulation. One (1) flush latch will be provided on the access door.

CAB SAFETY SYSTEM

The cab will be provided with a safety system designed to protect occupants in the event of a side roll or frontal impact, and will include the following:

A supplemental restraint system (SRS) sensor will be installed on a structural cab member behind the instrument panel. The SRS sensor will perform real time diagnostics of all critical subsystems and will record sensory inputs immediately before and during a side roll or frontal impact event.

A slave SRS sensor will be installed in the cab to provide capacity for eight (8) crew cab seating positions.

A fault-indicating light will be provided on the vehicle's instrument panel allowing the driver to monitor the operational status of the SRS system.

A driver side front air bag will be mounted in the steering wheel and will be designed to protect the head and upper torso of the occupant, when used in combination with the 3-point seat belt.

A passenger side knee bolster air bag will be mounted in the modesty panel below the dash panel and will be designed to protect the legs of the occupant, when used in combination with the 3point seat belt.

Air curtains will be provided in the outboard bolster of outboard seat backs to provide a cushion between occupant and the cab wall.

Suspension seats will be provided with devices to retract them to the lowest travel position during a side roll or frontal impact event.

25 of 117

Seat belts will be provided with pre-tensioners to remove slack from the seat belt during a side roll or frontal impact event.

FRONTAL IMPACT PROTECTION

The SRS system will provide protection during a frontal or oblique impact event. The system will activate when the vehicle decelerates at a predetermined G force known to cause injury to the occupants.

The cab and chassis will have been subjected, via third party test facility, to a crash impact during frontal and oblique impact testing. Testing included all major chassis and cab components such as mounting straps for fuel and air tanks, suspension mounts, front suspension components, rear suspensions components, frame rail cross members, engine and transmission and their mounts, pump house and mounts, frame extensions and body mounts. The testing provided configuration specific information used to optimize the timing for firing the safety restraint system. The sensor will activate the pyrotechnic devices when the correct crash algorithm, wave form, is detected.

The SRS system will deploy the following components in the event of a frontal or oblique impact event:

Driver side front air bag

Passenger side knee bolster air bag

Air curtains mounted in the outboard bolster of outboard seat backs

Suspension seats will be retracted to the lowest travel position

Seat belts will be pre-tensioned to firmly hold the occupant in place

SIDE ROLL PROTECTION

The SRS system will provide protection during a fast or slow 90 degree roll to the side, in which the vehicle comes to rest on its side. The system will analyze the vehicle's angle and rate of roll to determine the optimal activation of the advanced occupant restraints.

The SRS system will deploy the following components in the event of a side roll:

Air curtains mounted in the outboard bolster of outboard seat backs

Suspension seats will be retracted to the lowest travel position

Seat belts will be pre-tensioned to firmly hold the occupant in place

SEATING CAPACITY

The seating capacity in the cab will be six (6).

DRIVER SEAT

A seat will be provided in the cab for the driver. The seat design will be a cam action type, with air suspension. For increased convenience, the seat will include a manual control to adjust the horizontal position (6.00" travel). The manual horizontal control will be a towel-bar style located below the forward part of the seat cushion. To provide flexibility for multiple driver configurations, the seat will have an adjustable reclining back. The seat back will be a high back style with side bolster pads for

26 of 117

maximum support. For optimal comfort, the seat will be provided with 17.00" deep foam cushions designed with EVC (elastomeric vibration control).

The seat will include the following features incorporated into the side roll protection system:

Side air curtain will be mounted integral to the outboard bolster of the seat back. The air curtain will be covered by a decorative panel when in the stowed position.

A suspension seat safety system will be included. When activated in the event of a side roll, this system will pretension the seat belt and retract the seat to its lowest travel position.

The seat will be furnished with a 3-point, shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt tongue will be stored at waist position for quick application by the seat occupant. The seat belt receptacle will be provided on a cable conveniently nested next to the seat cushion, providing easy accessibility. The seat belt will be furnished with dual automatic retractors that will provide ease of operation in the normal seating position.

OFFICER SEAT

A seat will be provided in the cab for the passenger. The seat will be a fixed type, with no suspension.

For optimal comfort, the seat will be provided with 17.00" deep foam cushions designed with EVC

(elastomeric vibration control). To ensure safe operation, the seat will be equipped with seat belt sensors in the seat cushion and belt receptacle that will activate an alarm indicating a seat is occupied but not buckled.

The seat back will be an SCBA back style with 5 degree fixed recline angle. The SCBA cavity will be adjustable from front to rear in 1.00" increments, to accommodate different sized SCBA cylinders.

Moving the SCBA cavity will be accomplished by unbolting, relocating, and re-bolting it in the desired location.

The seat will include the following features incorporated into the side roll protection system:

Side air curtain will be mounted integral to the outboard bolster of the seat back. The air curtain will be covered by a decorative panel when in the stowed position.

A seat safety system will be included. When activated, this system will pretension the seat belt.

The seat will be furnished with a 3-point, shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt tongue will be stored at waist position for quick application by the seat occupant. The seat belt receptacle will be provided on a cable conveniently nested next to the seat cushion, providing easy accessibility. The seat belt will be furnished with dual automatic retractors that will provide ease of operation in the normal seating position.

RADIO COMPARTMENT

A radio compartment will be provided under the officer's seat.

The inside compartment dimensions will be 14.00" wide x 7.50" high x 14.50" deep.

27 of 117

A drop-down door with a chrome plated lift and turn latch will be provided for access.

The compartment will be constructed of smooth aluminum and painted to match the cab interior.

REAR FACING DRIVER SIDE OUTBOARD SEAT

There will be one (1) rear facing seat provided at the driver side outboard position in the crew cab. For optimal comfort, the seat will be provided with 15.00" deep foam cushions designed with EVC

(elastomeric vibration control). To ensure safe operation, the seat will be equipped with seat belt sensors in the seat cushion and belt receptacle that will activate an alarm indicating a seat is occupied but not buckled.

The seat back will be an SCBA back style with 5 degree fixed recline angle. The SCBA cavity will be adjustable from front to rear in 1.00" increments, to accommodate different sized SCBA cylinders.

Moving the SCBA cavity will be accomplished by unbolting, relocating, and re-bolting it in the desired location.

The seat will include the following features incorporated into the side roll protection system:

Side air curtain will be mounted integral to the outboard bolster of the seat back. The air curtain will be covered by a decorative panel when in the stowed position.

A seat safety system will be included. When activated this system will pretension the seat belt around the occupant to firmly hold them in place in the event of a side roll.

The seat will be furnished with a 3-point, shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt tongue will be stored at waist position for quick application by the seat occupant. The seat belt receptacle will be provided on a cable conveniently nested next to the seat cushion, providing easy accessibility. The seat belt will be furnished with dual automatic retractors that will provide ease of operation in the normal seating position.

REAR FACING PASSENGER SIDE OUTBOARD SEAT

There will be one (1) rear facing seat provided at the passenger side outboard position in the crew cab.

For optimal comfort, the seat will be provided with 15.00" deep foam cushions designed with EVC

(elastomeric vibration control). To ensure safe operation, the seat will be equipped with seat belt sensors in the seat cushion and belt receptacle that will activate an alarm indicating a seat is occupied but not buckled.

The seat back will be an SCBA back style with 5 degree fixed recline angle. The SCBA cavity will be adjustable from front to rear in 1.00" increments, to accommodate different sized SCBA cylinders.

Moving the SCBA cavity will be accomplished by unbolting, relocating, and re-bolting it in the desired location.

The seat will include the following features incorporated into the side roll protection system:

28 of 117

Side air curtain will be mounted integral to the outboard bolster of the seat back. The air curtain will be covered by a decorative panel when in the stowed position.

A seat safety system will be included. When activated this system will pretension the seat belt around the occupant to firmly hold them in place in the event of a side roll.

The seat will be furnished with a 3-point, shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt tongue will be stored at waist position for quick application by the seat occupant. The seat belt receptacle will be provided on a cable conveniently nested next to the seat cushion, providing easy accessibility. The seat belt will be furnished with dual automatic retractors that will provide ease of operation in the normal seating position.

FORWARD FACING DRIVER SIDE EMS COMPARTMENT

A forward facing EMS compartment will be provided in the crew cab located at the driver side outboard position.

The compartment will be 17.00" wide x 54.00" high x 14.00" deep with one (1) Gortite roll up door, non-locking with anodized finish. The clear door opening of the compartment will be 13.00" wide x

44.00" high.

The compartment will be constructed of smooth aluminum, and painted to match the cab interior.

Compartment Light

There will betwo (2) white LED strip lights, one (1) each side of the compartment opening. The lights will be controlled by an automatic door switch.

FORWARD FACING CENTER SEATS

There will be two (2) forward facing seats provided at the center position in the crew cab. For optimal comfort, the seats will be provided with 15.00" deep foam cushions designed with EVC (elastomeric vibration control). To ensure safe operation, the seats will be equipped with seat belt sensors in the seat cushion and belt receptacle that will activate an alarm indicating a seat is occupied but not buckled.

The seat backs will be an SCBA style with 90 degree back. The SCBA cavity will be adjustable from front to rear in 1.00" increments to accommodate different sized SCBA cylinders. Moving the SCBA cavity will be accomplished by unbolting, relocating, and re-bolting it in the desired location.

The seats will include the following feature incorporated into the side roll protection system:

A seat safety system will be included. When activated, this system will pretension the seat belts around the occupants to firmly hold them in place in the event of a side roll.

The seats will be furnished with 3-point shoulder type seat belts. The seat belt tongue will be stored at waist position for quick application by the seat occupant. The seat belt receptacle will be provided on a cable conveniently nested next to the seat cushion, providing easy accessibility. The seat belts will be

29 of 117

furnished with dual automatic retractors that will provide ease of operation in the normal seating position.

FORWARD FACING PASSENGER SIDE EMS COMPARTMENT

A forward facing EMS compartment will be provided in the crew cab located at the passenger side outboard position.

The compartment will be 17.00" wide x 54.00" high x 14.00" deep with one (1) Gortite roll up door, non-locking with anodized finish. The clear door opening of the compartment will be 13.00" wide x

44.00" high.

The compartment will be constructed of smooth aluminum, and painted to match the cab interior.

Compartment Light

There will be two (2) white LED strip lights, one (1) each side of the compartment opening. The lights will be controlled by an automatic door switch.

SHELVING

There will be two (2) shelves provided. Each shelf will be constructed of 0.090" aluminum with a 1.25" up-turned lip. Shelving will be infinitely adjustable by means of a threaded tightener sliding in a track.

The location will be one (1) shelf in the driver side forward facing EMS cabinet and one (1) shelf in the passenger side forward facing EMS cabinet.

SEAT UPHOLSTERY

All seat upholstery will be black Turnout Tuff material.

AIR BOTTLE HOLDERS

All SCBA type seats in the cab will have a "Hands-Free" auto clamp style bracket in its backrest. For efficiency and convenience, the bracket will include an automatic spring clamp that allows the occupant to store the SCBA bottle by simply pushing it into the seat back. For protection of all occupants in the cab, in the event of an accident, the inertial components within the clamp will constrain the SCBA bottle in the seat and will exceed the NFPA standard of 9G. Bracket designs with manual restraints (belts, straps, buckles) that could be inadvertently left unlocked and allow the SCBA to move freely within the cab during an accident, will not be acceptable.

There will be a quantity of five (5) SCBA brackets.

SEAT BELTS

All seating positions in the cab and crew cab will have red seat belts.

The belts will also include the Ready Reach® D-loop assembly to the shoulder belt system. The Ready

Reach feature adds an extender arm to the D-loop location placing the D-loop in a closer, easier to reach location.

30 of 117

SHOULDER HARNESS HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT

All seating positions furnished with 3-point shoulder type seat belts will include a height adjustment.

This adjustment will optimize the belts effectiveness and comfort for the seated firefighter.

SEAT BELT MONITORING SYSTEM

A seat belt monitoring system (SBMS) will be provided. The SBMS will be capable of monitoring up to ten (10) seat positions indicating the status of each seat position with a green or red LED indicator as follows:

Seat Occupied & Buckled = Green

Seat Occupied & Unbuckled = Red

No Occupant & Buckled = Red

No Occupant & Unbuckled = Not Illuminated

Audible Alarm

The SBMS will include an audible alarm that will be activated when a red illumination condition exists and the parking brake is released, or a red illumination condition exists and the transmission is not in park.

HELMET STORAGE

Helmet storage will be located in a fully enclosed and latched cab compartment.

CAB DOME LIGHTS

There will be four (4) dual LED dome lights with black bezels provided. Two (2) lights will be mounted above the inside shoulder of the driver and officer and two (2) lights will be installed and located, one

(1) on each side of the crew cab.

The color of the LED's will be red and white.

The white LED's will be controlled by the door switches and the lens switch.

The color LED's will be controlled by the lens switch.

In order to ensure exceptional illumination, each white LED dome light will provide a minimum of 10.1 foot-candles (fc) covering an entire 20.00" x 20.00" square seating position when mounted 40.00" above the seat.

OVERHEAD MAP LIGHTS

There will be two (2) white halogen, round adjustable map lights installed in the cab:

One (1) overhead in front of the driving position.

One (1) overhead in front of the passenger's position.

Each light will include a switch on the light housing.

31 of 117

The light switches will be connected directly to the battery switched power.

HAND HELD LIGHT

There will be two (2) Streamlight LiteBox lights with an orange thermoplastic body provided. The location will be TBD.

CAB INSTRUMENTATION

The cab instrument panel will consist of gauges, an LCD display, telltale indicator lights, alarms, control switches, and a diagnostic panel. The function of instrument panel controls and switches will be identified by a label adjacent to each item. Actuation of the headlight switch will illuminate the labels in low light conditions. Telltale indicator lamps will not be illuminated unless necessary. The cab instruments and controls will be conveniently located within the forward cab section directly forward of the driver. Gauge and switch panels will be designed to be removable for ease of service and low cost of ownership.

CAB INTERIOR

The wrap-around style high impact ABS plastic cab dash fascia will be designed to provide unobstructed visibility to instrumentation. The dash layout will provide the driver with a quick reference to gauges that allows more time to focus on the road.

GAUGES

The gauge panel will include the following ten (10) ivory gauges with chrome bezels to monitor vehicle performance:

Voltmeter Gauge (Volts): o Low volts (11.8 VDC)

 Amber indicator on gauge assembly with alarm o High volts (15 VDC)

 Amber indicator on gauge assembly with alarm o Very low volts (11.3 VDC)

 Amber indicator on gauge assembly with alarm o Very high volts (16 VDC)

 Amber indicator on gauge assembly with alarm

Tachometer (RPM)

Speedometer (Primary (outside) MPH, Secondary (inside) Km/H)

Fuel Level Gauge (Empty - Full in fractions): o Low fuel (1/8 full)

 Amber indicator on gauge assembly with alarm o Very low fuel (1/32) fuel

 Amber indicator on gauge assembly with alarm

Engine Oil Pressure Gauge (PSI): o Low oil pressure to activate engine warning lights and alarms

32 of 117

 Red indicator on gauge assembly with alarm

Front Air Pressure Gauge (PSI): o Low air pressure to activate warning lights and alarm

 Red indicator on gauge assembly with alarm

Rear Air Pressure Gauge (PSI): o Low air pressure to activate warning lights and alarm.

 Red indicator on gauge assembly with alarm

Transmission Oil Temperature Gauge (Fahrenheit):

High transmission oil temperature activates warning lights and alarm o Amber indicator on gauge assembly with alarm

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge (Fahrenheit): o High engine temperature activates an engine warning light and alarm

 Red indicator on gauge assembly with alarm

Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level Gauge (Empty - Full in fractions): o Low fluid (1/8 full)

 Amber indicator on gauge assembly with alarm

All gauges and gauge indicators will perform prove out at initial power-up to ensure proper performance.

INDICATOR LAMPS

To promote safety, the following telltale indicator lamps will be integral to the gauge assembly and are located above and below the center gauges. The indicator lamps will be "dead-front" design that is only visible when active. The colored indicator lights will have descriptive text or symbols.

The following amber telltale lamps will be present:

Low coolant

Trac cntl (traction control) (where applicable)

Check engine

Check trans (check transmission)

Aux brake overheat (Auxiliary brake overheat)

Air rest (air restriction)

Caution (triangle symbol)

Water in fuel

DPF (engine diesel particulate filter regeneration)

Trailer ABS (where applicable)

Wait to start (where applicable)

HET (engine high exhaust temperature) (where applicable)

ABS (antilock brake system)

MIL (engine emissions system malfunction indicator lamp) (where applicable)

33 of 117

SRS (supplemental restraint system) fault (where applicable)

DEF (low diesel exhaust fluid level)

The following red telltale lamps will be present:

Warning (stop sign symbol)

Seat belt

Parking brake

Stop engine

Rack down

The following green telltale lamps will be provided:

Left turn

Right turn

Battery on

The following blue telltale lamp will be provided:

High beam

ALARMS

Audible steady tone warning alarm: A steady audible tone alarm will be provided whenever a warning message is present.

Audible pulsing tone caution alarm: A pulsing audible tone alarm (chime/chirp) will be provided whenever a caution message is present without a warning message being present.

Alarm silence: Any active audible alarm will be able to be silenced by holding the ignition switch at the top position for three (3) to five (5) seconds. For improved safety, silenced audible alarms will intermittently chirp every 30 seconds until the alarm condition no longer exists. The intermittent chirp will act as a reminder to the operator that a caution or warning condition still exists. Any new warning or caution condition will enable the steady or pulsing tones respectively.

INDICATOR LAMP AND ALARM PROVE-OUT

Telltale indicators and alarms will perform prove-out at initial power-up to ensure proper performance.

CONTROL SWITCHES

For ease of use, the following controls will be provided immediately adjacent to the cab instrument panel within easy reach of the driver:

Emergency master switch: A molded plastic push button switch with integral indicator lamp will be provided. Pressing the switch will activate emergency response lights and siren control. A green lamp on the switch provides indication that the emergency master mode is active. Pressing the switch again disables the emergency master mode.

34 of 117

Headlight / Parking light switch: A three (3)-position maintained rocker switch will be provided.

The first switch position will deactivate all parking lights and the headlights. The second switch position will activate the parking lights. The third switch position will activate the headlights.

Panel back lighting intensity control switch: A three (3)-position momentary rocker switch will be provided. The first switch position decreases the panel back lighting intensity to a minimum level as the switch is held. The second switch position is the default position that does not affect the back lighting intensity. The third switch position increases the panel back lighting intensity to a maximum level as the switch is held.

The following standard controls will be integral to the gauge assembly and are located below the right hand gauges. All switches have backlit labels for low light applications:

High idle engagement switch: A two (2)-position momentary rocker switch with integral indicator lamp will be provided. The first switch position is the default switch position. The second switch position will activate and deactivate the high idle function when pressed and released. The "Ok To Engage High Idle" indicator lamp must be active for the high idle function to engage. A green indicator lamp integral to the high idle engagement switch will indicate when the high idle function is engaged.

"Ok To Engage High Idle" indicator lamp: A green indicator light will be provided next to the high idle activation switch to indicate that the interlocks have been met to allow high idle engagement.

The following standard controls will be provided adjacent to the cab gauge assembly within easy reach of the driver. All switches will have backlit labels for low light applications.

Ignition switch: A three (3)-position maintained/momentary rocker switch will be provided.

The first switch position will deactivate vehicle ignition. The second switch position will activate vehicle ignition. The third momentary position will disable the Command Zone audible alarm if held for three (3) to five (5) seconds. A green indicator lamp will be activated with vehicle ignition.

Engine start switch: A two (2)-position momentary rocker switch will be provided. The first switch position is the default switch position. The second switch position will activate the vehicle's engine. The switch actuator is designed to prevent accidental activation.

4-way hazard switch: A two (2)-position maintained rocker switch will be provided. The first switch position will deactivate the 4-way hazard switch function. The second switch position will activate the 4-way hazard function. The switch actuator will be red and includes the international 4-way hazard symbol.

Turn signal arm: A self-canceling turn signal with high beam headlight and windshield wiper/washer controls will be provided. The windshield wiper control will have high, low, and intermittent modes.

Parking brake control: An air actuated push/pull park brake control valve will be provided.

Chassis horn control: Activation of the chassis horn control will be provided through the center of the steering wheel.

35 of 117

CUSTOM SWITCH PANELS

The design of cab instrumentation will allow for emergency lighting and other switches to be placed within easy reach of the operator thus improving safety. There will be positions for up to three (3) switch panels in the overhead console on the driver's side, up to four (4) switch panels in the engine tunnel console facing the driver, up to three (3) switch panels in the overhead console on the officer's side and up to three (3) switch panels in the engine tunnel rear facing console accessible to both driver and officer. All switches will have backlit labels for low light applications.

DIAGNOSTIC PANEL

A diagnostic panel will be accessible while standing on the ground and located inside the driver's side door left of the steering column. The diagnostic panel will allow diagnostic tools such as computers to connect to various vehicle systems for improved troubleshooting providing a lower cost of ownership.

Diagnostic switches will allow engine and ABS systems to provide blink codes should a problem exist.

The diagnostic panel will include the following:

Engine diagnostic port

Transmission diagnostic port

ABS diagnostic port

SRS diagnostic port (where applicable)

Command Zone USB diagnostic port

Engine diagnostic switch (blink codes flashed on check engine telltale indicator)

ABS diagnostic switch (blink codes flashed on ABS telltale indicator)

Diesel particulate filter regeneration switch (where applicable)

Diesel particulate filter regeneration inhibit switch (where applicable)

CAB LCD DISPLAY

A digital four (4)-row by 20-character dot matrix display will be integral to the gauge panel. The display will be capable of showing simple graphical images as well as text. The display will be split into three (3) sections. Each section will have a dedicated function. The upper left section will display the outside ambient temperature. The upper right section will display odometer, trip mileage, PTO hours, fuel consumption, engine hours, and other configuration specific information. The bottom section will display INFO, CAUTION, and WARNING messages. Text messages will automatically activate to describe the cause of an audible caution or warning alarm. The LCD will be capable of displaying multiple text messages should more than one caution or warning condition exist.

AIR RESTRICTION INDICATOR

A high air restriction warning indicator light LCD message with amber warning indicator and audible alarm will be provided.

"DO NOT MOVE APPARATUS" INDICATOR

A flashing red indicator light, located in the driving compartment, will be illuminated automatically per the current NFPA requirements. The light will be labeled "Do Not Move Apparatus If Light Is On."

36 of 117

The same circuit that activates the Do Not Move Apparatus indicator will activate a pulsing alarm when the parking brake is released.

DO NOT MOVE TRUCK MESSAGES

Messages will be displayed on the Command Zone™, color display located within sight of the driver whenever the Do Not Move Truck light is active. The messages will designate the item or items not in the stowed for vehicle travel position (parking brake disengaged).

The following messages will be displayed (where applicable):

Do Not Move Truck

DS Cab Door Open (Driver Side Cab Door Open)

PS Cab Door Open (Passenger's Side Cab Door Open)

DS Crew Cab Door Open (Driver Side Crew Cab Door Open)

PS Crew Cab Door Open (Passenger's Side Crew Cab Door Open)

DS Body Door Open (Driver Side Body Door Open)

PS Body Door Open (Passenger's Side Body Door Open)

Rear Body Door Open

DS Ladder Rack Down (Driver Side Ladder Rack Down)

PS Ladder Rack Down (Passenger Side Ladder Rack Down)

Deck Gun Not Stowed

Lt Tower Not Stowed (Light Tower Not Stowed)

Hatch Door Open

Fold Tank Not Stowed (Fold-A-Tank Not Stowed)

Aerial Not Stowed (Aerial Device Not Stowed)

Stabilizer Not Stowed

Steps Not Stowed

Handrail Not Stowed

Any other device that is opened, extended, or deployed that creates a hazard or is likely to cause major damage to the apparatus if the apparatus is moved will be displayed as a caution message after the parking brake is disengaged.

SWITCH PANELS

The emergency light switch panel will have a master switch for ease of use plus individual switches for selective control. Each switch panel will contain eight (8) membrane-type switches each rated for one million (1,000,000) cycles. Panels containing less than eight (8) switch assignments will include nonfunctioning black appliqués. Documentation will be provided by the manufacturer indicating the rated cycle life of the switches. The switch panel(s) will be located in the overhead position above the windshield on the driver side overhead to allow for easy access.

37 of 117

The switches will be membrane-type and also act as an integral indicator light. For quick, visual indication the entire surface of the switch will be illuminated white whenever back lighting is activated and illuminated red whenever the switch is active. For ease of use, a two (2)-ply, scratch resistant laser engraved Gravoply label indicating the use of each switch will be placed in the center of the switch. The label will allow light to pass through the letters for ease of use in low light conditions.

WIPER CONTROL

For simple operation and easy reach, the windshield wiper control will be an integral part of the directional light lever located on the steering column. The wiper control will include high and low wiper speed settings, a one (1)-speed intermittent wiper control and windshield washer switch. The control will have a "return to park" provision, which allows the wipers to return to the stored position when the wipers are not in use.

HOURMETER - AERIAL DEVICE

An hourmeter for the aerial device will be provided and located within the cab display or instrument panel.

AERIAL MASTER

There will be a master switch for the aerial operating electrical system provided.

AERIAL PTO SWITCH

A PTO switch for the aerial with indicator light will be provided.

INFORMATION CENTER

An information center employing a 7.00" diagonal touch screen color LCD display will be encased in an

ABS plastic housing.

The information center will have the following specifications:

Operate in temperatures from -40 to 185 degrees Fahrenheit

An Optical Gel will be placed between the LCD and protective lens

Five weather resistant user interface switches

Grey with black accents

Sunlight Readable

Linux operating system

Minimum of 1000nits rated display

Display can be changed to an available foreign language

A LCD display integral to the cab gauge panel will be included as outlined in the cab instrumentation area.

Programmed to read US Customary

38 of 117

GENERAL SCREEN DESIGN

Where possible, background colors will be used to provide "At a Glance" vehicle information. If information provided on a screen is within acceptable limits, a green background will be used.

If a caution or warning situation arises the following will occur:

An amber background/text color will indicate a caution condition

A red background/text color will indicate a warning condition

The information center will utilize an "Alert Center" to display text messages for audible alarm tones. The text messages will be written to identify the item(s) causing the audible alarm to sound. If more than one (1) text message occurs, the messages will cycle every second until the problem(s) have been resolved. The background color for the "Alert Center" will change to indicate the severity of the "warning" message. If a warning and a caution condition occur simultaneously, the red background color will be shown for all alert center messages.

A label for each button will exist. The label will indicate the function for each active button for each screen. Buttons that are not utilized on specific screens will have a button label with no text or symbol.

HOME/TRANSIT SCREEN

This screen will display the following:

Vehicle Mitigation (if equipped)

Water Level (if equipped)

Foam Level (if equipped)

Seat Belt Monitoring Screen

Tire Pressure Monitoring (if equipped)

Digital Speedometer

Active Alarms

ON SCENE SCREEN

This screen will display the following and will be auto activated with pump engaged (if equipped):

Battery Voltage

Fuel

Oil Pressure

Coolant Temperature

RPM

Water Level (if equipped)

Foam Level (if equipped)

Foam Concentration (if equipped)

Water Flow Rate (if equipped)

Water Used (if equipped)

39 of 117

Active Alarms

VIRTUAL BUTTONS

There will be four (4) virtual switch panel screens that match the overhead and lower lighting and

HVAC switch panels.

PAGE SCREEN

The page screen will display the following and allow the user to progress into other screens for further functionality:

Diagnostics o Faults

 Listed by order of occurrence

 Allows to sort by system o Interlock

 Throttle Interlocks

 Pump Interlocks (if equipped)

 Aerial Interlocks (if equipped)

 PTO Interlocks (if equipped) o Load Manager

 A list of items to be load managed will be provided. The list will provide a description of the load.

 The lower the priority numbers the earlier the device will be shed should a low voltage condition occur.

 The screen will indicate if a load has been shed (disabled) or not shed.

 "At a glance" color features are utilized on this screen. o Systems

 Command Zone

Module type and ID number

Module Version

Input or output number

Circuit number connected to that input or output

Status of the input or output

Power and Constant Current module diagnostic information

 Foam (if equipped)

 Pressure Controller (if equipped)

 Generator Frequency (if equipped) o Live Data

 General Truck Data

Maintenance o Engine oil and filter

40 of 117

o Transmission oil and filter o Pump oil (if equipped) o Foam (if equipped) o Aerial (if equipped)

Setup o Clock Setup o Date & Time

 12 or 24 hour format

 Set time and date o Backlight

 Daytime

 Night time

 Sensitivity o Unit Selection o Home Screen o Virtual Button Setup o On Scene Screen Setup o Configure Video Mode

 Set Video Contrast

 Set Video Color

 Set Video Tint

Do Not Move o The screen will indicate the approximate location and type of item that is open or is not stowed for travel. The actual status of the following devices will be indicate

 Driver Side Cab Door

 Passenger's Side Cab Door

 Driver Side Crew Cab Door

 Passenger's Side Crew Cab Door

 Driver Side Body Doors

 Passenger's Side Body Doors

 Rear Body Door(s)

 Ladder Rack (if applicable)

 Deck Gun (if applicable)

 Light Tower (if applicable)

 Hatch Door (if applicable)

 Stabilizers (if applicable)

 Steps (if applicable)

Notifications o View Active Alarms

41 of 117

 Shows a list of all active alarms including date and time of the occurrence is shown with each alarm

 Silence Alarms - All alarms are silenced

Timer Screen

HVAC (if equipped)

Tire Information (if equipped)

Button functions and button labels may change with each screen.

VEHICLE DATA RECORDER

A vehicle data recorder (VDR) will be provided. The VDR will be capable of reading and storing vehicle information.

The information stored on the VDR can be downloaded through a USB port mounted in a convenient location determined by cab model. A CD provided with the apparatus will include the programming to download the information from the VDR. A USB cable can be used to connect the VDR to a laptop to retrieve required information.

The vehicle data recorder will be capable of recording the following data via hardwired and/or CAN inputs:

Vehicle Speed - MPH

Acceleration - MPH/sec

Deceleration - MPH/sec

Engine Speed - RPM

Engine Throttle Position - % of Full Throttle

ABS Event - On/Off

Seat Occupied Status - Yes/No by Position (7-12 Seating Capacity)

Seat Belt Buckled Status - Yes/No by Position (7-12 Seating Capacity)

Master Optical Warning Device Switch - On/Off

Time - 24 Hour Time

Date - Year/Month/Day

VEHICLE CAMERA SYSTEM

There will be a color vehicle camera system provided with the following:

One (1) camera located at the rear of the apparatus, pointing rearward, displayed automatically with the vehicle in reverse

The camera images will be displayed on the driver's Command Zone™, color display. Audio from the microphone on the active camera will be not provided.

42 of 117

The following components will be included:

One (1) SV-CW134639CAI, camera

One (1) amplified speaker (if applicable)

All necessary cables

ELECTRICAL POWER CONTROL SYSTEM

The primary power distribution will be located forward of the officer's seating position and be easily accessible while standing on the ground for simplified maintenance and troubleshooting. Additional electrical distribution centers will be provided throughout the vehicle to house the vehicle's electrical power, circuit protection, and control components. The electrical distribution centers will be located strategically throughout the vehicle to minimize wire length. For ease of maintenance, all electrical distribution centers will be easily accessible. All distribution centers containing fuses, circuit breakers and/or relays will be easily accessible.

Distribution centers located throughout the vehicle will contain battery powered studs for supplying customer installed equipment thus providing a lower cost of ownership.

Circuit protection devices, which conform to SAE standards, will be utilized to protect electrical circuits. All circuit protection devices will be rated per NFPA requirements to prevent wire and component damage when subjected to extreme current overload. General protection circuit breakers will be Type-I automatic reset (continuously resetting). When required, automotive type fuses will be utilized to protect electronic equipment. Control relays and solenoid will have a direct current rating of

125 percent of the maximum current for which the circuit is protected per NFPA.

SOLID-STATE CONTROL SYSTEM

A solid-state electronics based control system will be utilized to achieve advanced operation and control of the vehicle components. A fully computerized vehicle network will consist of electronic modules located near their point of use to reduce harness lengths and improve reliability. The control system will comply with SAE J1939-11 recommended practices.

The control system will operate as a master-slave system whereas the main control module instructs all other system components. The system will contain patented Mission Critical software that maintains critical vehicle operations in the unlikely event of a main controller error. The system will utilize a Real

Time Operating System (RTOS) fully compliant with OSEK/VDX™ specifications providing a lower cost of ownership.

For increased reliability and simplified use the control system modules will include the following attributes:

Green LED indicator light for module power

Red LED indicator light for network communication stability status

Control system self test at activation and continually throughout vehicle operation

43 of 117

No moving parts due to transistor logic

Software logic control for NFPA mandated safety interlocks and indicators

Integrated electrical system load management without additional components

Integrated electrical load sequencing system without additional components

Customized control software to the vehicle's configuration

Factory and field re programmable to accommodate changes to the vehicle's operating parameters

Complete operating and troubleshooting manuals

USB connection to the main control module for advanced troubleshooting

To assure long life and operation in a broad range of environmental conditions, the solid-state control system modules will meet the following specifications:

Module circuit board will meet SAE J771 specifications

Operating temperature from -40C to +70C

Storage temperature from -40C to +70C

Vibration to 50g

IP67 rated enclosure (Totally protected against dust and also protected against the effect of temporary immersion between 15 centimeters and one (1) meter)

Operating voltage from eight (8) volts to 16 volts DC

The main controller will activate status indicators and audible alarms designed to provide warning of problems before they become critical.

CIRCUIT PROTECTION AND CONTROL DIAGRAM

Copies of all job-specific, computer network input and output (I/O) connections will be provided with each chassis. The sheets will indicate the function of each module connection point, circuit protection information (where applicable), wire numbers, wire colors and load management information.

ON-BOARD ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS

Advanced on-board diagnostic messages will be provided to support rapid troubleshooting of the electrical power and control system. The diagnostic messages will be displayed on the information center located at the driver's position.

The on-board information center will include the following diagnostic information:

Text description of active warning or caution alarms

Simplified warning indicators

Amber caution indication with intermittent alarm

Red warning indication with steady tone alarm

44 of 117

TECH MODULE WITH WIFI

An in cab module will provide Wifi wireless interface and data logging capability. (No Exception) The

Wifi interface will comply with IEEE 802.11 b/g/n capabilities while communicating at 2.4 Gigahertz.

The module will provide an external antenna connection allowing a line of site communication range of up to 300 feet with a roof mounted antenna.

The module will transmit a password protected web page to a wifi enabled device (i.e. most smart phones, tablets or laptops) allowing two levels of user interaction. The firefighter level will allow vehicle monitoring of the vehicle and firefighting systems on the apparatus. The technician level will allow diagnostic access to inputs and outputs installed on the Command Zone™, control and information system.

The data logging capability will record faults from the engine, transmission, ABS and Command Zone, control and information systems as they occur. No other data will be recorded at the time the fault occurs. The data logger will provide up to 2 Gigabytes of data storage.

A USB connection will be provided on the Tech Module. It will provide a means to download data logger information and update software in the device.

PROGNOSTICS

A software based vehicle tool will be provided to predict remaining life of the vehicles critical fluid and events (no exceptions).

The system will send automatic indications to the Command Zone, color display and/or wireless enabled device to proactively alert of upcoming service intervals.

Prognostics will include:

Engine oil and filter

Transmission oil and filter

Pump oil (if equipped)

Foam oil (if equipped)

Aerial oil and filter (if equipped)

ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS

An advanced, Windows-based, diagnostic software program will be provided for this control system.

The software will provide troubleshooting tools to service technicians equipped with a Windows-based computer or wireless enabled device.

The service and maintenance software will be easy to understand and use and have the ability to view system input/output (I/O) information.

45 of 117

INDICATOR LIGHT AND ALARM PROVE-OUT SYSTEM

A system will be provided which automatically tests basic indicator lights and alarms located on the cab instrument panel.

VOLTAGE MONITOR SYSTEM

A voltage monitoring system will be provided to indicate the status of the battery system connected to the vehicle's electrical load. The system will provide visual and audible warning when the system voltage is below or above optimum levels.

The alarm will activate if the system falls below 11.8 volts DC for more than two (2) minutes.

DEDICATED RADIO EQUIPMENT CONNECTION POINTS

There will be three (3) studs provided in the primary power distribution center located in front of the officer for two-way radio equipment.

The studs will consist of the following:

12-volt 40-amp battery switched power

12-volt 60-amp ignition switched power

12-volt 60-amp direct battery power

There will also be a 12-volt 100-amp ground stud located in or adjacent to the power distribution center.

ENHANCED SOFTWARE

The solid-state control system will include the following software enhancements:

All perimeter lights and scene lights (where applicable) will be deactivated when the parking brake is released.

Cab and crew cab dome lights will remain on for ten (10) seconds for improved visibility after the doors close. The dome lights will dim after ten (10) seconds or immediately if the vehicle is put into gear.

Cab and crew cab perimeter lights will remain on for ten (10) seconds for improved visibility after the doors close. The dome lights will dim after ten (10) seconds or immediately if the vehicle is put into gear.

EMI/RFI PROTECTION

To prevent erroneous signals from crosstalk contamination and interference, the electrical system will meet, at a minimum, SAE J551/2, thus reducing undesired electromagnetic and radio frequency emissions. An advanced electrical system will be used to ensure radiated and conducted electromagnetic interference (EMI) or radio frequency interference (RFI) emissions are suppressed at their source.

The apparatus will have the ability to operate in the electromagnetic environment typically found in fire ground operations to ensure clean operations. The electrical system will meet, without exceptions,

46 of 117

electromagnetic susceptibility conforming to SAE J1113/25 Region 1, Class C EMR for 10Khz-1GHz to

100 Volts/Meter. The vehicle OEM, upon request, will provide EMC testing reports from testing conducted on an entire apparatus and will certify that the vehicle meets SAE J551/2 and SAE J1113/25

Region 1, Class C EMR for 10Khz-1GHz to 100 Volts/Meter requirements. Component and partial

(incomplete) vehicle testing is not adequate as overall vehicle design can impact test results and thus is not acceptable by itself.

EMI/RFI susceptibility will be controlled by applying appropriate circuit designs and shielding. The electrical system will be designed for full compatibility with low-level control signals and high-powered two-way radio communication systems. Harness and cable routing will be given careful attention to minimize the potential for conducting and radiated EMI/RFI susceptibility.

ELECTRICAL

All 12-volt electrical equipment installed by the apparatus manufacturer will conform to modern automotive practices. All wiring will be high temperature crosslink type. Wiring will be run, in loom or conduit, where exposed and have grommets where wire passes through sheet metal. Automatic reset circuit breakers will be provided which conform to SAE Standards. Wiring will be color, function and number coded. Function and number codes will be continuously imprinted on all wiring harness conductors at 2.00" intervals. Exterior exposed wire connectors will be positive locking, and environmentally sealed to withstand elements such as temperature extremes, moisture and automotive fluids.

Electrical wiring and equipment will be installed utilizing the following guidelines:

1. All holes made in the roof will be caulked with silicon, rope caulk is not acceptable. Large fender washers, liberally caulked, will be used when fastening equipment to the underside of the cab roof.

2. Any electrical component that is installed in an exposed area will be mounted in a manner that will not allow moisture to accumulate in it. Exposed area will be defined as any location outside of the cab or body.

3. Electrical components designed to be removed for maintenance will not be fastened with nuts and bolts. Metal screws will be used in mounting these devices. Also a coil of wire will be provided behind the appliance to allow them to be pulled away from mounting area for inspection and service work.

4. Corrosion preventative compound will be applied to all terminal plugs located outside of the cab or body. All non-waterproof connections will require this compound in the plug to prevent corrosion and for easy separation (of the plug).

5. All lights that have their sockets in a weather exposed area will have corrosion preventative compound added to the socket terminal area.

6. All electrical terminals in exposed areas will have silicon (1890) applied completely over the metal portion of the terminal.

47 of 117

All lights and reflectors, required to comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard #108, will be furnished. Rear identification lights will be recessed mounted for protection. Lights and wiring mounted in the rear bulkheads will be protected from damage by installing a false bulkhead inside the rear compartments.

An operational test will be conducted to ensure that any equipment that is permanently attached to the electrical system is properly connected and in working order.

The results of the tests will be recorded and provided to the purchaser at time of delivery.

BATTERY SYSTEM

There will be six (6) 12 volt Exide®, Model 31S950X3W, batteries that include the following features will be provided:

950 CCA, cold cranking amps

190 amp reserve capacity

High cycle

Group 31

Rating of 5700 CCA at 0 degrees Fahrenheit

-140 minutes of reserve capacity

Threaded stainless steel studs

Each battery case will be a black polypropylene material with a vertically ribbed container for increased vibration resistance. The cover will be manifold vented with a central venting location to allow a 45 degree tilt capacity.

The inside of each battery will consist of a "maintenance free" grid construction with poly wrapped separators and a flooded epoxy bottom anchoring for maximum vibration resistance.

BATTERY SYSTEM

There will be a single starting system with an ignition switch and starter button provided and located on the cab instrument panel.

MASTER BATTERY SWITCH

There will be a master battery switch provided within the cab within easy reach of the driver to activate the battery system.

An indicator light will be provided on the instrument panel to notify the driver of the status of the battery system.

BATTERY COMPARTMENTS

Batteries will be stored in well-ventilated compartments that are located under the cab and bolted directly to the chassis frame. The battery compartments will be constructed of 0.188" steel plate and be

48 of 117

designed to accommodate a maximum of three (3) group 31 batteries in each compartment. The battery hold-downs will be of a non-corrosive material. All bolts and nuts will be stainless steel.

The compartments will include formed fit heavy duty roto-molded polyethylene battery trays with drain tubes for the batteries to sit in.

Heavy-duty battery cables will be used to provide maximum power to the electrical system. Cables will be color-coded.

Battery terminal connections will be coated with anti-corrosion compound. Battery solenoid terminal connections will be encapsulated with semi-permanent rubberized compound.

JUMPER STUDS

One (1) set of battery jumper studs with plastic color-coded covers will be installed on the bottom of the driver's side battery box. This will provide for easy jumper cable access.

BATTERY CHARGER

A Kussmaul Autocharge 1000, Model 091-56-12, battery charger with internal battery saver will be provided. A bar graph display indicating the state of charge will be included.

The battery saver circuit will be capable of supplying up to three (3) amps for external loads such as hand light or auxiliary radio batteries.

The battery charger will be wired to the AC shoreline inlet through an AC receptacle adjacent to this battery charger.

The battery charger will be located in the left body compartment mounted on the front wall as high as possible.

The battery charger indicator will be located in the driver's step area.

KUSSMAUL AUTO EJECT FOR SHORELINE

There will be one (1) Kussmaul Model 091-55-15-120, 15 amp 120 volt AC shoreline inlet(s) provided to operate the dedicated 120 volt AC circuits on the apparatus without the use of the generator.

The shoreline inlet(s) will include black weatherproof flip up cover(s).

There will be a release solenoid wired to the vehicle's starter to eject the AC connector when the engine is starting.

The shoreline(s) will be connected to the battery charger.

There will be a mating connector body supplied with the loose equipment.

There will be a label installed near the inlet(s) that state the following:

49 of 117

Line Voltage

Current Ratting (amps)

Phase

Frequency

The shoreline receptacle will be located on the driver side of cab, above wheel.

JUMPER STUDS

One (1) set of battery jumper studs with plastic color coded covers will be recessed in the side of the bumper extension on the driver's side. This will be an open compartment, just large enough for jumper cable access. A tag will be provided for positive/negative terminals.

ALTERNATOR

A C.E. Niehoff, model C680-1, alternator will be provided. It will have a rated output current of 430 amp as measured by SAE method J56. It will also have a custom three (3)-set point voltage regulator, manufactured by C. E. Niehoff. The alternator will be connected to the power and ground distribution system with heavy-duty cables sized to carry the full rated alternator output.

ELECTRONIC LOAD MANAGER

An electronic load management (ELM) system will be provided that monitors the vehicles 12-volt electrical system, automatically reducing the electrical load in the event of a low voltage condition, and automatically restoring the shed electrical loads when a low voltage condition expires. This ensures the integrity of the electrical system.

For improved reliability and ease of use, the load manager system will be an integral part of the vehicle's solid state control system requiring no additional components to perform load management tasks. Load management systems which require additional components will not be allowed.

The system will include the following features:

System voltage monitoring.

A shed load will remain inactive for a minimum of five minutes to prevent the load from cycling on and off.

Sixteen available electronic load shedding levels.

Priority levels can be set for individual outputs.

High Idle to activate before any electric loads are shed and deactivate with the service brake. o If enabled:

 "Load Man Hi-Idle On" will display on the information center.

 Hi-Idle will not activate until 30 seconds after engine start up.

Individual switch "on" indicator to flash when the particular load has been shed.

The information center indicates system voltage.

The information center, where applicable, includes a "Load Manager" screen indicating the following:

50 of 117

Load managed items list, with priority levels and item condition.

Individual load managed item condition: o ON = not shed o SHED = shed

SEQUENCER

A sequencer will be provided that automatically activates and deactivates vehicle loads in a preset sequence thereby protecting the alternator from power surges. This sequencer operation will allow a gradual increase or decrease in alternator output, rather than loading or dumping the entire 12 volt load to prolong the life of the alternator.

For improved reliability and ease of use, the load sequencing system will be an integral part of the vehicle's solid state control system requiring no additional components to perform load sequencing tasks. Load sequencing systems which require additional components will not be allowed.

Emergency light sequencing will operate in conjunction with the emergency master light switch. When the emergency master switch is activated, the emergency lights will be activated one by one at halfsecond intervals. Sequenced emergency light switch indicators will flash while waiting for activation.

When the emergency master switch is deactivated, the sequencer will deactivate the warning light loads in the reverse order.

Sequencing of the following items will also occur, in conjunction with the ignition switch, at halfsecond intervals:

Cab Heater and Air Conditioning

Crew Cab Heater (if applicable)

Crew Cab Air Conditioning (if applicable)

Exhaust Fans (if applicable)

Third Evaporator (if applicable)

HEADLIGHTS

There will be two (2) Brightheadlight, kit number Bi-XP4656-Kit, rectangular HID lights mounted in the front quad style, chrome housing on each side of the cab grille:

The outside light on each side will contain a HID low and high beam module.

The inside light on each side will contain a halogen high beam module only.

DIRECTIONAL LIGHTS

There will be two (2) Whelen 600® series, LED combination directional/marker lights provided. The lights will be located on the outside cab corners, next to the headlights.

51 of 117

The color of the lenses will be the same color as the LED's.

CAB CLEARANCE/MARKER/ID LIGHTS

There will be seven (7) amber LED lights provided to indicate the presence and overall width of the vehicle in the following locations:

Three (3) amber LED identification lights will be installed in the center of the cab above the windshield.

Two (2) amber LED clearance lights will be installed, one (1) on each outboard side of the cab above the windshield.

Two (2) amber LED marker lights will be installed, one (1) on each side above the cab doors.

INTERMEDIATE LIGHT

There will be two (2) Truck-Lite, Model 30080Y, flange mounted amber LED turn signal marker lights furnished, one (1) each side, in the rear fender panel. The light will double as a turn signal and marker light. This installation will include a stainless steel cover.

REAR CLEARANCE/MARKER/ID LIGHTING

There will be three (3) LED identification lights located at the rear installed per the following:

As close as practical to the vertical centerline

Centers spaced not less than 6.00" or more than 12.00" apart

Red in color

All at the same height

There will be two (2) LED lights installed at the rear of the apparatus used as clearance lights located at the rear of the apparatus per the following:

To indicate the overall width of the vehicle

One (1) each side of the vertical centerline

As near the top as practical

Red in color

To be visible from the rear

All at the same height

There will be two (2) LED lights installed on the side of the apparatus used as marker lights as close to the rear as practical per the following:

To indicate the overall length of the vehicle

One (1) each side of the vertical centerline

As near the top as practical

Red in color

To be visible from the side

52 of 117

All at the same height

There will be two (2) red reflectors located on the rear of the truck facing to the rear. One (1) each side, as far to the outside as practical, at a minimum of 15.00", but no more than 60.00", above the ground.

There will be two (2) red reflectors located on the side of the truck facing to the side. One (1) each side, as far to the rear as practical, at a minimum of 15.00", but no more than 60.00", above the ground.

Per FMVSS 108 and CMVSS 108 requirements.

MARKER LIGHTS

There will be one (1) pair of amber and red LED marker lights with rubber arm, located on the rearmost portion of the body. The amber lens will face the front and the red lens will face the rear of the truck.

These lights will be activated with the running lights of the vehicle.

REAR FMVSS LIGHTING

There will be two (2) wrap around tri-cluster LED modules provided on the face of the rear body compartments.

Each tri-cluster will include the following:

One (1) LED stop/tail light

One (1) LED directional light

One (1) LED backup light

LICENSE PLATE BRACKET

There will be one (1) license plate bracket mounted on the rear of the body.

A white LED light will illuminate the license plate. A polished stainless steel light shield will be provided over the light that will direct illumination downward, preventing white light to the rear.

BACK-UP ALARM

A PRECO, Model 1040, solid-state electronic audible back-up alarm that actuates when the truck is shifted into reverse will be provided. The device will sound at 60 pulses per minute and automatically adjust its volume to maintain a minimum ten (10) dBA above surrounding environmental noise levels.

CAB PERIMETER SCENE LIGHTS

There will be four (4) Truck-lite, Model 44308C, 4.00" white LED lights with Model 40700 grommets provided, one (1) for the cab and crew cab door.

These lights will be activated automatically when the battery switch is on and the exit doors are opened or by the same means as the body perimeter scene lights.

53 of 117

PUMP HOUSE PERIMETER LIGHTS

There will be two (2) Truck-Lite, Model 44308C, 4.00" white LED 12 volt DC weatherproof lights with

Model 40700, grommets provided under the pump panel running boards, one (1) each side.

The lights will be controlled by the same means as the body perimeter lights.

BODY PERIMETER SCENE LIGHTS

There will be one (1) Truck-Lite, Model 44308C, 4.00" white LED lights with Model 40700, grommets provided under the turntable access steps.

The perimeter scene lights will be activated when a switch within reach of the driver is activated, a cab door is open, a crew cab door is open and the parking brake is applied.

STEP LIGHTS

Two (2) white LED step lights will be provided on the aerial body.

In order to ensure exceptional illumination, each light will provide a minimum of 25 foot-candles (fc) covering an entire 15" x 15" square placed ten (10) inches below the light and a minimum of 1.5 fc covering an entire 30" x 30" square at the same ten (10) inch distance below the light.

The step lights will be actuated by the aerial master switch in the cab.

All other steps on the apparatus will be illuminated per the current edition of NFPA 1901.

12 VOLT LIGHTING

There will be four (4) Whelen® Pioneer™ Series, Model PCP2*, 12 volt LED combination spotlight and floodlight(s) installed in semi-recessed housing(s) Model PBA203, located one (1) each side high on rear of body bulkhead and one (1) each side high and rearward of crew cab doors.

The painted parts of this light assembly to be black.

The light(s) selected above will be controlled by the following:

a switch at the driver's side switch panel

a switch at the passenger's side switch panel

opening the driver's side cab or crew cab doors

opening the passenger's side cab or crew cab doors

These light(s) may be load managed when the parking brake is applied.

12 VOLT LIGHTING

There will be two (2) Whelen® Pioneer™, Model PCP2*, 12 volt LED combination spot/flood light(s) provided on the front visor, one (1) on the driver's side and one (1) on the passenger's side.

The painted parts of this light assembly to be black.

54 of 117

The light(s) will be controlled by the following:

a switch at the driver's side switch panel

a switch at the passenger's side switch panel

no additional switch location

These light(s) may be load managed when the parking brake is set.

WORK LIGHTS

There will be two (2) Unity Model AG-S-P46WLC 6.00" LED deck lights provided at the rear of the apparatus. The lights will be furnished with white LED's.

Switched battery power will be supplied to the lights. Each light includes a switch on the light head.

WATER TANK

It will have a capacity of 500 gallons and will be constructed of polypropylene plastic in a rectangular shape. The joints and seams will be nitrogen welded inside and out. The tank will be baffled in accordance with NFPA Bulletin 1901 requirements. The baffles will have vent openings at both the top and bottom of each baffle to permit movement of air and water between compartments. The longitudinal partitions will be constructed of .38" polypropylene plastic and extend from the bottom of the tank through the top cover to allow positive welding. The transverse partitions extend from 4" off the bottom to the underside of the top cover. All partitions interlock and will be welded to the tank bottom and sides. The tank top will be constructed of .50" polypropylene. It will be recessed .38" and will be welded to the tank sides and the longitudinal partitions. It will be supported to keep it rigid during fast filling conditions. Construction will include 2.00" polypropylene dowels spaced no more than 30.00" apart and welded to the transverse partitions. Two of the dowels will be drilled and tapped

(.50" diameter, 13.00" deep) to accommodate lifting eyes. A sump will be provided at the bottom of the water tank. The sump will include a drain plug and the tank outlet. Tank will be installed in a fabricated "cradle" assembly constructed of aluminum. Sufficient crossmembers are provided to properly support bottom of tank. Crossmembers are constructed of aluminum channel. Tank "floats" in cradle to avoid torsional stress caused by chassis frame flexing. Rubber cushions, .50 x 3.00", are placed on all horizontal surfaces that the tank rests on. Stops are provided to prevent an empty tank from bouncing excessively while moving vehicle. Tank mounting system is approved by the manufacturer.

Fill tower will be constructed of .50" polypropylene and will be a minimum of 8.00" wide x 14.00" long.

Fill tower will be furnished with a .25" thick polypropylene screen and a hinged cover.

An overflow pipe, constructed of 4.00" schedule 40 polypropylene, will be installed approximately halfway down the fill tower and extend through the water tank and exit to the rear of the rear axle.

55 of 117

HOSE BED

The hose bed will be fabricated of .125" 5052-H32 aluminum with a tensile strength range of 31,000 to

38,000 psi. The sides of the hose bed will not form any portion of the fender compartments. The upper and rear edges of the hose bed side panels will have a double break for rigidity. The hose bed will be located ahead of the ladder turntable.

There will be two (2) hose chutes to the rear of the hose bed, on the driver and passenger sides, to allow for payout/removal of the hose.

The hose bed flooring will consist of removable aluminum grating with a top surface that is corrugated to aid in hose aeration.

Hose capacity will be a minimum of 800' of 5".

AERIAL HOSE BED HOSE RESTRAINT

The hose in the hose bed will be restrained by a black nylon Velcro strap at the top of the hose bed and a

1.00" black nylon web design with a 2.00" box pattern at the rear of one (1) hose bed(s). The Velcro strap will be installed to the top of the hose bed side sheets. The rear webbing will have 1.00" web straps that loop through footman loops and fasten with spring clip and hook fasteners.

RUNNING BOARDS

The running boards will be fabricated of .125" bright aluminum treadplate and supported by structural steel angle assemblies bolted to the chassis frame rails.

Running boards will be 13.00" deep and are spaced away from the body .50".

A splash guard will be provided to keep road dirt or water from splashing up onto the pump panels.

The running boards will have a riser on the body to protect the painted surface from damage by stepping on the running boards.

The entire surface of the running boards will be covered with bright aluminum treadplate.

TURNTABLE STEPS

Access to the turntable will be provided by a one (1) set of swing-down steps on the driver side of the truck.

The access steps will be located rearward of the compartmentation.

All steps will have a height no greater than 14.00" from top surface to top surface.

The swing down step mechanism will be constructed of brushed aluminum with bright aluminum steps with Morton Cass inserts.

The stepwell will be lined with bright aluminum treadplate to act as scuffplates.

56 of 117

The bottom step will have a step height not exceeding 24.00" from the ground to the top surface of the step at any time.

Handrails will be provided on each side of each set of access steps.

The steps will be connected to the "Do Not Move Truck" indicator in the cab.

STEP LIGHTS

There will be four (4) white LED step lights provided for the aerial turntable access steps.

In order to ensure exceptional illumination, each light shall provide a minimum of 25 foot-candles (fc) covering an entire 15" x 15" square placed ten (10) inches below the light and a minimum of 1.5 fc covering an entire 30" x 30" square at the same ten (10) inch distance below the light.

The step lights will be actuated by the aerial master switch in the cab.

REAR WALL, BODY MATERIAL, 75' HAL QUINT

The rear wall will be smooth and the same material as the body. The center section as well as any inboard facing surfaces of the rear wall will be aluminum treadplate.

TOW EYES

Two (2) rear painted tow eyes will be located at the rear of the apparatus and will be mounted directly to the frame rails. The inner and outer edges of the tow eyes will be radiused.

HOSE TRAY

Two (2) hose trays will be made free floating one (1) in each side running board.

The tray(s) will be flanged and drop in from the top. The ends will be tapered at the front and rear towards the center. No fasteners will be used to secure the tray(s).

Capacity of the tray will be two 25' rolls of DJ 5".

Rubber matting will be installed on the floor of the tray to provide proper ventilation.

COMPARTMENTATION

Compartmentation will be fabricated of .125" 5052 aluminum.

Side compartments will be an integral assembly with the rear fenders.

Circular fender liners will be provided. For prevention of rust pockets and ease of maintenance, the fender liners will be formed from aluminum and removable for maintenance.

Compartment flooring will be of the sweep out design with the floor higher than the compartment door lip.

57 of 117

Drip protection will be provided above the doors by means of bright aluminum extrusion, formed bright aluminum treadplate or polished stainless steel.

The top of the compartment will be covered with bright aluminum treadplate rolled over the edges on the front, rear and outward side. These covers will have the corners welded.

Side compartment covers will be separate from the compartment tops.

All screws and bolts, which are not Grade 8, will be stainless steel and where they protrude into a compartment will have acorn nuts on the ends to prevent injury.

UNDERBODY SUPPORT SYSTEM

Due to the severe loading requirements of this aerial, a method of body and compartment support suitable for the intended load will be provided.

The backbone of the body support system will begin with the chassis frame rails, which is the strongest component of the chassis and is designed for sustaining maximum loads. The support system will include lateral frame rail extensions that are formed from .25" 80k steel and bolted to the chassis frame rails with .625" diameter Grade 8 bolts. The vertical and horizontal members of the frame rail extensions are to be reinforced with welded gussets and extend to the outside edge of the body.

An aluminum body structure will be mounted on the top of these supports to create a floating substructure which will result in an 800 lb equipment support rating per lower compartment and provide up to .31" accumulative floor thickness.

The floating substructure will be separated from the lateral frame extensions with neoprene elastomer isolators. These isolators will reduce the natural flex stress of the chassis from being transmitted to the body.

The isolators will have a broad load range, proven viability in vehicular applications, be of a fail-safe design and allow for all necessary movement in three (3) transitional and rotational modes.

AGGRESSIVE WALKING SURFACE

All exterior surfaces designated as stepping, standing, and walking areas will comply with the required average slip resistance of the current NFPA standards.

LOUVERS

All body compartments will be vented to provide one (1) way airflow out of the compartment that prevents water and dirt from gaining access to the compartment.

TESTING OF BODY DESIGN

Body structural analysis will be fully tested. Proven engineering and test techniques such as finite element analysis, model analysis, and strain gauging have been performed with special attention given to fatigue, life and structural integrity of the body and substructure.

58 of 117

The body will be tested while loaded to its greatest in-service weight.

The criteria used during the testing procedure will include:

- Raising opposite corners of the vehicle tires 9.00" to simulate the twisting a truck may experience when driving over a curb.

- Making a 90 degree turn, while driving at 20 mph to simulate aggressive driving conditions.

- Driving the vehicle on at 35 mph on a washboard road.

- Driving the vehicle at 55 mph on a smooth road.

- Accelerating the vehicle fully, until reaching the approximate speed of 45 mph on rough pavement.

Evidence of the actual testing techniques will be made available upon request.

DRIVER SIDE COMPARTMENTATION

The full height double lap compartment ahead of the rear wheels will be approximately 61.50" wide x

64.00" high x 26.00" deep inside the lower 25.50" and 12.00" deep inside the upper portion with a clear door opening of approximately 57.00" wide x 63.00" high.

There will be two (2) lift-up door compartments above the wheelwell and stabilizer. Each compartment will be approximately 40.50" wide x 25.25" high x 12.00" deep inside with a clear door opening of approximately 38.00" wide x 22.25" high. There will be no partition between these compartments.

The full height lap door compartment behind the stabilizer will be approximately 23.00" wide x 57.00" high x 26.00" deep inside the lower 25.50" and 12.00" deep in the upper portion with a clear door opening of approximately 20.25" wide x 55.00" high.

PASSENGERS SIDE COMPARTMENTATION

The double lap door compartment, ahead of the rear wheels, will be 61.50" wide x 64.00" high x 26.00" deep inside the lower 25.50" and 12.00" deep inside the upper portion with a clear door opening of

57.00" wide x 63.00" high.

There will be two (2) lift-up door compartments above the wheelwell and stabilizer. Each compartment will be 40.50" wide x 25.25" high x 12.00" deep inside with a clear door opening of 38.00" wide x

22.25" high. There will be no partition between these compartments.

The full height lap door compartment behind the stabilizer will be 47.00" wide x 57.00" high x 26.00" deep inside the lower 25.50" and 12.00" deep in the upper section with a clear door opening of 43.00" wide x 56.00" high.

REAR COMPARTMENT

A compartment will be provided at the rear of the unit.

59 of 117

Compartment will be 27.75" wide x 33.69" high x 26.50" deep with a clear door opening of 25.00" wide x 29.75" high.

The compartment will be furnished with a satin finish roll-up door.

SIDE COMPARTMENT DOORS

All hinged compartment doors will be lap style with double panel construction and fabricated of .09"

5052H34 aluminum. Doors will be a minimum of 1.50" thick. To provide additional door strength, a

"C" section reinforcement will be installed between the outer and interior panels.

Doors will be provided with a closed cell rubber gasket around the surface that laps onto the body. A second heavy-duty automotive rubber molding with a hollow core will be installed on the door framing that seals onto the interior panel, to ensure a weather resisting compartment.

All compartment doors will have polished stainless steel continuous hinge with a pin diameter of .25", that is bolted or screwed on with stainless steel fasteners. A dielectric substance will be applied to each hinge fastener.

All door lock mechanisms will be fully enclosed within the door panels to prevent fouling of the lock in the event equipment inside shifts into the lock area.

Doors will be latched with recessed, polished stainless steel "D" ring handles and Eberhard 106 locks.

To prevent corrosion caused by dissimilar metals, compartment door handles will not be attached to outer door panel with screws. A rubber gasket will be provided between the "D" ring handle and the door.

REAR BUMPER

An aluminum rubrail will be provided at the rear of the unit. It will extend the full width of the compartments.

SCUFFPLATE

A quantity of eight (8)brushed stainless steel will be furnished all compartment doors. The scuffplates will be TBD.

COMPARTMENT LIGHTING

There will be nine (9) compartment(s) with two (2) white 12 volt DC LED compartment light strips.

The dual light strips will be centered vertically along each side of the door framing. There will be two

(2) light strips per compartment.The dual light strips will be in compartment(s): all compartment doors.

Any remaining compartments without light strips will have a 6.00" diameter Truck-Lite, Model: 79384 light. Each light will have a number 1076 one filament, two wire bulb.

60 of 117

Opening the compartment door will automatically turn the compartment lighting on.

MOUNTING TRACKS

There will be recessed tracks installed vertically to support the adjustable shelf(s).

Tracks will not protrude into any compartment in order to provide the greatest compartment space and widest shelves possible.

The tracks will be provided in each compartment except for the one that contains the pump operator's panel.

ADJUSTABLE SHELVES

There will be five (5) shelves, with a capacity of 500 lb provided. The shelf construction will consist of

.188" thick aluminum with 2.00" sides. Each shelf will as wide and as deep as the compartment space will allow. Each shelf will be painted spatter gray.

Each shelf will be infinitely adjustable by means of a threaded fastener, which slides in a track.

The shelves will be held in place by .12" thick stamped plated brackets and bolts.

The location will be TBD.

SLIDE-OUT ADJUSTABLE HEIGHT TRAY

There will be three (3) slide-out trays provided.

Each tray will have 2.00" high sides and a minimum capacity rating of 250 lb in the extended position.

Each tray will be mounted on a pair of side mounted slides. The slide mechanisms will have ball bearings for ease of operation and years of dependable service. The slides will be mounted to shelf tracks to allow the tray to be adjustable up and down within the designated mounting location.

An automatic lock will be provided for both the in and out tray positions. The lock trip mechanism will be located at the front of the tray and will be easily operated with a gloved hand.

The tray(s) will be located TBD.

REAR WALL

The entire rear surface of the apparatus and all the doors will be covered with smooth aluminum.

RUB RAIL

The bottom edge of the body panel will have a 2.00" high rubber rub rail the length of the body for protection.

HARD SUCTION HOSE

Hard suction hose will not be required.

61 of 117

HANDRAILS

The handrails will be 1.25" diameter anodized aluminum extrusion, with a ribbed design, to provide a positive gripping surface.

Chrome plated end stanchions will support the handrail. Plastic gaskets will be used between end stanchions and any painted surfaces.

Drain holes will be provided in the bottom of all vertically mounted handrails.

Handrails will be provided to meet NFPA 1901 section 15.8 requirements. The handrails will be installed as noted on the sales drawing.

AIR BOTTLE STORAGE

A total of three (3) air bottle compartments will be provided and located on the PS ahead and behind the rear axle, and on the DS ahead of the rear axle. The air bottle compartment will be 14.00" wide x 7.50" tall x 26.00" deep. A painted stainless steel door with a chrome plated latch will be provided to contain the air bottle. A dielectric barrier will be provided between the door hinge, hinge fasteners and the body sheet metal.

EXTENSION LADDER

There will be a 35', three (3) section, aluminum, Duo-Safety, Series 1225-A extension ladder provided.

AERIAL EXTENSION LADDER

There will be one (1) 24', two (2) section, aluminum, Series 900-A extension ladder(s) provided.

ROOF LADDER

There will be two (2), 16' aluminum, Duo-Safety, Series 875-A roof ladders provided.

AERIAL FOLDING LADDER

There will be one (1) 10' aluminum, Duo-Safety, Series 585-A folding ladder(s) provided.

GROUND LADDER STORAGE

Ladder tunnels will be provided at the rear of the apparatus on either side of the turntable.

Tunnels will be capable of holding up to two (2) two-section pumper style ladders on each side not in excess of 22.00" wide or 5-13/16" in thickness.

The ladders will be held captive top and bottom by stainless steel tracks. A polyethylene wear plate will be provided to prevent ladders from being scuffed by contacting metal parts. The plate will be mounted to the bottom of the entrance area of the ladder tunnels.

All ladders will be removable individually without having to remove any other ladder.

A Velcro® strap will be provided to help contain the ladders.

A smooth aluminum door will be provided on each ladder tunnel.

62 of 117

10' PIKE POLE

One (1) pike pole Fire Hooks Unlimited, Model RH-10, 10' long roof hook with a steel handle will be provided and located on the fly section of the aerial.

PIKE POLES

There will be one (1) 12 foot pike pole(s) with fiberglass I-beam handles provided. The pike pole(s) will be stored in tubular holders located in the ground ladder storage compartment.

8' PIKE POLE

There will be one (1) Fire Hooks Unlimited, New York Hook , 8' long roof hook with steel shaft and chisel (pry) end provided.

6 FT PIKE POLE

There will be one (1) Fire Hooks Unlimited NY roof hook RH-6, 6 foot pike pole(s) with steel handles and pry end provided TBD.

4 FT PIKE POLE

There will be one (1) 4' Dry-Wall Hook(s), Fire Hooks Unlimited #DWHS-4' W/D, with fiberglass pole and D-ring handles provided.

PUMP

Pump will be a Waterous CSU, 2000 gpm single (1) stage midship mounted centrifugal type.

Pump will be the class "A" type.

Pump will deliver the percentage of rated discharge at pressures indicated below:

- 100% of rated capacity at 150 psi net pump pressure.

-70% of rated capacity at 200 psi net pump pressure.

-50% of rated capacity at 250 psi net pump pressure.

Pump body will be close-grained gray iron, bronze fitted, and horizontally split in two (2) sections for easy removal of the entire impeller shaft assembly (including wear rings).

Pump will be designed for complete servicing from the bottom of the truck, without disturbing the pump setting or apparatus piping.

Pump case halves will be bolted together on a single horizontal face to minimize a chance of leakage and facilitate ease of reassembly. No end flanges will be used.

Discharge manifold of the pump will be cast as an integral part of the pump body assembly and will provide a minimum of three (3) 3.50" openings for flexibility in providing various discharge outlets for maximum efficiency.

63 of 117

The three (3) 3.50" openings will be located as follows: one (1) outlet to the right of the pump, one (1) outlet to the left of the pump, and one (1) outlet directly on top of the discharge manifold.

Impeller shaft will be stainless steel, accurately ground to size. It will be supported at each end by sealed, anti-friction ball bearings for rigid precise support. Impeller will have flame plated hubs assuring maximum pump life and efficiency despite any presence of abrasive matter in the water supply.

Bearings will be protected from water and sediment by suitable stuffing boxes, flinger rings, and oil seals. No special or sleeve type bearings will be used.

Stuffing boxes will be of the conventional two (2) piece, split-gland type, to permit adjustment or replacement of Grafoil packing without disturbing the pump. Water will be fed into stuffing box lantern rings for proper lubrication and cooling when the pump is operating.

Lantern rings will be located at the inner ends of the stuffing boxes, to avoid having to remove them when replacing pump packing.

Wear rings will be bronze and easily replaceable to restore original pump efficiency and eliminate the need to replace the entire pump casing due to wear.

PUMP TRANSMISSION

The pump transmission will be made of a three (3) piece, aluminum, horizontally split casing. Power transfer to pump will be through a high strength Morse HY-VO silent drive chain. By the use of a chain rather than gears, 50% of the sprocket will be accepting or transmitting torque, compared to two (2) or three (3) teeth doing all the work.

Drive shafts will be 2.35" diameter hardened and ground alloy steel and supported by ball bearings. The case will be designed to eliminate the need for water cooling.

AIR PUMP SHIFT

Pump shift engagement will be made by a two (2) position sliding collar, actuated pneumatically (by air pressure), with a three (3) position air control switch located in the cab. A manual back-up shift control will also be located on the pump operator's pump panel.

Two (2) indicator lights will be provided adjacent to the pump shift inside the cab. One (1) green light will indicate the pump shift has been completed and be labeled "pump engaged". The second green light will indicate when the pump has been engaged, and that the chassis transmission is in pump gear. This indicator light will be labeled "OK to pump".

Another green indicator light will be installed adjacent to the hand throttle on the pump panel and indicate either the pump is engaged and the road transmission is in pump gear, or the road transmission is in neutral and the pump is not engaged. This indicator light will be labeled "Warning: Do not open throttle unless light is on".

The pump shift control in the cab will be illuminated to meet NFPA requirements.

64 of 117

TRANSMISSION LOCK-UP

The direct gear transmission lock-up for the fire pump operation will engage automatically when the pump shift control in the cab is activated.

AUXILIARY COOLING SYSTEM

A supplementary heat exchange cooling system will be provided to allow the use of water from the discharge side of the pump for cooling the engine water. The heat exchanger will be cylindrical type and will be a separate unit. The heat exchanger will be installed in the pump or engine compartment with the control located on the pump operator's control panel. Exchanger will be plumbed to the master drain valve.

INTAKE RELIEF VALVE

An Elkhart relief valve will be installed on the suction side of the pump preset at 125 psig.

Relief valve will have a working range of 75 psig to 250 psig.

Outlet will terminate below the frame rails with a 2.50" National Standard hose thread adapter and will have a "do not cap" warning tag.

Control will be located behind an access door at a side pump panel.

PRESSURE GOVERNOR

This apparatus will be equipped with a Class1 "Total Pressure Governor" engine/pump governor/throttle system that is connected directly to the Electronic Control Module (ECM) mounted on the engine. The

"Total Pressure Governor" is to operate as a pressure sensor (regulating) governor (PSG).

A special preset feature will permit a predetermined pressure of RPM to be set. The preset pressure or

RPM will be displayed on the message display of the "Total Pressure Governor". The preset will be easily adjustable by the operator

The pressure sensor governor system will be operable only after the vehicle parking brake has been set, the transmission is the pumping mode, and the fire pump has been engaged.

The pressure sensor governor system will have two (2) modes of operation: pressure mode or rpm mode.

When in the pressure mode, the PSG system will automatically maintain the discharge pressure set by the operator regardless of flow (within engine/pump operating capabilities).

In the rpm mode, the PSG system will automatically maintain a set engine speed, regardless of engine load (within engine operation capabilities).

A pump cavitation protection feature will be provided which will return the engine to idle should the pump cavitate.

65 of 117

The pressure controller will incorporate monitoring for engine coolant temperature, oil pressure, and battery voltage.

PRIMING PUMP

The priming pump will be a Trident Emergency Products compressed air powered, high efficiency, multistage venturi based AirPrime System, conforming to standards outlined in the current edition of

NFPA 1901.

All wetted metallic parts of the priming system are to be of brass and stainless steel construction.

One (1) priming control will open the priming valve and start the pump primer.

PUMP MANUALS

There will be a total of two (2) pump manuals provided by the pump manufacturer and furnished with the apparatus. The manuals will be provided by the pump manufacturer in the form of two (2) CDs.

Each manual will cover pump operation, maintenance, and parts.

PLUMBING

All inlet and outlet plumbing, 3.00" and smaller, will be plumbed with either stainless steel pipe or synthetic rubber hose reinforced with high-tensile polyester braid. If hose is used, it must have a minimum burst rating of 1,000 psi and be equipped with high pressure couplings. Larger inlets and outlets will be threaded or welded black iron pipe unless otherwise specified. Small diameter secondary plumbing such as drain lines will be stainless steel, brass or hose.

Where vibration or chassis flexing may damage or loosen piping or where a coupling is required for servicing, the piping will be equipped with victaulic or rubber couplings.

All lines to drain through either a master drain valve or will be equipped with individual drain valves.

All individual drain lines for discharges will be extended with a hose to drain below the chassis frame.

All water carrying gauge lines will be of flexible polypropylene tubing.

MAIN PUMP INLETS

A 6.00" pump manifold inlet will be provided on each side of the vehicle. The suction inlets will include removable die cast zinc screens that are designed to provide cathodic protection for the pump, thus reducing corrosion in the pump.

MAIN PUMP INLET CAP

The main pump inlets will have National Standard Threads with a long handle chrome cap.

The cap will be the Pierce VLH, which incorporates an exclusive thread design to automatically relieve stored pressure in the line when disconnected.

66 of 117

VALVES

All ball valves will be Akron® Brass. The Akron valves will be the 8000 series heavy-duty style with a stainless steel ball and a simple two-seat design. No lubrication or regular maintenance is required on the valve.

Valves will have a ten (10) year warranty.

LEFT SIDE INLET

On the left side pump panel will be one (1) - 2.50" auxiliary inlet, terminating in 2.50" National

Standard Hose Thread. The auxiliary inlet will be provided with a strainer, chrome swivel and plug.

The location of the valve for the one (1) inlet will be behind the pump panel.

INLET CONTROL

Control for the side auxiliary inlet(s) will be located at the inlet valve.

INLET BLEEDER VALVE

A 0.75" bleeder valve will be provided for each side gated inlet. The valves will be located behind the panel with a swing style handle control extended to the outside of the panel. The handles will be chrome plated and provide a visual indication of valve position. The swing handle will provide an ergonomic position for operating the valve without twisting the wrist and provides excellent leverage. The water discharged by the bleeders will be routed below the chassis frame rails.

TANK TO PUMP

The booster tank will be connected to the intake side of the pump with heavy duty piping and a quarter turn 3.00" full flow line valve with the control remotely located at the operator's panel. Tank to pump line will run straight (no elbows) from the pump into the front face of the water tank and angle down into the tank sump. A rubber coupling will be included in this line to prevent damage from vibration or chassis flexing.

A check valve will be provided in the tank to pump supply line to prevent the possibility of "back filling" the water tank.

TANK REFILL

A 1.50" combination tank refill and pump re-circulation line will be provided, using a quarter-turn full flow ball valve controlled from the pump operator's panel.

LEFT SIDE DISCHARGE OUTLETS

There will be two (2) discharge outlets with a 2.50" valve on the left side of the apparatus, terminating with 2.50" (M) National Standard hose thread adapter.

RIGHT SIDE DISCHARGE OUTLETS

There will be two (2) discharge outlets with a 2.50" valve on the right side of the apparatus, terminating with a 2.50" (M) National Standard hose thread adapter.

67 of 117

LARGE DIAMETER DISCHARGE OUTLET

There will be a 5.00" discharge outlet with a 3.50" Waterous valve installed on the right side of the apparatus, terminating with a 5.00" (M) National Standard hose thread adapter. This discharge outlet will be actuated with a handwheel control at the pump operator's control panel.

An indicator will be provided to show when the valve is in the closed position.

FRONT DISCHARGE OUTLET

There will be one (1) 1.50" discharge outlet piped to the front of the apparatus and located on the top of the left side of the front bumper.

Plumbing will consist of 2.00" piping and flexible hose with a 2.00" ball valve with control at the pump operator's panel. A fabricated weldment made of stainless steel pipe will be used in the plumbing where appropriate. The piping will terminate with a 1.50" NST with 90 degree stainless steel swivel.

There will be Class 1 automatic drains provided at all low points of the piping.

DISCHARGE CAPS

Chrome plated, rocker lug, caps with chains will be furnished for all side discharge outlets.

The caps will be the Pierce VLH, which incorporates an exclusive thread design to automatically relieve stored pressure in the line when disconnected.

OUTLET BLEEDERS

A 0.75" bleeder valve will be provided for each outlet 1.50" or larger. Automatic drain valves are acceptable with some outlets if deemed appropriate with the application.

The valves will be located behind the panel with a swing style handle control extended to the outside of the side pump panel. The handles will be chrome plated and provide a visual indication of valve position. The swing handle will provide an ergonomic position for operating the valve without twisting the wrist and provides excellent leverage. Bleeders will be located at the bottom of the pump panel.

They will be properly labeled identifying the discharge they are plumbed in to. The water discharged by the bleeders will be routed below the chassis frame rails.

LEFT SIDE OUTLET ELBOWS

The 2.50" discharge outlets located on the left side pump panel will be furnished with a 2.50" (F)

National Standard hose thread x 2.50" (M) National Standard hose thread, chrome plated, 45 degree elbow.

The elbow will be Pierce VLH, which incorporates an exclusive thread design to automatically relieve stored pressure in the line when disconnected.

68 of 117

RIGHT SIDE OUTLET ELBOWS

The 2.50" discharge outlets located on the right side pump panel will be furnished with a 2.50" (F)

National Standard hose thread x 2.50" (M) National Standard hose thread, chrome plated, 45 degree elbow.

The elbow will be Pierce VLH, which incorporates an exclusive thread design to automatically relieve stored pressure in the line when disconnected.

LARGE DIAMETER OUTLET ELBOWS

The 5.00" outlet will be furnished with a 5.00" (F) National Standard hose thread x 5.00" Storz elbow adapter with Storz cap.

DISCHARGE OUTLET CONTROLS

The discharge outlets will incorporate a quarter-turn ball valve with the control located at the pump operator's panel. The valve operating mechanism will indicate the position of the valve.

If a handwheel control valve is used, the control will be a minimum of a 3.9" diameter stainless steel handwheel with a dial position indicator built in to the center of the handwheel.

AERIAL OUTLET

The aerial waterway will be plumbed from the pump to the water tower line with 5.00" pipe and a 3.50"

Waterous valve. The control for the waterway valve will be located at the pump operator's panel.

An indicator will be provided to show when the valve is in the open or closed position.

CROSSLAY HOSE BEDS, 1.50"

Two (2) crosslays with 1.50" outlets will be provided. Each bed to be capable of carrying 300' of 2" DJ and will be plumbed with 2.00" i.d. pipe and gated with a 2.00" quarter turn ball valve.

Outlets to be equipped with a 1.50" National Standard hose thread 90 degree swivel located in the hose bed so that hose may be removed from either side of apparatus.

The crosslay controls will be at the pump operator's panel.

The center crosslay dividers will be fabricated of .25" aluminum and will provide adjustment from side to side. The divider will be unpainted with a brushed finish.

Vertical scuffplates, constructed of stainless steel, will be provided at the front and rear ends of the bed on each side of vehicle.

Crosslay bed flooring will consist of removable perforated brushed aluminum.

CROSSLAY HOSE BEDS

One (1) crosslay with 2.50" outlets will be provided. Each bed to be capable of carrying TBD and will be plumbed with 2.50" i.d. pipe and gated with a 2.50" quarter turn ball valve.

69 of 117

Outlets to be equipped with a 2.50" National Standard hose thread 90 degree swivel located in the hose bed so that hose may be removed from either side of apparatus.

The crosslay controls will be at the pump operator's panel.

The center crosslay dividers will be fabricated of .25" aluminum and shall provide adjustment from side to side. The divider will be unpainted with a brushed finish. The remainder of the crosslay bed will be painted job color.

Stainless steel vertical scuffplates will be provided at hose bed ends (each side of vehicle). Bottom of hose bed ends (each side) will also be equipped with a stainless steel scuffplate.

Crosslay bed flooring will consist of removable perforated brushed aluminum.

CROSSLAY/DEADLAY HOSE RESTRAINT

Elastic netting will be provided across the top and ends of three (3) crosslay/deadlay opening(s) to secure the hose during travel. The netting will be permanently attached at the top center of the crosslay/deadlay bed and removable on each end.

FOAM SYSTEM

A foam system will not be required on this apparatus.

PUMP COMPARTMENT

The pump compartment will be separate from the hose body and compartments so that each may flex independently of the other. It will be a fabricated assembly of steel tubing, angles and channels which supports both the fire pump and the side running boards.

The pump compartment will be mounted on the chassis frame rails with rubber biscuits in a four point pattern to allow for chassis frame twist.

Pump compartment, pump, plumbing and gauge panels will be removable from the chassis in a single assembly.

PUMP MOUNTING

Pump will be mounted to a substructure which will be mounted to the chassis frame rail using rubber isolators. The mounting will allow chassis frame rails to flex independently without damage to the fire pump.

PUMP CONTROL PANELS (SIDE CONTROL)

All pump controls and gauges will be located at the left (driver's) side of the apparatus and properly marked.

The pump panel on the right (passenger's) side is removable with lift and turn type fasteners. The left

(driver's) side is fastened with screws.

70 of 117

The control panels will be 48.00" wide.

The gauge and control panels will be two (2) separate panels for ease of maintenance.

The side gauge panel will be hinged at the bottom with a full length stainless steel hinge. The fasteners used to hold the panel in the upright position will be quarter turn type. Vinyl covered cable or chains will be used to hold the gauge panel in the dropped position.

Polished stainless steel trim collars will be installed around all inlets and outlets.

All push/pull valve controls will have 1/4 turn locking control rods with polished chrome plated zinc tee handles. Guides for the push/pull control rods will be chrome plated zinc castings securely mounted to the pump panel. Push/pull valve controls will be capable of locking in any position. The control rods will pull straight out of the panel and will be equipped with universal joints to eliminate binding.

The identification tag for each valve control will be recessed in the face of the tee handle.

All discharge outlets will have color coded identification tags, with each discharge having its own unique color. Color coding will include the labeling of the outlet and the drain for each corresponding discharge.

All line pressure gauges will be mounted in individual chrome plated castings with the identification tag recessed in the casting below the gauge. All remaining identification tags will be mounted on the pump panel in chrome plated bezels. Mounting of the castings and identification bezels will be done with a threaded peg cast on the back side of the bezel or screws.

PUMP PANEL CONFIGURATION

The pump panel configuration will be neat and orderly.

PUMP OPERATOR'S PLATFORM

A pull out, flip down platform will be provided at the pump operator's control panel.

The front edge and the top surface of the platform will be made of DA finished aluminum with a Morton

Cass insert.

The platform will be approximately 13.75" deep when in the stowed position and approximately 22.00" deep when extended. The platform will be 35.00" wide. The platform will lock in the retracted and the extended position.

The platform will be wired to the "step not stowed" indicator in the cab.

PUMP OPERATOR'S PLATFORM PERIMETER LIGHT

There will be an On Scene Solutions, Model Night Stick Access, 20.00" white 12 volt DC LED strip light provided to illuminate the ground area.

71 of 117

PUMP AND GAUGE PANEL

The pump and gauge panels will be constructed of aluminum with a painted FormCoat black finish. A polished aluminum trim molding will be provided around each panel.

The passenger's side pump panel will be removable and fastened with swell type fasteners.

PUMP COMPARTMENT LIGHT

A pump compartment light will be provided inside the right side pump enclosure and accessible through a door on the pump panel.

A .125" weep hole will be provided in each light lens, preventing moisture retention.

Engine monitoring graduated LED indicators will be incorporated with the pressure controller.

Also provided at the pump panel will be the following:

- Master Pump Drain Control

AIR HORN SWITCH

An air horn control switch will be provided at the pump operator's control panel. This switch will be red and properly labeled. The button will be located within easy reach of the operator in the electrical switch panel.

VACUUM AND PRESSURE GAUGES

The pump vacuum and pressure gauges will be liquid filled and manufactured by Class 1, Inc.

The gauges will be a minimum of 4.00" in diameter and will have white faces with black lettering, with a pressure range of 30.00"-0-600#.

Gauge construction will include a Zytel nylon case with adhesive mounting gasket and threaded retaining nut.

The pump pressure and vacuum gauges will be installed adjacent to each other at the pump operator's control panel.

Test port connections will be provided at the pump operator's panel. One will be connected to the intake side of the pump, and the other to the discharge manifold of the pump. They will have 0.25 in. standard pipe thread connections and non-corrosive polished stainless steel or brass plugs. They will be marked with a label.

This gauge will include a 10 year warranty against leakage, pointer defect, and defective bourdon tube.

PRESSURE GAUGES

The individual "line" pressure gauges for the discharges will be Class 1© interlube filled.

They will be a minimum of 2.00" in diameter and have white faces with black lettering.

72 of 117

Gauge construction will include a Zytel nylon case with adhesive mounting gasket and threaded retaining nut.

Gauges will have a pressure range of 30"-0-400#.

The individual pressure gauge will be installed as close to the outlet control as practical.

This gauge will include a 10 year warranty against leakage, pointer defect, and defective bourdon tube.

WATER LEVEL GAUGE

There will be an electronic water level gauge provided on the operator's panel that registers water level by means of five (5) colored LED lights. The lights will be durable, ultra-bright five (5) LED design viewable through 180 degrees. The water level indicators will be as follows:

100 percent = Green

75 percent = Yellow

50 percent = Yellow

25 percent = Yellow

Refill = Red

The light will flash when the level drops below the given level indicator to provide an eighth of a tank indication. To further alert the pump operator, the lights will flash sequentially when the water tank is empty.

The level measurement will be based on the sensing of head pressure of the fluid in the tank.

The display will be constructed of a solid plastic material with a chrome plated die cast bezel to reduce vibrations that can cause broken wires and loose electronic components. The encapsulated design will provide complete protection from water and environmental elements. An industrial pressure transducer will be mounted to the outside of the tank. The field calibratable display measures head pressure to accurately show the tank level.

LIGHT SHIELD

There will be a polished, 16 gauge stainless steel light shield installed over the pump operator's panel.

There will be 12 volt DC white LED lights installed under the stainless steel light shield to illuminate the controls, switches, essential instructions, gauges, and instruments necessary for the operation of the apparatus. These lights will be activated by the pump panel light switch.

Additional lights will be included every 18.00" depending on the size of the pump house.

One (1) pump panel light will come on when the pump is in ok to pump mode.

There will be a light activated above the pump panel light switch when the parking brake is set. This is to afford the operator some illumination when first approaching the control panel.

73 of 117

There will be a green pump engaged indicator light activated on at the operator's panel when the pump is shifted into gear from inside the cab.

AIR HORN SYSTEM

Two (2) Grover Stutter tone air horns will be provided and located in the front bumper, recessed inside the front bumper. The horn system will be piped to the air brake system wet tank utilizing .38" tubing.

A pressure protection valve will be installed in-line to prevent loss of air in the air brake system.

AIR HORN CONTROL

A lanyard rope pull control will be provided within reach of the passenger.

ELECTRONIC SIREN

A Whelen®, Model 295SLSA1, electronic siren with noise canceling microphone will be provided.

This siren to be active when the battery switch is on and that emergency master switch is on.

Electronic siren head will be located in the center console.

Siren will be actuated by a foot switch on the officer's side and by the horn button in the steering wheel.

The driver will have the option to control the siren or the chassis horns from the horn button by means of a selector switch.

SPEAKER

There will be one (1) speaker provided. Each speaker will be a Whelen®, Model SA315P, black nylon composite, 100-watt, with through bumper mounting brackets and polished stainless steel grille. Each speaker will be connected to the siren amplifier.

The speaker(s) will be recessed in the front bumper on the driver's side.

AUXILIARY MECHANICAL SIREN

A Federal Q2B® siren will be furnished. A siren brake button will be installed on the switch panel.

The control solenoid will be powered up after the emergency master switch is activated.

The mechanical siren will be mounted on the bumper deck plate. It will be mounted on the right side. A reinforcement plate will be furnished to support the siren.

SWITCHES, MECHANICAL SIREN

The mechanical siren will be actuated by two (2) foot switches, one (1) on the officer's side and one (1) on drivers side, and by a horn button in the steering wheel. The driver will have the option to control the siren or the chassis horns from the horn button by means of a selector switch located on the instrument panel.

74 of 117

LIGHTBARS (CAB ROOF)

There will be two (2) 24.00" Whelen LED lightbars mounted on the cab roof, one (1) on each side, above the driver's and passenger's door, facing forward.

Each lightbar will include the following:

One (1) red flashing LED module facing forward.

Two (2) red flashing corner LED module, one (1) in each front corner.

One (1) red flashing LED module on the end facing to the side.

All the lenses will be clear.

There shall be a switch located in the cab on the switch panel to control the lightbars.

ADDITIONAL CAB ROOF SIDE LIGHTBARS

There will be two (2) 24.00" Whelen, Freedom, mini LED lightbars mounted on the roof, one (1) on each side, over the crew cab doors.

Each lightbar will include the following:

Two (2) red flashing corner LED modules.

One (1) blue flashing forward LED module.

These lightbars will be activated with the roof light.

The lenses of each lightbar will be clear.

The lights in the lightbars may be load managed when the parking brake is applied.

FRONT ZONE LOWER LIGHTS

There will be two (2) pair of warning lights installed on the cab face above the headlights in a rectangular common bezel.

The outer lights will be Whelen, Model 60*02F*R LED lights.

These lights will be red Super LED/clear lens.

The inboard lights will be Code-3, Model OL13FX, 35W halogen oscillating lights.

The color of the both inside lights blue.

There will be a switch located in the cab on the switch panel to control these lights.

The inside lights will be disabled if white, or may be load managed if colored, when the parking brake is applied.

75 of 117

TRAFFIC WARNING LIGHT

There will be two (2) Tri Lite Mars "888" Traffic Breaker, Model TB8-L1-P/*, white LED lights with a figure-eight (8) light pattern mounted on stainless steel pedestals, one (1) light located on each side of cab face, just below the windshield.

The lens color to be red.

There will be a switch located in the cab, on the switch panel to control the lights.

The lights will be load managed if colored, or disabled if white, when the parking brake is applied.

SIDE ZONE LOWER LIGHTING

There will be four (4) Whelen, Model M6*, LED flashing warning lights with bezels located in the following positions:

Two (2) lights, one (1) each side on the bumper extension.

The side front light to be red to the front and blue to the rear.

Two (2) lights, above the rear wheel well.

The side rear lights to be blue to the front and red to the rear.

All four (4) lights will include a clear lens.

There will be a switch located in the cab on the switch panel to control the lights.

Any white warning lights will be disabled when the parking brake is set.

SIDE WARNING LIGHTS

There will be two (2) Whelen, Model M9* LED flashing warning light(s) with bezel(s) provided one on each side of cab, behind crew cab doors below the scene lights.

The color of the light(s) to be red to the front and blue to the rear.

All of these lights will include a clear lens.

These lights will be activated with the side warning switch.

Any white warning lights will be deactivated when the parking brake is set.

These lights may be load managed when the parking brake is applied.

SIDE WARNING LIGHTS

There will be two (2) pairs of Whelen Model Strip-Lite™, PS*00F*R LED lights, recessed within the rear body rub rail, one each side, under the D1 and D3, P1 and P3 compartment.

76 of 117

The color of the lights will be red.

The lens color will be clear.

These lights will be activated with the side warning switch.

Any white warning lights will be deactivated when the parking brake is set.

SIDE WARNING LIGHTS

There will be two (2) Whelen, Model M6*C LED flashing warning light(s) with bezel(s) provided behind crew cab doors, in line with the door handles, one each side.

The color of the lights will be red.

All of these lights will include a clear lens.

These lights will be activated with the Side Zone Lower warning lights.

REAR ZONE LOWER LIGHTING

There will be two (2) Whelen, Model M6* LED flashing warning lights with Whelen, Model M6FC chrome flanges located at the rear of the apparatus.

The driver's side rear light to be red to the outside and blue to the inside.

The passenger's side rear light to be red to the outside and blue to the inside.

Both lights will include a lens that is clear.

There will be a switch located in the cab on the switch panel to control the lights.

REAR WARNING LIGHTS

There will be two (2) Whelen®, Model 6RB**, LED flashing warning light(s) with Whelen, Model

6EFLANG, chrome flange(s) provided one each side, just below the scene lights.

The color of the lights will be red.

The color of the lens of the light(s) will be clear.

These lights will be activated with the rear upper warning switch.

REAR/SIDE ZONE UPPER WARNING LIGHTS

There will be two (2) Whelen®, Model L31H*FN, LED warning beacons provided at the rear of the truck, located one (1) each side. There will be a switch located in the cab on the switch panel to control the beacons.

The color of the lights will be red LEDs with both domes clear.

77 of 117

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM GENERAL DESIGN FOR ALTERNATING CURRENT

The following guidelines will apply to the 120/240 VAC system installation:

General

Any fixed line voltage power source producing alternating current (ac) line voltage will produce electric power at 60 cycles plus or minus 3 cycles.

Except where superseded by the requirements of NFPA 1901, all components, equipment and installation procedures will conform to NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (herein referred to as the

NEC).

Line voltage electrical system equipment and materials included on the apparatus will be listed and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. All products will be used only in the manner for which they have been listed.

Grounding

Grounding will be in accordance with Section 250-6 "Portable and Vehicle Mounted Generators" of the

NEC. Ungrounded systems will not be used. Only stranded or braided copper conductors will be used for grounding and bonding.

An equipment grounding means will be provided in accordance with Section 250-91 (Grounding

Conductor Material) of the NEC.

The grounded current carrying conductor (neutral) will be insulated from the equipment grounding conductors and from the equipment enclosures and other grounded parts. The neutral conductor will be colored white or gray in accordance with Section 200-6 (Means of Identifying Grounding Conductors) of the NEC.

In addition to the bonding required for the low voltage return current, each body and driving or crew compartment enclosure will be bonded to the vehicle frame by a copper conductor. This conductor will have a minimum amperage rating of 115 percent of the nameplate current rating of the power source specification label as defined in Section 310-15 (amp capacities) of the NEC. A single conductor properly sized to meet the low voltage and line voltage requirements will be permitted to be used.

All power source system mechanical and electrical components will be sized to support the continuous duty nameplate rating of the power source.

Operation

Instructions that provide the operator with the essential power source operating instructions, including the power-up and power-down sequence, will be permanently attached to the apparatus at any point where such operations can take place.

Provisions will be made for quickly and easily placing the power source into operation. The control will be marked to indicate when it is correctly positioned for power source operation. Any control device

78 of 117

used in the drive train will be equipped with a means to prevent the unintentional movement of the control device from its set position.

A power source specification label will be permanently attached to the apparatus near the operator's control station. The label will provide the operator with the information detailed in Figure 19-4.10.

Direct drive (PTO) and portable generator installations will comply with Article 445 (Generators) of the

NEC.

Overcurrent protection

The conductors used in the power supply assembly between the output terminals of the power source and the main over current protection device will not exceed 144.00" (3658 mm) in length.

For fixed power supplies, all conductors in the power supply assembly will be type THHW, THW, or use stranded conductors enclosed in nonmetallic liquid tight flexible conduit rated for a minimum of 194 degree Fahrenheit (90 degrees Celsius).

For portable power supplies, conductors located between the power source and the line side of the main overcurrent protection device will be type SO or type SEO with suffix WA flexible cord rated for 600volts at 194 degrees Fahrenheit (90 degrees Celsius).

Wiring Methods

Fixed wiring systems will be limited to the following:

Metallic or nonmetallic liquid tight flexible conduit rated at not less than 194 degrees Fahrenheit

(90 degrees Celsius)

or

Type SO or Type SEO cord with a WA suffix, rated at 600 volts at not less than 194 degrees

Fahrenheit (90 degrees Celsius)

Electrical cord or conduit will not be attached to chassis suspension components, water or fuel lines, air or air brake lines, fire pump piping, hydraulic lines, exhaust system components, or low voltage wiring.

In addition the wiring will be run as follows.

Separated by a minimum of 12.00" (305 mm), or properly shielded, from exhaust piping

Separated from fuel lines by a minimum of 6.00" (152 mm) distance

Electrical cord or conduit will be supported within 6.00" (152 mm) of any junction box and at a minimum of every 24.00" (610 mm) of continuous run. Supports will be made of nonmetallic materials or corrosion protected metal. All supports will be of a design that does not cut or abrade the conduit or cable and will be mechanically fastened to the vehicle.

79 of 117

Wiring Identification

All line voltage conductors located in the main panel board will be individually and permanently identified. The identification will reference the wiring schematic or indicate the final termination point.

When prewiring for future power sources or devices, the unterminated ends will be labeled showing function and wire size.

Wet Locations

All wet location receptacle outlets and inlet devices, including those on hardwired remote power distribution boxes, will be of the grounding type provided with a wet location cover and installed in accordance with Section 210-7 "Receptacles and Cord Connections" of the NEC.

All receptacles located in a wet location will be not less than 24.00" (610 mm) from the ground.

Receptacles on off-road vehicles will be a minimum of 30.00" (762 mm) from the ground.

The face of any wet location receptacle will be installed in a plane from vertical to not more than 45 degrees off vertical. No receptacle will be installed in a face up position.

Dry Locations

All receptacles located in a dry location will be of the grounding type. Receptacles will be not less than

30.00" (762 mm) above the interior floor height.

All receptacles will be marked with the type of line voltage (120-volts or 240-volts) and the current rating in amps. If the receptacles are direct current, or other than single phase, they will be so marked.

Listing

All receptacles and electrical inlet devices will be listed to UL 498, Standard for Safety Attachment

Plugs and Receptacles, or other appropriate performance standards. Receptacles used for direct current voltages will be rated for the appropriate service.

Electrical System Testing

The wiring and associated equipment will be tested by the apparatus manufacturer or the installer of the line voltage system.

The wiring and permanently connected devices and equipment will be subjected to a dielectric voltage withstand test of 900-volts for one (1) minute. The test will be conducted between live parts and the neutral conductor, and between live parts and the vehicle frame with any switches in the circuit(s) closed. This test will be conducted after all body work has been completed.

Electrical polarity verification will be made of all permanently wired equipment and receptacles to determine that connections have been properly made.

Operational Test per Current NFPA 1901 Standard

The apparatus manufacturer will perform the following operation test and ensure that the power source and any devices that are attached to the line voltage electrical system are properly connected and in

80 of 117

working order. The test will be witnessed and the results certified by an independent third-party certification organization.

The prime mover will be started from a cold start condition and the line voltage electrical system loaded to 100 percent of the nameplate rating.

The power source will be operated at 100 percent of its nameplate voltage for a minimum of two (2) hours unless the system meets category certification as defined in the current NFPA 1901 standard.

Where the line voltage power is derived from the vehicle's low voltage system, the minimum continuous electrical load as defined in the current NFPA 1901 standard will be applied to the low voltage electrical system during the operational test.

GENERATOR

Model:Onan 7.5 kW, model HDKAL-1B, diesel powered generator.

Mounting:Permanent

Size:37.30" length x 21.00" width x 23.90" height

Weight:490 pounds

Fuel Requirements

The fuel supply will be the chassis fuel tank or an additional tank, if so requested.

Exhaust

The muffler will be mounted outside the generator compartment and will discharge away from any operator's position.

Type of Cooling System

The generator will be liquid cooled and equipped with a pusher fan. The radiator will be isolated so that the hot air doesn't recirculate back into the compartment.

Cooling Requirements

The air outlet requirements will not be less than 200 square inches. The fresh air inlet will not be less than 200 square inches.

Shutdown:Low oil pressure and high engine temperature.

Volts:120/240

Phase:Single

81 of 117

Amperage:62.5 amp's @ 120 VAC

31.2 amp's @ 240 VAC

Cycles:60 HZ

Operating Criteria

A caution tag will be placed close to the generator stating that the compartment doors must be open during operation.

If the generator is located in a cargo area, the radiator will be facing the side sheet for the air to escape.

GENERATOR LOCATION

The generator will be permanently mounted in a recessed open compartment above the fire pump on the drivers side. The oil drain, oil dipstick, fuel filter and oil filter for the generator will be easily accessible for maintenance. Removable panels and an extended oil drain will possibly be necessary to meet this requirement.

GENERATOR COVER

The generator will be covered with an aluminum treadplate cover that will provide adequate ventilation.

There will be access doors provided for ease of maintenance.

ELECTRIC START PROVISION

Electric start provisions will be furnished for the generator from the chassis battery system.

ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP

A fuel pick-up tube will be provided in the chassis fuel tank along with an electric fuel pump for the generator fuel system. A fuel line will be provided from the fuel tank to the generator with a manual shutoff valve located at the generator.

GENERATOR OIL DRAIN

The generator oil drain will extend through the floor exiting below the truck.

GENERATOR EXHAUST

The generator exhaust will be routed to the right side of the body near the rear wheels and terminate under the vehicle.

CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL

A circuit breaker panel will be installed in the TBD. A directory for each breaker will be provided adjacent to the circuit breaker panel. Identification of circuits will be done in a durable manner that provides years of service.

82 of 117

ELECTRIC CORD REEL

Furnished with the AC electrical system will be a Hannay, Series 1600, cord reel wired for a four (4) conductor cord. The reel will be provided with a 12-volt electric rewind switch that is guarded to prevent accidental operation and labeled for its intended use. The push button switch will be protected with a fuse and installed at a height not to exceed 72.00" above the operators standing position.

The exterior finish of the reel(s) will be painted #99 black.

A Nylatron guide to be provided to aid in the payout and loading of the reel. A ball stop will be provided to prevent the cord from being wound on the reel.

A label will be provided in a readily visible location adjacent to the reel. The label will indicate current rating, current type, phase, voltage and total cable length.

A total of one (1) cord reel will be provided one (1) above the pump area on the left side.

CORD

Provided for electric distribution will be one (1) length installed on the reel of 200 feet of black 10/4 electrical cord. No connector will be installed on the end of the cord.

PORTABLE JUNCTION BOX

There will be a total of one (1) electrical junction box(es), listed for use in wet locations and provided with light to indicate power on. Each box will be designed to keep the exterior electrical components above 2.00" of standing water, protected from corrosion, and capable of being carried with a gloved hand.

There will be a cable strain relief and direct connection, no plug provided for each box. Each box will be powder coated yellow . There will be two circuits, 4 wire, with a common trip provided to each box.

Each Akron, EJBX, box will be provided with the following receptacles:

Two (2) 120 vac, 20 amp single straight blade receptacles

Two (2) 240 vac, 20 amp twist lock receptacles

THREE (3)-SECTION 75 FOOT AERIAL LADDER

CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

The ladder will be constructed to meet the requirements as described in the current NFPA 1901 standard. Some portions of this specification exceed minimum NFPA recommendations and will be considered a minimum requirement to be met.

LADDER CONSTRUCTION

To insure a high strength to weight ratio and an inherent corrosion resistance, the aerial ladder will be completely constructed of high strength aluminum.

83 of 117

The aerial ladder will consist of three (3) welded extruded aluminum telescopic ladder sections, which will extend to a minimum height of 75 feet above the ground at full extension and elevation. The measurement of height will be consistent with the current NFPA 1901 standard.

The operating range of the ladder will be -8 degrees to +76 degrees.

The ladder will be designed to provide continuous egress for firefighters and civilians from an elevated position to the ground. The egress section will be designed to maintain the rated load of the aerial device. It will be bolted on for easy replacement.

The rated horizontal reach will be 67' 9".

The measurement of horizontal reach will be consistent with the current NFPA 1901 standard.

The measurement will be from the outermost rung at full extension to the centerline of turntable rotation.

The ladder will have the capability to support a minimum of 750 pounds at the tip and 100 pound equipment allowance in the unsupported configuration, based upon 360-degree rotation, up to full extension and from -8 degrees to +76 degrees.

All side rails, rungs, handrails, uprights and K-braces will be made of structural 6061T6 alloy aluminum extrusions.

All material will be tested and certified by the material supplier.

All ladder sections will be semi-automatically welded by shielded arc welding methods using 5356 aluminum alloy welding wire.

Structural rivets or bolts will not be utilized in the ladder weldment sections.

Due to the unpredictable nature of fire ground operations, a minimum safety factor of 2.5 to 1 is desired without .25" of ice build-up.

A safety factor of 2.0 to 1 is desired for environmental loading (wind plus .25" of ice build-up).

This structural safety factor will apply to all structural aerial components including turntable and torque box stabilizer components.

Definition of the structural safety factor will be as outlined in the current NFPA 1901 standard:

DL = Dead load stress. Stress produced by the weight of the aerial device and all permanently attached components.

RL = Rated capacity stress. Stress produced by the rated capacity load of the ladder.

WL = Water load stress. Stress produced by nozzle reaction force and the weight of water in the water delivery system.

84 of 117

FY = Material yield strength. The stress at which material exhibits permanent deformation.

2.5 x DL + 2.5 x RL + 2.5 x WL equal to/less than FY

2.0 x DL + 2.0 x RL + 2.0 x WL + 2.0 x Ice Loading equal to/less than FY

The minimum NFPA specification is exceeded by providing a safety factor above 2 to 1 while flowing water, and a safety factor of 2 to 1 with ice build-up.

The stability factor or tip over safety margin will be a minimum of 1.5 to 1 as defined by the current

NFPA 1901 standard.

An independent engineering firm will verify the aerial safety factor.

Design verification will include computer modeling and analysis, and extensive strain gauge testing witnessed by an independent registered professional engineer.

Verification will include written certification from the independent engineering firm made available by the manufacturer upon request from the purchaser.

All welding of aerial components, including the aerial ladder sections, turntable, pedestal and outriggers will be performed by welders who are certified to American Welding Society Standards Dl.l, Dl.2 and

Dl.3 as outlined in the current NFPA 1901 standard.

The weldment assemblies of each production unit will be tested visually and mechanically by an ASNT certified level II non-destructive test technician to comply with the current NFPA 1901 standard.

Testing procedures will conform to the American Welding Society Standard B 1.1 0 Guide for nondestructive testing. Test methods may include dye penetrant, ultrasound and magnetic particle where applicable.

Each ladder section will consist of two (2) extruded aluminum side rails and a combination of aluminum rungs, tubular diagonals, verticals and two (2) full-length handrails.

The rungs on all sections will be K-braced for maximum lateral stability.

This K-bracing will extend to the center of each rung to minimize ladder side deflection.

The ladder rungs will be designed to eliminate the need to replace rubber-rung covers.

The rungs will be spaced on 14" centers and have an integral skid-resistant surface as outlined in the current NFPA 1901 standard.

An oval shaped rung will be utilized to provide a larger step surface at low angles and more comfortable grip at elevated positions.

The minimum design load will be 500 pounds distributed over a 3.50" wide area as outlined in the current NFPA 1901 standard.

85 of 117

Each aerial ladder section will have heat sensor labels that are preset to 300 degrees F with expiration year. The heat labels will meet the current NFPA 1901 standard.

The aerial ladder will exceed the current NFPA 1901 standard governing the minimum ladder section width and handrail height.

Section Width Height

Base Section 34.38" 26.13"

Second Section 27.38" 22.63"

Fly Section 21.38" 19.50"

TURNTABLE

The upper turntable assembly will connect the aerial ladder to the turntable bearing.

The steel structure will have a mounting position for the aerial elevation cylinders, ladder connecting pins and upper turntable operator's position.

A 39.41" diameter turntable bearing with a 3.50" drive gear face will be bolted to the top of the bearing mounting plate with 3/4" diameter Grade 8 plated bolts.

Gear teeth will be stub tooth form.

The rated overturning moment of the turntable bearing will be a minimum of 441,400 ft lbs.

The operator's turntable platform will be constructed of .50" aluminum deck plate with non-skid aluminum oxide surface.

The platform will extend 23" from the turntable control station base, with a width of approximately 18".

The rear of the platform will extend approximately 26" back from the turntable and will be approximately 38" wide at the rear.

The turntable will be modified at the passenger side to allow for easier access to the hose bed for hose loading. The portion of the turntable outboard of the rotational motor will be omitted, and the handrails will be modified as required.

The platform will be fastened by grade 8 bolts.

The turntable handrails will be a minimum 42" high and will not increase the overall travel height of the vehicle. The handrails will be constructed from 1.62" diameter extruded 6061-T6 aluminum with a slip resistant knurled surface. The handrails will be anodized to resist corrosion.

The turntable is lighted for nighttime operation with two work lights activated by the aerial master switch.

86 of 117

ELEVATION SYSTEM

Dual 5" diameter elevating cylinders will be mounted on the underside of the base section of the ladder.

Two (2) 2.00" diameter stainless steel pins will fasten the cylinder to the turntable and also fasten to the ladder.

The pins will have 125000 psi minimum yield strength and will be secured with .50" GR 8 bolt with lock nuts.

The bolts are to ensure that the pins do not walk out of the mounting brackets on the turntable and base section.

The elevating cylinders will be mounted utilizing maintenance free spherical bearings on both ends of the cylinders.

The aerial base pivot bearings will be maintenance free type bearings (no external lubrication required).

The cylinders will function only to elevate the ladder and not as a structural member to stabilize the ladder side movement.

The elevating cylinders will be provided with pilot operated check valves on the barrel and rod side of the piston to prevent movement of the ladder in case of a loss of hydraulic pressure.

Operation envelope will be -8 to 76 degrees.

The elevation system will be designed following the current NFPA 1901 standard.

The elevation hydraulic cylinders will incorporate cushions on the upper limit of travel.

The hydraulic system will have a hydraulic circuit to reduce the elevation raising speed of the aerial.

When the aerial reaches approximately 65 degrees, the circuit will be activated and the elevation speed will be reduced.

The reduce speed will minimize the whipping action of the aerial at maximum elevation.

This circuit will only be for the raise function of the aerial.

The hydraulic elevation cylinders will also serve as a locking device to hold the aerial in the stored position for road travel.

The lowering circuit for the hydraulic cylinders will have a relief valve to prevent damage to the aerial base section or boom support when the aerial is being stored.

EXTENSION/RETRACTION SYSTEM

Both power extension and retraction will be furnished and meet the requirements of the current NFPA

1901 standard.

87 of 117

Extension will be by way of two (2) extending cylinders mounted on the side of the base section of the ladder.

The cylinders will be supplied with dual pilot operated check valves on each stabilizer cylinder to hold the cylinder in position should a charged line be severed at any point in the hydraulic system.

No hoses will be permitted between a holding valves and cylinder.

CYLINDER SIZE

Bore 2.50"

Stroke 112.00"

The cylinders will operate through a block and tackle wire rope arrangement to extend and retract the ladder.

Maximum extension of the ladder is to be automatically limited by the stroke of the cylinders.

The normal operating wire rope safety factor will be 5: 1 and the stall safety factor will be 2:1 based on the breaking strength of the wire ropes.

The minimum ratio of the diameter of wire rope used to the diameter of the sheave used will be 1 to 12.

Wire ropes will be constructed of seven (7) strands over an inner wire core for increased flexibility. The wire rope will be galvanized to reduce corrosion.

All cylinder and sheave pivot pins will be made of 125,000 psi yield stainless steel material.

The cylinder and sheaved bearing are designed as not to require external lubrication (maintenance free).

LADDER CABLE SIZE

1st Section (4, 2 extend and 2 retract) 1/2" 7 x 19 galvanized cable

2nd Section (4, 2 extend and 2 retract) 5/16" 7 x 19 galvanized cable

The ladder assembly will consist of three (3) separate weldments that will extend and retract within each other.

Nylatron PAG + OIL slide pads will be utilized between each section to minimize friction.

Four (4) T type interlocking load transfer stations will enclose the slide pads.

The transfer stations will be located at the upper portion of the base and second ladder sections.

Additional guide pad are located along the aerial section to guide the ladder during retraction and extension.

88 of 117

ROTATION SYSTEM

The aerial will be supplied with a powered rotation system as outlined in the current NFPA 1901 standard.

The hydraulic rotation motor will provide continuous rotation under all rated conditions and be supplied with a brake to prevent unintentional rotation.

The swing drive brake will meet the side pull test as stated in the current NFPA 1901 standard.

A high torque hydraulic motor driven through a spring applied hydraulically released multiple disk brakes into a planetary gearbox will accomplish rotation.

The gearbox will have a minimum continuous torque rating of 60,000 in. lbs. and a minimum intermittent rating of 130,000 in. lbs.

The turntable bearing, ring gear teeth, pinion gear, planetary gearbox and output shaft will be certified by the manufacturer of the components for the application.

ROTATION INTERLOCK

A permanently installed prevention mechanism will be provided as part of the rotation system to prevent the rotation of the aerial device to the side in which the stabilizers have not been fully deployed (shortjacked).

The mechanism will allow full and unrestricted use of the aerial in the 180 degree area on the side(s) where the stabilizers have been fully deployed.

The system will also have a manual override to comply with the current NFPA 1901 standard.

AERIAL PEDESTAL

The pedestal assembly will be a welded assembly made of structural steel channel with 1.5" thick top plate and .75" bottom plates, and .375" thick integral bulkheads. The vertical member will be a .375" wall cylinder with a 28" outside diameter and will connect the rotation bearing mounting plate to the lower substructure.

The pedestal assembly will be bolted to the chassis frame with .88" diameter Grade 8 bolts, and will be utilized to mount the outrigger jacks and reservoir for the aerial hydraulic system.

LOAD CAPACITIES

The following load capacities will be established, with the stabilizers at full horizontal extension and placed in the down position, to level the truck and to relieve the weight from the tires and axles.

Capacities will be based upon full extension and 360 degree rotation.

A load chart will be visible at the operator's station. The load chart will show the recommended safe load at any condition of the aerial device's elevation and extension. The ratings in an unsupported, fully

89 of 117

extended configuration will maintain a 2.5 to 1 safety factor. A safety factor of 2.0 to 1 will be maintained with a 35 mph wind.

The aerial device will have a rated capacity of 750 lbs. consistent with the current NFPA 1901 standard.

The rated capacity will include 750 lbs. in personnel allowance and 100 lbs. for equipment mounted at the tip of the ladder.

The aerial device will be rated in multiple configurations as outlined in the current NFPA 1901 standard.

The loads in each configuration are in addition to 100 lbs of equipment mounted at the tip.

Condition #1- Tip load only, no water

flowing

Elevation

-8 to 29 degrees

30 to 39 degrees

40 to 49 degrees

50 to 59 degrees

60 to 76 degrees

Capacity in personnel

(Maximum)

3 on Fly

3 on Fly, 1 on Mid, 1 on

Base

3 on Fly, 2 on Mid, 2 on

Base

4 on Fly, 2 on Mid, 3 on

Base

4 on Fly, 3 on Mid, 3 on

Base

Condition #2 Ladder Tip loads while flowing

1000 GPM

Elevation

-8 to 29 degrees

30 to 39 degrees

40 to 49 degrees

50 to 59 degrees

60 to 76 degrees

Capacity in Personnel

(Maximum)

2 on Fly

2 on Fly, 1 on Base

2 on Fly, 1 on Mid, 1 on

Base

3 on Fly, 2 on Mid, 2 on

Base

4 on Fly, 2 on Mid, 3 on

Base

Pounds (Maximum)

750 lbs

750 lbs, 250 lbs, 250 lbs

750 lbs, 500 lbs, 500 lbs

1000 lbs, 500 lbs, 750 lbs

1000 lbs, 750 lbs, 750 lbs

Pounds (Maximum)

500 lbs

500 lbs, 250 lbs

500 lbs, 250 lbs, 250 lbs

750 lbs, 500 lbs, 500 lbs

1000 lbs, 500 lbs, 750 lbs

Reduced loads at the fly can be redistributed to the mid or base sections as needed.

The tip capacity will be reduced to zero when flowing water with the nozzle above the waterway

centerline.

90 of 117

BOOM SUPPORT

A heavy-duty boom support will be provided for support of the ladder in the travel position.

On the base section of the ladder, a stainless steel scuffplate will be provided where the ladder comes into contact with the boom support.

The boom support will be located just to the rear of the chassis cab.

AERIAL BOOM PANEL

There will be one boom panel provided on each side of the aerial ladder base section. The boom panel will be painted TBD.

The boom panels will be designed so no mounting bolts are in the face of the panel. This will keep the lettering surface free of holes.

EXTENSION INDICATOR

Extension markings and corresponding numerical indicators will be provided along each inside and outside top rail of the base section of the aerial every ten (10) feet. They will indicate various positions of extension up to full. Markings and indicators will be clearly visible to the console operator. To aid in visibility during hours of darkness, the markings and numerical indicators will be of a black reflective material.

FOLDING STEPS

One (1) set of folding steps will be provided at the tip of the ladder. An additional set of folding steps will be provided at the base of the fly section. The steps will be bright finished, non-skid with a luminescent coating that is rechargeable from any light source and can hold a charge for up to 24 hours.

Each step will incorporate an LED light to illuminate the stepping surface.

LADDER STORAGE MOUNTING BRACKET

Mounting will be provided on the right side of the aerial device for storage of a roof ladder. The bracket will be located inboard of the boom panel at the base section.

The mounting bracket will accommodate a 16' Duo-Safety 875-DR roof ladder as determined by the type of aerial device and the available space.

CONTROL STATION

A control station will be located at the rear of the apparatus in an easily accessible area.

Controls and indicator lights are clearly identified and conveniently located for ease of operation and viewing.

- Right stabilizer fully extended indicator light

- Right stabilizer planted indicator light

91 of 117

- Left stabilizer fully extended indicator light

- Left stabilizer planted indicator light

- Hydraulic emergency power switch

- Override switch for stabilizers not fully extended

- Manual overrides for aerial and stabilizers

- Main hydraulic pressure test port

- High idle switch

A water tight compartment will be provided in the left rear stabilizer body opening and contains the aerial circuit breakers, interlock components and control circuit distribution terminals.

TURNTABLE CONTROL STATION

An aerial ladder operators position will be supplied as outlined in the current edition of NFPA 1901.

The operator's position will be located on the left side of the aerial turntable.

The apparatus will be supplied with labels to warn of electrocution hazard. The control console will provide a service access door on the front and side of the console to access hydraulic and electrical connections.

The control console will be angled to face the operator with an etched panel for long service life. The console will be labeled and supplied with lights for night operation.

AERIAL LADDER CONTROL LEVERS

The control levers will be arranged as outlined in the current edition of NFPA 1901.

They will be capable of being operated independently or simultaneously.

The starting or stopping of any one control will not affect the movement speed of the other controls when they are being used simultaneously.

The first lever from the left will be the extension control (forward for extend and back for retract).

The second lever will be for rotation (forward for clockwise and back for counter clockwise).

The third handle will control elevation (forward for down and back for up).

The aerial will employ direct hydraulic controls for precise control and dependable service with minimal electrical functions.

92 of 117

A foot-operated deadman switch will be provided to prevent unintentional movement as outlined in the current edition of NFPA 1901.

Operator's control console will be provided with a hinged aluminum cover. Controls and indicator lights are clearly identified and conveniently located for ease of operation and viewing. Operator's turntable control panel will include:

- Elevation, Extension and Rotation controls

- Fast idle switch

- Panel light mounted in cover

- Rung alignment indicator light

- Tip/Tracking lights

- System pressure gauge

- Indicator/Alarm test switch

- EPU switch

- Load rating tag/decal

-"STABILIZER NOT FULLY EXTENDED" indicator light

REMOTE AERIAL CONTROL

A remote control will be provided whereby all ladder movements can be controlled at the ladder tip, in addition to the control console.

The three (3) ladder functions (extension, rotation, elevation) will be controlled individually by means of spring loaded, return to center 12-volt proportional controls.

A momentary switch at the turntable control station will activate the controls at the ladder tip.

The remote control aerial speed will be set in accordance with the current NFPA 1901 standards.

STABILIZATION

The vehicle will come equipped with an underslung out and down stabilization system. The system will consist of two (2) hydraulically operated out and down style stabilizers mounted under the frame for a low center of gravity.

The stabilizers will have a maximum spread of 16' from the centerline of the footpads when fully extended. The internal tubes will be 8.00" x 10.00" with 1/2" thick top and bottom plates and 3/8" thick sides of 100,000 psi minimum yield strength steel and will be extended out by hydraulic cylinders. The cylinders will have pilot-operated check valves with thermal relief. This will insure that the beams will

93 of 117

be in the stowed during travel. The external tubes will be 9-3/4" x 11-3/4" with 3/8" wall thickness.

The internal jack tubes will slide on permanently attached wear pads.

The extension cylinders will be totally enclosed within the extension beams. The horizontal extension cylinders will be of the trombone type to eliminate wear and potential failure of hydraulic hoses.

The stabilizers will have a tip over safety margin of 1 1/2 times its rated load in any position the aerial device can be placed as outlined in the current edition of NFPA 1901. The aerial will be able to sustain a 1 1/3 to 1 rated load on a 5 degree slope downward in the position most likely to cause overturning.

The maximum ground slope the apparatus can be set up on is 10 percent. On the 10 percent slope, the apparatus can be leveled within a 5 percent operating range with the apparatus cab facing uphill.

The cylinders will be supplied with dual pilot operated check valves on each stabilizer cylinder to hold the cylinder in the stowed or working position should a charged line be severed at any point in the hydraulic system. Stabilizers will contain safety lock valves and will require no mechanical pins to assure there will be no "leak down" of stabilizer legs.

Each stabilizer leg will have attached to the end of the leg a 1/8" thick polished stainless steel shield.

The stainless steel shield will be of the split-pan design and will be a maximum 13.00" wide to allow the extension of the stabilizer between parked cars. This plate will serve as a protective guard and a mounting surface for warning lights. The top, forward, and rear edges will be flanged back for added strength.

The stabilizer cylinders will be sized to maximize ground penetration. The lift cylinders will be mounted on the end of the stabilizer tube and will have the following dimensions:

4.00" bore

3.00" rod

21.00" stroke

The stabilizer extension cylinders will have the following dimensions

2.25" bore

1.38" rod

54.00" stroke

Each stabilizer that can be extended from the body will be supplied with a red warning light as outlined in the current edition of NFPA 1901. The stabilizers will be connected to a warning light in the cab to warn the operator if the stabilizers are deployed. A work light will be provided in the stabilizer body opening to illuminate the stabilizer and the ground. The light will automatically come on with the aerial master switch.

94 of 117

The ground contact area for each stabilizer will be a 12.00" diameter circular stainless steel disc without the auxiliary pads and 24.00" x 24.00" with lightweight composite material pads deployed. The ground pressure will not exceed 75 psi when the apparatus is fully loaded and the aerial device is carrying its rated capacity in every position. This will be accomplished with the stabilizer pads deployed, as outlined in the current edition of NFPA 1901. There will be one (1) pad located on each side of the apparatus, behind the stabilizers.

STABILIZER CONTROLS

One (1) electric solenoid valve will control the stabilizers. The control switches will be located at the rear of the apparatus, so the operator may observe the stabilizers during deployment. An audible alarm with a minimum 87 dba will also sound while the stabilizers are in motion as required by the current edition of NFPA 1901. Stabilizer deployment will be completed in less than 90 seconds.

There will be an interlock that prevents the operation of the ladder until the stabilizers are down and properly set. The interlock system will be designed to prevent aerial movement until the stabilizers are set. Additionally, the system will not permit stabilizer movement when the aerial is out of the cradle.

This requirement is outlined in the current edition of NFPA 1901. One (1) switch on each stabilizer leg, will sense when each respective leg is in firm contact with the ground. This condition will be indicated when one green indicator light for each stabilizer is on. The interlock system will have a manual override with access through a door at the turntable access stepwell of the truck.

To simplify leveling the apparatus, two color-coded level indicators will be supplied at the rear of the apparatus. One indicator will be for front to rear level and one for side-to-side level.

ALUMINUM DOOR, STABILIZER CONTROL BOX

Vertically hinged smooth aluminum doors will be provided over each stabilizer control box. The doors will be hinged inboard.

POWER TAKEOFF / HYDRAULIC PUMP

The apparatus will be equipped with a power takeoff driven by the chassis transmission and actuated by an electric shift, located inside the cab. The power takeoff which drives the hydraulic pump will meet all the requirements for the aerial unit operations. The hydraulic system will operate at a nominal 26 gallons per minute flows at pressure up to 2800 pounds per square inch. An amber indicator light will be installed on the cab instrument panel to notify the operator that the power takeoff is engaged.

An interlock will be provided that allows operation of the aerial power takeoff shift only after the chassis spring brake has been set and the chassis transmission has either been placed in the neutral position or drive position after the driveline has been disengaged from the rear axle.

HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS

All hydraulic cylinders used on the aerial device will be produced by a manufacturer that specializes in the production of hydraulic cylinders.

95 of 117

Each hydraulic cylinder will have a structural warranty of not less than five (5) years, and a seal

warranty of not less than two and one-half (2.5) years.

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

The hydraulic system will have a five year warranty.

The hydraulic plumbing will consist of hydraulic rated hoses.

The hoses transmitting hydraulic pressure will have abrasion resistant covers.

All hydraulic fittings will be plated to minimize corrosion.

The fitting will use an "O" ring seal where possible to minimize hydraulic leaks.

All pressure carrying hydraulic hoses will have a 4:1 safety rating based on burst pressure.

An interlock will be provided that prevents activation of the hydraulic pump until the transmission is placed in neutral and the parking brake set as outlined in the current NFPA 1901 standard.

The hydraulic system will be of the load sense design and incorporate features to minimize heat build up and provide smooth control of the aerial ladder.

The system will meet the performance requirement in the current NFPA 1901 standard, which requires adequate cooling less than 2 l/2 hours of operations.

All hydraulic components that are non-sealing whose failure could result in the movement of the aerial will comply with the current NFPA 1901 standard and have burst strength of 4:1.

Dynamic sealing components whose failure could cause aerial movement will have a margin of 2 to 1 on maximum operating pressure per the current NFPA 1901 standard.

All hydraulic hoses, tubes and connections will have minimum burst strength of 3:1 per the current

NFPA 1901 standard.

A hydraulic oil pressure gauge will be supplied at the base control location per the current NFPA 1901 standard.

A hydraulic oil dipstick gauge with 100-mesh fill strainer will be supplied at the rear of the unit for easy fluid level verification.

A chassis-mounted positive displacement piston pump for consistent pressure and rapid response will supply hydraulic power for all aerial operations.

The positive displacement piston pump will be able to supply 26 gallons per minute at a maximum pressure of 2800 psi.

96 of 117

The system will operate between 500 and 2800 psi with flow controls to protect hydraulic components and incorporate a relief valve set at 2950 psi to prevent over pressurization.

The hydraulic pump will be solely dedicated to aerial operations.

The hydraulic system will consist of a 40-gallon reservoir mounted to the pedestal and plumbed to the hydraulic pump.

The tank will be supplied with a removable top clean-out cover to access the inside of the tank.

There will be plumbing for a supply and return line and a tank drain on the reservoir.

The hydraulic pump suction line will have a shut off valve for pump servicing.

The hydraulic oil reservoir will be labeled per the current NFPA 1901 standard.

The hydraulic system will use multi-weight, SAE grade oil. ISO grade will be based on geographical location.

The oil will be pre-filtered before it is installed into the reservoir.

Oil samples taken from the oil diagnostic test ports must meet or exceed the hydraulic rating of 18/15/13 per ISO 4406:1999 before delivery.

The oil filters will be mounted above the hydraulic reservoir oil level to eliminate oil loss during filter change.

The system will incorporate the following filters to provide dependable service:

- Separate magnet (not on strainer)

- Reservoir suction strainer: 125 mesh

- Pressure filter with by-pass indicator: 2/3/5 micron, Beta rating of 2/20/75 or better

- Return filter with by-pass indicator: 2/3/5 micron, Beta rating of 2/20/75 or better

- Desiccant breather filter: Water capacity 13 fluid oz, 2 micron rating

The aerial hydraulic system will be designed in such a manner that a hydraulic pump failure or line rupture will not allow the aerial or outriggers to lose position.

Hydraulic holding valves will be mounted directly on cylinders.

To insure reliable performance of holding valves, no hoses will be permitted between a holding valve and cylinder.

97 of 117

The aerial will incorporate the use of trombone steel tubes inside the stabilizer beams to eliminate hydraulic hose wear and leaks.

Hydraulic power to the ladder will be transferred from the pedestal by a hydraulic swivel.

EMERGENCY PUMP

The hydraulic system will be designed with an auxiliary power unit meeting the guidelines of the current

NFPA 1901 standard.

The auxiliary power unit will be a 12-volt pump connected to the chassis electrical system.

The pump will provide operation at reduced speeds to store the aerial device and outriggers for road transportation.

Self-centering switches will be provided at the turntable and each stabilizer control station to activate the system.

The system will be designed to provide a minimum of 30 minutes of hydraulic power to operate functions.

HYDRAULIC SWIVEL

The aerial ladder will be equipped with a five (5) port, high pressure hydraulic swivel which will connect the hydraulic lines from the hydraulic pump and reservoir through the rotation point to the aerial control bank. The hydraulic swivel will allow for 360 degree continuous rotation of the aerial.

ELECTRIC SWIVEL

The ladder will be equipped with an electric swivel to allow 360 degrees rotation of the aerial while connecting all electrical circuits through the rotation point. A minimum of 28 collector rings will be provided that are capable of supplying 20 amp continuous service. All collector rings will be enclosed and protected with desiccant plugs against condensation and corrosion. No oil or silicone will be used.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

The aerial electrical system will be designed and manufactured in such a way that the power and signal protection and control compartments will contain circuit protection devices and power control devices.

The power and signal protection and control components will be protected against corrosion, excessive heat, excessive vibration, physical damage and water spray.

The electrical system will be designed and manufactured in such a way that all of the serviceable components will be readily accessible.

The electrical system will be designed and manufactured so that circuit protection devices will be utilized to protect each circuit.

98 of 117

All circuit protection devices will be sized to prevent wire and component damage when subjected to extreme current overload.

The electrical system will be designed and manufactured so that general protection circuit breakers will be Type-I automatic reset (continuously resetting) or Type-II (manual resetting) and conform to SAE

J553 or J258. When required, automotive type fuses conforming to SAE J554, J1284, J1888 or J2077 will be utilized to protect electronic equipment.

The electrical system will be designed and manufactured so that power control relays and solenoids, when utilized, will have a direct current (dc) rating of 125 percent of the maximum current for which the circuit is protected.

The aerial electrical system will be designed and manufactured utilizing toggle switches that are certified for the outside conditions that fire apparatus experience and meet military specifications. No rocker style switches are allowed for outside applications.

The aerial electrical system will be designed and manufactured in such a way that all wiring is protected through conduit or loom.

The aerial electrical system will be designed and manufactured in such a way that all wiring harnesses are properly supported to eliminate harness damage through rubbing.

The aerial electrical system will be designed and manufactured in such a way that all connectors utilized in the system will be of a waterproof design.

The aerial electrical system will be designed and manufactured in such a way that all connectors, except for connections to vendor supplied components, will incorporate solid, plated connecting pins.

The aerial electrical system will be designed and manufactured in such a way that a mechanical rocker proximity switch and light are incorporated into the boom support.

The aerial electrical system will be designed and manufactured so that the aerial master and aerial PTO can be engaged after the water pump has been engaged, without having to bring the RPM back to idle.

All switches will meet MIL-SPEC MIL-S-3950 specifications and will have the following features:

Toggle switches with flush screw terminals.

Environmentally sealed

Positive detent action

The aerial electrical system will be designed with standard cabling to the tip of the aerial consisting of the following:

One 12/8 cable.

99 of 117

One 16/20 cable.

DRIVER SIDE STABILIZER PANEL

A fuse and relay panel located behind the driver side stabilizer.

NEMA 6x rated weatherproof enclosure.

Relays and fuses for aerial and stabilizer interlocks and control switches.

TURNTABLE

The turntable will be lighted for nighttime operation with 2 work lights activated by the aerial master switch.

A footswitch will be located at the turntable console to allow hydraulic flow to the aerial device. A cover to prevent accidental activation of the switch will protect the footswitch. Activation of the footswitch is necessary for aerial device operation.

TURNTABLE CONSOLE

The following switches and indicator lights will be standard on the turntable console:

High Idle On/Off Switch

Tip/Tracking Lights Switch

Indicator And Alarm Test Switch

Emergency Hydraulic Power Switch

Stabilizers Not Fully Extended Amber Indicator Light

Rung Alignment Green Indicator Light

A turntable console will be lighted for nighttime operation with 1 work light activated by the aerial master switch.

A fuse panel located in the turntable console with the following features:

Splash proof enclosure.

TURNTABLE OVERRIDE CONTROLS

Illumination will be provided for the override controls located within the compartment on the turntable console. The light will activate when the aerial master switch is active and the switch on the light is activated.

100 of 117

MASTER OVERRIDE CONTROLS

An emergency power switch will be located in the driver side turntable step well. The switch will activate the emergency power unit and allow control of the aerial or stabilizers based on the direction the switch is toggled.

A work light will be provided to illuminate the master override controls when the battery switch is active and the master override door is open.

BOOM SUPPORT

A Turck relay proximity sensor will be provided on the boom support to detect if the aerial device is fully stowed within the boom support.

TRACKING LIGHTS

There will be two (2) Unity, Model AG-S-P46SLC, 12-volt LED spot lights furnished. Power to the lights will be controlled by a master on/off switch at the turntable control operator's position. Individual switches will also be provided on each light for on/off.

The two (2) "tracking lights" will be mounted on the base section of the ladder, one (1) on each side.

LIGHTING ON AERIAL LADDER

There will be TecNiq, Model D02, LED rung lighting provided on both sides of the aerial ladder base, mid, and fly sections. The lighting will be located adjacent to the ladder rungs along the lower rail of the ladder sections and will run the length of the ladder section.

The color of the sections will be:

The base section of the ladder to be red.

The mid section of the ladder to be red.

The fly section of the ladder to be white.

The LED rung lighting will be activated when a switch at the turntable operator's panel is activated through the master battery switch.

The lights may be load managed when the parking brake is applied.

STABILIZER WARNING LIGHTS

There will be two (2) Whelen, Model 60*02F*R, flashing LED warning lights installed on the stabilizer cover panel, one (1) each side.

The color of these lights will be red Super LED/clear lens each side.

These lights will be mounted with a flange.

These warning lights will be activated by the same switch as the side warning lights.

101 of 117

STABILIZER BEAM WARNING LIGHTS

Two (2) 4.00" diameter red LED flashing lights will be mounted on each stabilizer, one (1) facing forward and one (1) facing rearward. The lights will be Grote Supernova 40 series LED lights. The lights will be recessed in the horizontal beam of the stabilizer. These warning lights will be activated with the aerial master switch.

120-VOLT RECEPTACLE AT TIP

A 120-volt, 15 amp, three (3)-prong household duplex receptacle with weatherproof cover will be provided at the tip of the aerial device.

120 VOLT LIGHTING AT TIP

There will be Two (2) Whelen, Model PFP2AC, white 120 volt LED floodlight(s) installed in white

Whelen, Model PBA206, bail bracket(s) located on the tip of the ladder, on the driver and passenger side mounted vertically and allowed to swivel.

There will be a reinforcement plate provided for the base of the bail bracket to hold the light to the special mounting bracket.

Light(s) will be switched at the driver and passenger side.

2-WAY AERIAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

There will be a Fire Research model ICA900-112 two-way intercom system provided. The control module will be located on the turntable operator console, provided there is room, and have an LED volume display and push-button volume control.

A hands free module will be located at the aerial tip or platform and constantly transmit to the other module unless the control module push-to-talk button is pressed.

Each intercom unit will be weatherproof.

RAISED AERIAL PEDESTAL

The aerial pedestal will be raised to accommodate the height of the cab.

MANSAVER™ BARS, AERIAL TURNTABLE

ManSaver bars will be installed at the aerial turntable.

WATER SYSTEM

A waterway system will be provided consisting of the following components and features:

A 5.00" pipe will be connected to the water supply on one end and to a 4.00" internal diameter water swivel at the rotation point of the turntable. The water swivel will permit 360 degree continuous rotation of the aerial device.

The 4.00" waterway swivel is to be routed through the rotation point swivel up to the heel pin swivel.

The heel pin swivel will allow the water to flow to the ladder pipe while elevating the aerial ladder from

102 of 117

-5 degrees to 75 degrees. The heel pivot pin is not integral with the waterway swivel at any point. The design of the waterway will allow complete servicing of the waterway swivel without disturbing the heel pivot pin.

The integral telescopic water system will consist of a 4.50" diameter tube in the base section, a 4.00" diameter tube in the mid-section and a 3.50" diameter tube in the fly section. The telescopic waterway will be constructed of anodized aluminum pipe.

The rotational torque will have adequate power to rotate the ladder into a full 1500 gallon per minute water stream directed at 90 degrees to the side while maintaining the 500 pound tip load.

The aerial will be capable of discharging up to 1500 gallons per minute at 100 pounds per square inch parallel to the ladder and 90 degrees to each side of center while maintaining the 500 pound tip load.

The safety factor will be 2.5:1 while flowing up to 1000 gallons per minute at 100 pounds per square inch and 2:1 while flowing between 1000 and 1500 gallons per minute at 100 pounds per square inch.

An adjustable pressure relief valve will be furnished to protect the aerial waterway from a pressure surge.

A 1.50" drain valve will be located at the lowest point of the waterway system.

WATERWAY SEALS

The waterway seals will be of type-B PolyPak design, composed of nitroxile seal and a nitrile wiper, which together offer maximum stability and extrusion resistance on the waterway. The seal will be capable of withstanding pressures up to 2000 psi, temperatures in excess of 250 degrees Fahrenheit and have resistance to all foam generating solutions. The seals will be internally lubricated.

The waterway seals will have automatic centering guides constructed of synthetic thermalpolymer. The guides will provide positive centering of the extendible sections within each other and the base section to insure longer service life and smoother operation.

AERIAL MONITOR

An Akron, model 3480 monitor with stow and deploy will be provided at the tip with a Akron 1500 gpm

Model 5178.

The monitor's functions will be controlled electrically from two (2) separate locations. One (1) control will be located at the control console and the other at the ladder tip.

There will be a courtesy light at the tip of the aerial to illuminate the controls.

Vertical travel of this monitor will be -45 degrees to 90 degrees. Horizontal rotation will be 90 degrees to each side of the center line of the aerial device.

103 of 117

FLOW METER (AERIAL WATERWAY)

A Fire Research Corporation (FRC), Model DF430, digital flow indicator with a four (4) digit LED display will be provided for the aerial waterway at the turntable control station.

The display will have a flow totalizer, programmable high and low flow warnings, and automatically adjust LED brightness for day/night viewing.

REAR INLET

A 5.00" NST inlet to the aerial waterway will be provided at the rear of the apparatus. The inlet will have 5.00" aluminum plumbing. It will be furnished with a 5.00" chrome plated adapter and a 5.00" chrome plated, long handle cap.

WATERWAY LOCKING SYSTEM

The aerial ladder waterway monitor will be capable of being positioned at either the fly section or at the next lower section of the ladder.

The monitor location will be changeable by the use of a single handle, located at the side of the ladder.

The handle, attached to a cam bracket, will simply be moved forward to lock the monitor at the fly section and back to lock it to the previous section.

There will be no pins to remove and reinstall.

The monitor will be operational at all times, regardless of its position, without connecting or disconnecting electrical lines.

TOOLS

The following tools will be provided for retorquing of all specified bolts as recommended by the manufacturer:

- Torque Wrench

- All Required Extensions, Sockets and Adapters

- 4-to-1 Multiplier

MANUALS

Two (2) operator maintenance manuals and two (2) wiring diagrams pertaining to the aerial device will be provided with the apparatus at time of pick-up.

INITIAL INSTRUCTION

On initial delivery of the fire apparatus, the contractor will supply a qualified representative to demonstrate the apparatus and provide initial instruction to the fire department regarding the operation, care, and maintenance of the apparatus for a period of three (3) days.

104 of 117

LOOSE EQUIPMENT

The following equipment will be furnished with the completed unit:

- One (1) bag of chrome, stainless steel, or cadmium plated screws, nuts, bolts and washers, as used in the construction of the unit.

NFPA REQUIRED LOOSE EQUIPMENT, PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT

The following loose equipment as outlined in NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, section 9.8.2 and 9.8.3 will be provided by the fire department. All loose equipment will be installed on the apparatus before placed in emergency service, unless the fire department waives NFPA section 4.21.

800 ft (240 m) of 2.50" (65 mm) or larger fire hose, in any combination.

400 ft (120 m) of 1.50" (38 mm), 1.75" (45 mm), or 2.00" (52 mm) fire hose, in any combination.

One (1) handline nozzle, 200 gpm (750 L/min) minimum.

Two (2) handline nozzles, 95 gpm (360 L/min) minimum.

One (1) playpipe with shutoff and 1.00" (25 mm), 1.125" (29 mm), and 1.25" (32 mm) tips.

One (1) SCBA complying with NFPA 1981, Standard on Open-Circuit Self-Contained

Breathing Apparatus for Fire and Emergency Services, for each assigned seating position, but not fewer than four (4), mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus or stored in containers supplied by the SCBA manufacturer.

One (1) spare SCBA cylinder for each SCBA carried, each mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus or stored in a specially designed storage space(s).

One (1) first aid kit.

Four (4) salvage covers, each a minimum size of 12 ft × 14 ft (3.6 m × 5.5 m).

Four (4) combination spanner wrenches mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus.

Two (2) hydrant wrenches mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus.

One (1) double female 2.50" (65 mm) adapter with National Hose threads, mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus.

One (1) double male 2.50" (65 mm) adapter with National Hose threads, mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus.

One (1) rubber mallet, for use on suction hose connections, mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus.

Four (4) ladder belts meeting the requirements of NFPA 1983, Standard on Fire Service Life

Safety Rope and System Components.

One (1) 150 ft (45 m) light-use life safety rope meeting the requirements of NFPA 1983,

Standard on Fire Service Life Safety Rope and System Components.

One (1) 150 ft (45 m) general-use life safety rope meeting the requirements of NFPA 1983,

Standard on Fire Service Life Safety Rope and System Components.

105 of 117

One (1) traffic vest for each seating position, each vest to comply with ANSI/ISEA 207,

Standard for High Visibility Public Safety Vests, and have a five-point breakaway feature that includes two (2) at the shoulders, two (2) at the sides, and one (1) at the front.

Five (5) fluorescent orange traffic cones not less than 28.00" (711 mm) in height, each equipped with a 6.00" (152 mm) retro-reflective white band no more than 4.00" (152 mm) from the top of the cone, and an additional 4.00" (102 mm) retro-reflective white band 2.00" (51 mm) below the

6.00" (152 mm) band.

Five (5) illuminated warning devices such as highway flares, unless the five (5) fluorescent orange traffic cones have illuminating capabilities.

One (1) automatic external defibrillator (AED).

If the supply hose carried does not use sexless couplings, an additional double female adapter and double male adapter, sized to fit the supply hose carried, will be carried mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus.

If none of the pump intakes are valved, a hose appliance that is equipped with one or more gated intakes with female swivel connection(s) compatible with the supply hose used on one side and a swivel connection with pump intake threads on the other side will be carried. Any intake connection larger than 3.00" (75 mm) will include a pressure relief device that meets the requirements of 16.6.6.

If the apparatus does not have a 2.50" National Hose (NH) intake, an adapter from 2.50" NH female to a pump intake will be carried, mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus if not already mounted directly to the intake.

If the supply hose carried has other than 2.50" National Hose (NH) threads, adapters will be carried to allow feeding the supply hose from a 2.50" NH thread male discharge and to allow the hose to connect to a 2.50" NH female intake, mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus if not already mounted directly to the discharge or intake.

SOFT SUCTION HOSE

There will be a 15' length of 6.00" soft suction hose provided with a 6.00" long handle swivel coupling on one (1) end and a 4.50" long handle swivel coupling on the other.

DRY CHEMICAL EXTINGUISHER PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT

NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, section 9.8.3 requires one (1) approved dry chemical portable fire extinguisher with a minimum 80-B:C rating mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus.

The extinguisher is not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide and mount the extinguisher.

WATER EXTINGUISHER PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT

NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, section 9.8.3 requires one (1) 2.5 gallon or larger water extinguisher mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus.

106 of 117

The extinguisher is not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide and mount the extinguisher.

AXE, FLATHEAD, PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT

NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, Section 9.8.3 requires one (1) flathead axe mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus.

The axe is not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide and mount the axe.

AXE, PICKHEAD, PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT

NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, Section 9.8.3 requires one (1) pickhead axe mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus.

The axe is not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide and mount the axe.

PAINT - BODY PAINTED TO MATCH CAB

The exterior custom cab and body painting procedure will consist of a seven (7) step finishing process as follows:

1. Manual Surface Preparation - All exposed metal surfaces on the custom cab and body will be thoroughly cleaned and prepared for painting. Imperfections on the exterior surfaces will be removed and sanded to a smooth finish. Exterior seams will be sealed before painting. Exterior surfaces that will not be painted include; chrome plating, polished stainless steel, anodized aluminum and bright aluminum treadplate.

2. Chemical Cleaning and Pretreatment - All surfaces will be chemically cleaned to remove dirt, oil, grease, and metal oxides to ensure the subsequent coatings bond well. The aluminum surfaces will be properly cleaned and treated using a high pressure, high temperature 4 step Acid

Etch process. The steel and stainless surfaces will be properly cleaned and treated using a high temperature 3 step process specifically designed for steel or stainless. The chemical treatment converts the metal surface to a passive condition to help prevent corrosion. A final pure water rinse will be applied to all metal surfaces.

3. Surfacer Primer - The Surfacer Primer will be applied to a chemically treated metal surface to provide a strong corrosion protective basecoat. A minimum thickness of 2 mils of Surfacer

Primer is applied to surfaces that require a Critical aesthetic finish. The Surfacer Primer is a two-component high solids urethane that has excellent sanding properties and an extra smooth finish when sanded.

4. Finish Sanding - The Surfacer Primer will be sanded with a fine grit abrasive to achieve an ultrasmooth finish. This sanding process is critical to produce the smooth mirror like finish in the topcoat.

5. Sealer Primer - The Sealer Primer is applied prior to the Basecoat in all areas that have not been previously primed with the Surfacer Primer. The Sealer Primer is a two-component high solids urethane that goes on smooth and provides excellent gloss hold out when topcoated.

107 of 117

6. Basecoat Paint - Two coats of a high performance, two component high solids polyurethane basecoat will be applied. The Basecoat will be applied to a thickness that will achieve the proper color match. The Basecoat will be used in conjunction with a urethane clear coat to provide protection from the environment.

7. Clear Coat - Two (2) coats of Clear Coat will be applied over the Basecoat color. The Clear

Coat is a two-component high solids urethane that provides superior gloss and durability to the exterior surfaces. Lap style and roll-up doors will be Clear Coated to match the body. Paint warranty for the roll-up doors will be provided by the roll-up door manufacture.

Specifications are written to define cyclic corrosion testing, physical strengths, durability and minimum appearance requirements must be met in order for an exterior paint finish to be considered acceptable as a Pierce quality finish.

Each batch of basecoat color is checked for a proper match before painting of the cab and the body.

After the cab and body are painted, the color is verified again to make sure that it matches the color standard. Electronic color measuring equipment is used to compare the color sample to the color standard entered into the computer. Color specifications are used to determine the color match. A Delta

E reading is used to determine a good color match within each family color.

All removable items such as brackets, compartment doors, door hinges, and trim will be removed and separately if required, to ensure paint behind all mounted items. Body assemblies that cannot be finish painted after assembly will be finish painted before assembly.

The cab will be two-tone, with the upper section painted #101 black and lower section of the cab and body painted #106 dark red.

PAINT - ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT

Contractor will meet or exceed all current State regulations concerning paint operations. Pollution control will include measures to protect the atmosphere, water and soil. Controls will include the following conditions:

Topcoats and primers will be chrome and lead free.

Metal treatment chemicals will be chrome free. The wastewater generated in the metal treatment process will be treated on-site to remove any other heavy metals.

Particulate emission collection from sanding operations will have a 99.99% efficiency factor.

Particulate emissions from painting operations will be collected by a dry filter or water wash process. If the dry filter is used, it will have an efficiency rating of 98.00%. Water wash systems will be 99.97% efficient

Water from water wash booths will be reused. Solids will be removed on a continual basis to keep the water clean.

Paint wastes are disposed of in an environmentally safe manner.

Empty metal paint containers will be to recover the metal.

108 of 117

Solvents used in clean-up operations will be recycled on-site or sent off-site for distillation and returned for reuse.

Additionally, the finished apparatus will not be manufactured with or contain products that have ozone depleting substances. Contractor will, upon demand, present evidence that the manufacturing facility meets the above conditions and that it is in compliance with his State EPA rules and regulations.

PAINT CHASSIS FRAME ASSEMBLY

The chassis frame assembly will be painted black before the installation of the cab and body, and before installation of the engine and transmission assembly, air brake lines, electrical wire harnesses, etc.

Components that are included with the chassis frame assembly that will be painted are:

Frame rails

Frame liners

Cross members

Axles

Suspensions

Steering gear

Battery boxes

Bumper extension weldment

Frame extensions

Body mounting angles

Rear Body support substructure (front and rear)

Pump house substructure

Air tanks

Fuel tank

Castings

Individual piece parts used in chassis and body assembly

Components treated with epoxy E-coat protection prior to paint:

Two (2) C-channel frame rails

Two (2) frame liners

The E-coat process will meet the technical properties shown.

PAINT, FRONT WHEELS

All wheel surfaces, inside and outside, will be provided with powder coat paint #101 black.

PAINT, REAR WHEELS

All wheel surfaces, inside and outside, will be provided with powder coat paint #101 black.

109 of 117

COMPARTMENT INTERIOR PAINT

The compartment interior will be painted with a gray spatter finish for ease of cleaning and to make it easier to touch up scratches and nicks.

AERIAL DEVICE PAINT COLOR

All aerial device structural components above the rotation point that are not chrome plated or stainless steel will be painted.

All buy out components, such as monitor, nozzle, gauges, etc. will be supplied as received from the vendor.

All areas to be painted will be sanded to remove any metal flakes and smooth any rough surfaces.

All ladder surfaces to be painted will be phosphatized to remove metal impurities, aid paint adhesion and inhibit rust.

The components will be prime painted with an epoxy primer and finished painted with a durable, high quality black 101.

The support structure, rotation motor, components below the rotation point, and the stabilizers will be painted high gloss black.

The tip of the ladder will be painted a contrasting color for high visibility.

REFLECTIVE BAND

A 6.00" black reflective band will be provided across the front of the vehicle and along the sides of the body.

The reflective band provided on the cab face will be at the headlight level.

CHEVRON STRIPING, REAR

There will be alternating chevron striping located on the rear-facing vertical surface of the apparatus.

Covered surfaces will include the rear wall and aluminum doors. Roll up doors and stainless steel access doors will not be covered in chevron.

The colors will be red and fluorescent yellow green diamond grade.

Each stripe will be 6.00" in width.

This will meet the requirements of NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, which states that 50% of the rear surface will be covered with chevron striping.

REFLECTIVE STRIPE ON STABILIZERS

There will be a 4.00" wide black reflective stripe provided on the forward and rear facing side of all aerial stabilizers.

110 of 117

REFLECTIVE STRIPE, CAB DOORS

A 6.00" x 16.00" black reflective stripe will be provided across the interior of each cab door. The stripe will be located approximately 1.00" up from the bottom, on the door panel.

This stripe will meet the NFPA 1901 requirement.

CAB FACE STRIPE

There will be a printed effect gold leaf stripe provided around each of the two (2) warning light bezels on the front of the cab.

CAB STRIPE

There shall be a printed effect gold leaf stripe located just below the window line on each side of the cab.

LETTERING

The lettering will be totally encapsulated between two (2) layers of clear vinyl.

LETTERING

Forty-one (41) to sixty (60) genuine gold leaf lettering, 3.00" high, with outline and shade will be provided.

LETTERING/NUMERALS ON CAB GRILLE

Two (2) painted letters/numerals with outline, as determined by the fire department, will be provided on the cab grille.

EMBLEM

There will be four (4) pair of "stop sign" emblems 12.00" high x 12.00" wide installed on the inside of each cab door to be seen when door is open. The emblem will have a red reflective background with white lettering. Emblems will be installed on a smooth surface.

MALTESE CROSS INSTALLATION

There will be one (1) pair of maltese crosses, comprised of printed effect gold leaf material, provided and installed on the front cab doors.

FIRE APPARATUS PARTS CD MANUAL

There will be two (2) custom parts manuals for the complete fire apparatus provided in CD format with the completed unit.

The manuals will contain the following:

Job number

Part numbers with full descriptions

Table of contents

Parts section sorted in functional groups reflecting a major system, component, or assembly

111 of 117

Parts section sorted in alphabetical order

Instructions on how to locate parts

The manuals will be specifically written for the chassis and body model being purchased. It will not be a generic manual for a multitude of different chassis and bodies.

SERVICE PARTS INTERNET SITE

The service parts information included in these manuals are also available on the factory website. The website offers additional functions and features not contained in this manual, such as digital photographs and line drawings of select items. The website also features electronic search tools to assist in locating parts quickly.

CHASSIS SERVICE CD MANUALS

There will be two (2) CD format chassis service manuals containing parts and service information on major components provided with the completed unit.

The manual will contain the following sections:

Job number

Table of contents

Troubleshooting

Front Axle/Suspension

Brakes

EngineTires

Wheels

Cab

Electrical, DC

Air Systems

Plumbing

Appendix

The manual will be specifically written for the chassis model being purchased. It will not be a generic manual for a multitude of different chassis and bodies.

CHASSIS OPERATION CD MANUALS

There will be two (2) CD format chassis operation manuals provided.

ONE (1) YEAR MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP

A Pierce basic apparatus limited warranty certificate, WA0008, is included with this proposal.

ENGINE WARRANTY

A Detroit Diesel five (5) year limited engine warranty will be provided. A limited warranty certificate,

WA0180, is included with this proposal.

112 of 117

STEERING GEAR WARRANTY

A Sheppard three (3) year limited steering gear warranty shall be provided. A copy of the warranty certificate shall be submitted with the bid package.

FIFTY (50) YEAR STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY

The Pierce custom chassis frame limited warranty certificate, WA0013, is included with this proposal.

FRONT AXLE THREE (3) YEAR MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP WARRANTY

The Pierce TAK-4 suspension limited warranty certificate, WA0050, is included with this proposal.

REAR AXLE TWO (2) YEAR MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP WARRANTY

A Meritor axle limited warranty certificate, WA0046, is included with this proposal.

ABS BRAKE SYSTEM THREE (3) YEAR MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP WARRANTY

A Meritor Wabco™ABS brake system limited warranty certificate, WA0232, is included with this proposal.

TEN (10) YEAR STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY

The Pierce custom cab limited warranty certificate, WA0012, is included with this proposal.

TEN (10) YEAR PRO-RATED PAINT AND CORROSION

A Pierce cab limited pro-rated paint warranty certificate, WA0055, is included with this proposal.

FIVE (5) YEAR MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP

The Pierce Command Zone electronics limited warranty certificate, WA0014, is included with this proposal.

.

CAMERA SYSTEM WARRANTY

A Pierce fifty four (54) month warranty will be provided for the camera system.

COMPARTMENT LIGHT WARRANTY

A ten (10) year material and workmanship limited warranty will be provided for the Pierce 12 volt DC

LED strip lights. The warranty will cover the LED strip lights to be free from defects in material and workmanship that would arise under normal use.

A copy of the warranty certificate will be submitted with the bid package (No Exception).

TRANSMISSION WARRANTY

The transmission will have a five (5) year/unlimited mileage warranty covering 100 percent parts and labor. The warranty will be provided by Allison Transmission.

113 of 117

Note: The transmission cooler is not covered under any extended warranty you may be getting on your

Allison Transmission. Please review your Allison Transmission warranty for coverage limitations.

TRANSMISSION COOLER WARRANTY

The transmission cooler will carry a five (5) year parts and labor warranty (exclusive to the transmission cooler). In addition, a collateral damage warranty will also be in effect for the first three (3) years of the warranty coverage and will not exceed $10,000 per occurrence. A copy of the warranty certificate will be submitted with the bid package.

WATER TANK WARRANTY

A UPF poly water tank limited warranty certificate, WA0195, is included with this proposal.

TEN (10) YEAR STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY

The Pierce apparatus body limited warranty certificate, WA0009, is included with this proposal.

ROLL UP DOOR MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP WARRANTY

A Gortite roll-up door limited warranty will be provided. The mechanical components of the roll-up door will be warranted against defects in material and workmanship for the lifetime of the vehicle. A

six (6) year limited warranty will be provided on painted and satin roll up doors.

The limited warranty certificate, WA0190, is included with this proposal.

PUMP WARRANTY

A Waterous pump limited warranty certificate, WA0225, is included with this proposal.

TEN (10) YEAR PUMP PLUMBING WARRANTY

The Pierce apparatus plumbing limited warranty certificate, WA0035, is included with this proposal.

TWENTY (20) YEAR AERIAL DEVICE STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY WARRANTY

The Pierce device limited warranty certificate, WA0052, is included with this proposal.

AERIAL SWIVEL WARRANTY

An Amity five (5) year limited swivel warranty will be provided. A copy of the warranty certificate will be submitted with the bid package.

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM COMPONENTS WARRANTY

Aerial hydraulic system components will be provided with a five (5) year material and workmanship limited warranty.

HYDRAULIC SEAL WARRANTY

Aerial hydraulic seals will be provided with a three (3) year material and workmanship limited warranty.

A copy of the warranty certificates will be submitted with the bid package.

114 of 117

AERIAL WATERWAY WARRANTY

An Amity ten (10) year limited waterway warranty will be provided. A copy of the warranty certificate will be submitted with the bid package.

FOUR (4) YEAR PRO-RATED PAINT AND CORROSION

A Pierce aerial device limited pro-rated paint warranty certificate, WA0047, is included with this proposal.

FIVE (5) YEAR GENERATOR WARRANTY

There will be a 5 year limited warranty provided for Onan commercial mobile generators.

TEN (10) YEAR PRO-RATED PAINT AND CORROSION

A Pierce body limited pro-rated paint warranty certificate, WA0057, is included with this proposal.

THREE (3) YEAR MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP

The Pierce Goldstar gold leaf lamination limited warranty limited warranty certificate, WA0018, is included with this proposal.

VEHICLE STABILITY CERTIFICATION

The fire apparatus manufacturer will provide a certification stating the apparatus complies with NFPA

1901, current edition, section 4.13, Vehicle Stability. The certification will be provided at the time of bid.

ENGINE INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION

The fire apparatus manufacturer will provide a certification, along with a letter from the engine manufacturer stating they approve of the engine installation in the bidder's chassis. The certification will be provided at the time of bid.

POWER STEERING CERTIFICATION

The fire apparatus manufacturer will provide a certification stating the power steering system as installed meets the requirements of the component supplier. The certification will be provided at the time of bid.

CAB INTEGRITY CERTIFICATION

Pierce manufacturing will provide a cab crash test certification with this proposal. The certification states that the cab must meet or exceed the requirements below:

- European Occupant Protection Standard ECE Regulation No.29

- SAE J2422 Cab Roof Strength Evaluation - Quasi-Static Loading Heavy Trucks

- SAE J2420 COE Frontal Strength Evaluation - Dynamic Loading Heavy Trucks

- Roof Crush

115 of 117

The cab will be subjected to a roof crush force of 100,000 lb. This value will be 450 percent of the ECE

29 criteria, which must be equivalent to the front axle rating up to a maximum of ten (10) metric tons.

- Side Impact

The cab will be subjected to dynamic preload with a 13,275-lb moving barrier is slammed into the side of the cab at 5.50 mph, striking with an impact of 13,000 ft-lb of energy. This test will closely represent the forces a cab will see in a rollover incident.

- Frontal Impact

The cab will withstand a frontal force produced from 65,200 ft-lb of energy using a swing-bob type platen.

The same cab will withstand all tests without any measurable intrusion into the survival space of the occupant area.

CAB DOOR DURABILITY CERTIFICATION

Robust cab doors help protect occupants. Cab doors will survive a 200,000 cycle door slam test where the slamming force exceeds 20 G's of deceleration. The bidder will certify that the sample doors similar to those provided on the apparatus have been tested and have met these criteria without structural damage, latch malfunction, or significant component wear.

WINDSHIELD WIPER DURABILITY CERTIFICATION

Visibility during inclement weather is essential to safe apparatus performance. Windshield wipers will survive a 3 million cycle durability test in accordance with section 6.2 of SAE J198 Windshield Wiper

Systems - Trucks, Buses and Multipurpose Vehicles. The bidder will certify that the wiper system design has been tested and that the wiper system has met these criteria.

SEAT BELT ANCHOR STRENGTH

Seat belt attachment strength is regulated by Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards and should be validated through testing. Each seat belt anchor design will withstand 3000 lb of pull on both the lap and shoulder belt in accordance with FMVSS 571.210 Seat Belt Assembly Anchorages. The bidder will certify that each anchor design was pull tested to the required force and met the appropriate criteria.

SEAT MOUNTING STRENGTH

Seat attachment strength is regulated by Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards and should be validated through testing. Each seat mounting design will be tested to withstand 20 G's of force in accordance with FMVSS 571.207 Seating Systems. The bidder will certify that each seat mount and cab structure design was pull tested to the required force and met the appropriate criteria.

CAB DEFROSTER CERTIFICATION

Visibility during inclement weather is essential to safe apparatus performance. The defroster system will clear the required windshield zones in accordance with SAE J381 Windshield Defrosting Systems

116 of 117

Test Procedure And Performance Requirements - Trucks, Buses, And Multipurpose Vehicles. The bidder will certify that the defrost system design has been tested in a cold chamber and passes the SAE

J381 criteria.

CAB HEATER CERTIFICATION

Good cab heat performance and regulation provides a more effective working environment for personnel, whether in-transit, or at a scene. The cab heaters will warm the cab 77 degrees Fahrenheit from a cold-soak, within 30 minutes when tested using the coolant supply methods found in SAE J381.

The bidder will certify that a substantially similar cab has been tested and has met these criteria.

AMP DRAW REPORT

The bidder will provide, at the time of bid and delivery, an itemized print out of the expected amp draw of the entire vehicle's electrical system.

The manufacturer of the apparatus will provide the following:

Documentation of the electrical system performance tests.

A written load analysis, which will include the following: o The nameplate rating of the alternator. o The alternator rating under the conditions specified per:

 Applicable NFPA 1901 or 1906 (Current Edition). o The minimum continuous load of each component that is specified per:

 Applicable NFPA 1901 or 1906 (Current Edition). o Additional loads that, when added to the minimum continuous load, determine the total connected load. o Each individual intermittent load.

All of the above listed items will be provided by the bidder per the applicable NFPA 1901 or 1906

(Current Edition).

117 of 117

Bid Number:

Department:

246

Princeton, Borough of

Turning Performance Analysis

Chassis:

Body:

Arrow XT Chassis

Pumper, Med, Alum, 2nd Gen

Parameters:

Inside Cramp Angle:

Axle Track:

Wheel Offset:

Tread Width:

Chassis Overhang:

Additional Bumper Depth:

Front Overhang:

Wheelbase:

Calculated Turning Radii:

Inside Turn:

Curb to curb:

Wall to wall:

Comments:

5/27/2015

45 o

82.92 in.

5.25 in.

17.4 in.

68.99 in.

13 in.

81.99 in.

184.5 in.

14 ft. 3 in.

28 ft. 3 in.

32 ft. 4 in.

CategoryID

6

30

31

38

Category Description

Axle, Front, Custom

Wheels, Front

Tires, Front

Bumpers

Notes:

Actual Inside Cramp Angle may be less due to highly specialized options.

Curb to Curb turning radius calculated for a 9.00 inch curb.

OptionCode

0018453

0616838

0594821

0048249

OptionDescription

Axle, Front, Oshkosh TAK-4, Non Drive, 22,800 lb,

Qtm/AXT/DCF

Wheels, Front, Accuride 22.50" x 12.25", Steel, Hub Pilot

Tires, Front, Goodyear, G296 MSA, 425/65R22.50, 20 ply

Bumper, 19" Extd, Painted/Reinforced, "Chicago Design",

All Chassis

1

Bid Number:

Department:

246

Princeton, Borough of

Definitions:

Turning Performance Analysis

Chassis:

Body:

Arrow XT Chassis

Pumper, Med, Alum, 2nd Gen

5/27/2015

Tread Width

Chassis Overhang

Additional Bumper Depth

Wheelbase

Inside Turning Radius

Curb to Curb Turning Radius

Wall to Wall Turning Radius

Width of the tire tread.

Distance of the center-line of the front axle to the front edge of the cab. This does not include the bumper depth.

Depth that the bumper assembly adds to the front overhang.

Distance between the center lines of the vehicle's front and rear axles.

Radius of the smallest circle around which the vehicle can turn.

Radius of the smallest circle inside of which the vehicle's tires can turn. This measurement assumes a curb height of 9 inches.

Radius of the smallest circle inside of which the entire vehicle can turn. This measurement takes into account any front overhang due to chassis,bumper extensions and/or aerial devices.

2

CONTRACT PRICING WORKSHEET

For MOTOR VEHICLES Only

Contract

No.:

FS12-13

Date

Prepared:

9/10/2015

This Worksheet is prepared by Contractor and given to End User. If a PO is issued, both documents

MUST be faxed to H-GAC @ 713-993-4548. Therefore please type or print legibly.

Buying

Agency:

Contact

Person:

Phone:

Princeton

Linda McDermott, Clerk

609-924-5704

Contractor:

Prepared

By:

Phone:

Pierce Manufacturing

David Russell

920-832-3000

Fax:

Email:

Product

Code:

UC06

Description:

Arrow XT pumper

A. Product Item Base Unit Price Per Contractor's H-GAC Contract:

Fax:

Email:

[email protected]

$ 405,078.00

B. Published Options - Itemize below - Attach additional sheet(s) if necessary - Include Option Code in description if applicable.

(Note: Published Options are options which were submitted and priced in Contractor's bid.)

Description

Cost

Description

Cost

Subtotal From Additional Sheet(s):

$ 119,452.00

Subtotal B:

$ 119,452.00

C. Unpublished Options - Itemize below / attach additional sheet(s) if necessary.

(Note: Unpublished options are items which were not submitted and priced in Contractor's bid.)

Description

Cost

Description

Cost

Subtotal From Additional Sheet(s):

$ 24,158.60

Subtotal C:

$ 24,158.60

Check: Total cost of Unpublished Options (C) cannot exceed 25% of the total of the Base Unit

Price plus Published Options (A+B).

For this transaction the percentage is:

5%

D. Total Cost Before Any Applicable Trade-In / Other Allowances / Discounts (A+B+C)

Quantity Ordered:

1

X Subtotal of A + B + C:

E. H-GAC Order Processing Charge (Amount Per Current Policy)

F. Trade-Ins / Other Allowances / Special Discounts / Freight / Installation

Description

HGAC fee waived multi-unit on single purchase order

Multi-unit discount

Cost

$ (2,000.00)

$ (2,500.00)

Delivery Date: 12 months from PO

548688.6

Description

= Subtotal D:

$ 548,688.60

Subtotal E:

$ 2,000.00

Cost

Subtotal F:

$ (4,500.00)

G. Total Purchase Price (D+E+F):

$ 546,188.60

Contract Pricing Worksheets

Rev 02-05-07

NOTE: Purchase Orders are not valid unless a copy of the completed worksheet and the customer's order are faxed to HGACBuy at:

713-993-4548

This Workbook contains three versions of HGACBuy's Contract Pricing

Worksheet. One is for Standard Equipment / Services, one is for

Catalog or Price Sheet type purchases, and the third is for Motor

Vehicles only. See tabs at bottom to select appropriate Worksheet.

Please contact H-GAC staff about use of the worksheets if you have any questions.

487

816

970

971

973

Pride

Number Qty

105

108

Description

1 Silicon hoses

1 Change to air ride suspension, single axle

1 Cummins ISL9 to Cummins ISX12 500hp engine 118

119

210

212

214

401

402

403

409

412

1

5

1

1 Q2B siren

1 Add Front suction inlet 4-6"

1

1

Cummins ISX12 to Detroit Diesel DD13 engine

Upgrade SCBA brackets to Hands Free

Raised roof, custom cab

Add front bumper line (including hose tray and restraint)

Add 19" extended steel painted bumper

1 Add large diameter rear discharge

1 Add rear suction inlet

1 Each additional transverse preconnect 2.5 or 3" plumbing

415

418

420

422

1

1

1

Hose reel, above pump w/150' hose

Increase pump form 1250 to 1500 gpm

Increase pump from 1500 to 2000 gpm

3 Adjustable height slide-out tray 464

482

483

484

1

1

4

LED under cab/body lighting (8)

12v LED brow light

12v LED recessed or surfaced mounted

3

1

1

1

SCBA Cylinder storage in fender panel triple

Deck gun with tips, electric

Add electric/hydraulic ladder rack

Add right high side compartment

978

530471

2 Full height/full depth compartments

1 LED emergency lighting package

1 Upgrade rear axle from 24,000gvw to 27,000gvw

1 Upgrade transmission to EVS4000P for Detroit Diesel

642579

636207 engine

1 Light Twr, W-B Chf NS2.3600WHL, 4PFP2 12vDC Lts Cld

7.5'

Published Unpublished

Options Options

$654.00

$2,278.00

$25,499.00

#########

$3,245.00

$1,903.00

$3,547.00

$6,147.00

$2,886.00

$2,346.00

$4,693.00

$5,463.00

$2,816.00

$3,125.00

$5,014.00

$6,751.00

$2,367.00

$1,791.00

$1,762.00

$6,956.00

$2,376.00

$8,858.00

$8,782.00

$3,226.00

$11,600.00

$6,479.00

$1,708.80

#########

#########

Base Bid

Published Options

Total Published Options

Unpublished Options

Total Options w/o HGAC Fee

#########

#########

#########

$ 24,158.60

#########

4.61%

Pierce Mfg is pleased to submit a proposal to Princeton Fire Deparment for a Pierce® triple

combination pumper per your request for quotation. The following paragraphs will describe in detail

the apparatus, construction methods, and equipment proposed. This proposal will indicate size, type, model and make of components parts and equipment, providing proof of compliance with each and every item (except where noted) in the departments advertised specifications.

PIERCE MANUFACTURING was founded in 1913. Since then we have been building bodies with one philosophy, "BUILD THE FINEST". Our skilled craftsmen take pride in their work, which is reflected, in the final product. We have been building fire apparatus since the early "forties" giving Pierce

Manufacturing over 60 years of experience in the fire apparatus market. Pierce Manufacturing has built and put into service more than 51,000 apparatus, including more than 27,000 on Pierce custom chassis designed and built specifically for fire and emergency applications. Our Appleton, Wisconsin facility has over 757,000 total square feet of floor space situated on approximately 97 acres of land. Our

Bradenton, Florida facility has 300,000 square feet of floor space situated on approximately 38 acres of land.

Our beliefs in high ethical standards are carried through in all of our commitments and to everyone with whom we do business. Honesty, Integrity, Accountability and Citizenship are global tenets by which we all live and work. Consequently, we neither engage in, nor have we ever been convicted of price fixing, bid rigging, or collusion in any domestic or international fire apparatus market.

Pierce has only one brand of fire apparatus "Pierce", ensuring you are receiving top of the line product that meets your specification.

In accordance with the current edition of NFPA 1901 standards, this proposal will specify whether the fire department, manufacturer, or apparatus dealership will provide required loose equipment.

Images and illustrative material in this proposal are as accurate as known at the time of publication, but are subject to change without notice. Images and illustrative material is for reference only, and may include optional equipment and accessories and may not include all standard equipment.

GENERAL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

To control quality, ensure compatibility, and provide a single source for service and warranty, the custom cab, chassis, pump module and body will be entirely designed, assembled/welded and painted in

Pierce owned manufacturing facilities. This includes, but not limited to the cab weldment, the pumphouse module assembly, the chassis assembly, the body and the electrical system.

QUALITY AND WORKMANSHIP

Pierce has set the pace for quality and workmanship in the fire apparatus field. Our tradition of building the highest quality units with craftsmen second to none has been the rule right from the beginning and we demonstrate that ongoing commitment by: Ensuring all steel welding follows American Welding

Society D1.1-2004 recommendations for structural steel welding. All aluminum welding follows

American Welding society and ANSI D1.2-2003 requirements for structural welding of aluminum. All

1 of 96

sheet metal welding follows American welding Society B2.1-2000 requirements for structural welding of sheet metal. Our flux core arc welding uses alloy rods, type 7000 and is performed to American

Welding Society standards A5.20-E70T1. Furthermore, all employees classified as welders are tested and certified to meet the American welding Society codes upon hire and every three (3) years thereafter.

Pierce also employs and American Welding Society certified welding inspector in plant during working hours to monitor weld quality.

Pierce Manufacturing operates a Quality Management System under the requirements of ISO 9001.

These standards sponsored by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) specify the quality systems that are established by the manufacturer for design, manufacture, installation and service. A copy of the certificate of compliance is included with this proposal.

In addition to the Quality Management system, we also employ a Quality Achievement Supplier program to insure the vendors and suppliers that we utilize meet the high standards we demand. That is just part of our overall "Quality at the Source" program at Pierce.

To demonstrate the quality of our products and services, a list of at least ten (10) fire departments/municipalities that have purchased vehicles for a second time is provided.

DELIVERY

The apparatus will be delivered under its own power to insure proper break-in of all components while the apparatus is still under warranty. A qualified delivery representative shall deliver the apparatus and remain for a sufficient length of time to instruct personnel in proper operation, care and maintenance of the equipment delivered.

MANUAL AND SERVICE INFORMATION

At time of delivery, complete operation and maintenance manuals covering the apparatus will be provided. A permanent plate will be mounted in the driver's compartment specifying the quantity and type of fluids required including engine oil, engine coolant, transmission, pump transmission lubrication, pump primer and drive axle.

SAFETY VIDEO

At the time of delivery Pierce will also provide one (1) 39-minute, professionally produced apparatus safety video, in DVD format. This video will address key safety considerations for personnel to follow when they are driving, operating, and maintaining the apparatus, including the following: vehicle pretrip inspection, chassis operation, pump operation, aerial operation, and safety during maintenance.

PERFORMANCE TESTS

A road test will be conducted with the apparatus fully loaded and a continuous run of no less than ten

(10) miles. During that time the apparatus will show no loss of power nor will it overheat. The transmission drive shaft or shafts and the axles will run quietly and be free of abnormal vibration or noise. The apparatus when fully loaded will not have less than 25 percent nor more than 50 percent on

2 of 96

the front axle, and not less than 50 percent nor more than 75 percent on the rear axle. The apparatus will meet NFPA 1901 acceleration and braking requirements.

SERVICE AND WARRANTY SUPPORT

Pierce dealership support will be provided by Fire & Safety Services LTD by operating a Pierce authorized service center. The service center will have factory-trained mechanics on staff versed in

Pierce fire apparatus. The service facility will be located within fifty (50) miles of the fire department.

In addition to the dealership, Pierce has service facilities located in both, Weyauwega, Wisconsin and

Bradenton, Florida. Pierce also maintains a dedicated parts facility of over 100,000 square feet in

Appleton, Wisconsin. The parts facility stocks in excess of $5,000,000 in parts dedicated to service and replacement parts. The parts facility employs a staff dedicated solely for the distribution and shipment of service and replacement parts.

Service parts for the apparatus being proposed can be found via Pierceparts.com which, is an interactive online tool that delivers information regarding your specific apparatus as well as the opportunity to register for training classes.

As a Pierce customer you have the ability to view the complete bill of materials for your specific apparatus, including assembly drawings, piece part drawings, and beneficial parts notations. You will also have the ability to search the complete Pierce item master through a parts search function which offers all Pierce SKU's and descriptions offered on all Pierce apparatus. Published component catalogs, which include proprietary systems along with an extensive operators manual library is available for easy reference.

Pierce Manufacturing maintains a dedicated service and warranty staff of over 35 personnel, dedicated to customer support, which also maintains a 24 hour 7 day a week toll free hot line, four (4) on staff

EVTs, and offers hands-on repair and maintenance training classes multiple times a year.

COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE

Certification of insurance coverage will be enclosed.

SINGLE SOURCE MANUFACTURER

Pierce Manufacturing, Inc. provides an integrated approach to the design and manufacture of our products that delivers superior apparatus and a dedicated support team. From our facilities, the chassis, cab weldment, cab, pumphouse (including the sheet metal enclosure, valve controls, piping and operators panel) and body will be entirely designed, tested, and hand assembled to the customer's exact specifications. The electrical system either hardwired or multiplexed, will be both designed and integrated by Pierce Manufacturing. The warranties relative to these major components (excluding component warranties such as engine, transmission, axles, pump, etc.) will be provided by Pierce as a single source manufacturer. Pierce's single source solution adds value by providing a fully engineered product that offers durability, reliability, maintainability, performance, and a high level of quality.

3 of 96

Your apparatus will be manufactured in Appleton, Wisconsin.

NFPA 2009 STANDARDS

This unit will comply with the NFPA standards effective January 1, 2009, except for fire department directed exceptions. These exceptions will be set forth in the Statement of Exceptions.

Certification of slip resistance of all stepping, standing and walking surfaces will be supplied with delivery of the apparatus.

A plate that is highly visible to the driver while seated will be provided. This plate will show the overall height, length, and gross vehicle weight rating.

The manufacturer will have programs in place for training, proficiency testing and performance for any staff involved with certifications.

An official of the company will designate, in writing, who is qualified to witness and certify test results.

NFPA COMPLIANCY

Apparatus proposed by the bidder will meet the applicable requirements of the National Fire Protection

Association (NFPA) as stated in current edition at time of contract execution. Fire department's specifications that differ from NFPA specifications will be indicated in the proposal as "non-NFPA".

VEHICLE INSPECTION PROGRAM CERTIFICATION

To assure the vehicle is built to current NFPA standards, the apparatus, in its entirety, will be thirdparty, audit-certified through Underwriters Laboratory (UL) that it is built and complies to all applicable standards in the current edition of NFPA 1901. The certification will include: all design, production, operational, and performance testing of not only the apparatus, but those components that are installed on the apparatus.

A placard will be affixed in the driver's side area stating the third party agency, the date, the standard and the certificate number of the whole vehicle audit.

PUMP TEST

Underwriters Laboratory (UL) will test, approved, and certify the pump. The test results and the pump manufacturer's certification of hydrostatic test; the engine manufacturer's certified brake horsepower curve; and the pump manufacturer's record of pump construction details will be forwarded to the Fire

Department.

GENERATOR TEST

If the unit has a generator, Underwriters Laboratory (UL) will test, approved, and certify the generator.

The test results will be provided to the Fire Department at the time of delivery.

4 of 96

BREATHING AIR TEST

If the unit has breathing air, Pierce Manufacturing will draw an air sample from the air system and have the sample certified that the air quality meets the requirements of NFPA 1989, Standard on Breathing

Air Quality for Fire and Emergency Services Respiratory Protection.

PIERCE/VCOS PARTNERSHIP

For every fire or emergency apparatus sold to a volunteer or combination fire department, Pierce

Manufacturing will make a $100 donation to the Volunteer Chief Officers Section (VCOS) of the IAFC

Partnership when the apparatus is delivered. The VCOS will invest these funds in leadership education,

NFPA Technical Committee representation and VCOS general operations.

DELIVERY TRAINING

Factory authorized delivery training will be provided by Fire and Safety Services, LTD, the New Jersey representative for Pierce Manufacturing, Inc. This training will consist of a Power Point presentation, using images and descriptions of the customer's own apparatus, as well as hands-on training in the use and proper care of the apparatus. A copy of the Power Point presentation will be provided to the purchaser, to be used in subsequent training of new and existing personnel.

DELIVERY

Apparatus, to insure proper break in of all components while still under warranty, will be delivered under it own power. A qualified delivery person representing the contractor shall deliver the apparatus and remain for a sufficient length of time to instruct personnel in the proper operation, care and maintenance of the delivered unit (s).

INSPECTION TRIP(S)

The bidder will provide two (2) factory inspection trip(s) for three customer representative(s). The inspection trip(s) will be scheduled at times mutually agreed upon between the manufacturer's representative and the customer. All costs such as travel, lodging and meals will be the responsibility of the bidder.

AFTERMARKET SUPPORT WEBSITE

Pierceparts.com will provide Pierce authorized dealer access to comprehensive information pertaining to the maintenance and service of their customer's apparatus. This tool will provide the Pierce authorized dealer the ability to service and support their customers to the best of their ability with factory support at their fingertips.

Pierceparts.com is also accessible to the end user through the guest login. Limited access is available and vehicle specific parts information accessible by entering a specific VIN number. All end users should see their local authorized Pierce dealer for additional support and service.

The website will consist of the following screens at the dealer level:

My Fleet Screen

5 of 96

The My Fleet screen will provide access to truck detail information on the major components of the vehicle, warranty information, available vehicle photographs, vehicle drawings, sales options, applicable vehicle software downloads, etc.

Parts Screens

The Parts screens will provide parts look-up capability of Pierce Manufacturing sourced items, with the aid of digital photographs, part drawings and assembly drawings. The parts search application will permit the searching of parts by item description or function group (major system category). The parts application will provide the ability to submit electronically a parts order, parts quote, or parts return request directly to Pierce Manufacturing for processing.

Warranty Screen

The Warranty screens will provide dealers the ability to submit electronically warranty claims directly to

Pierce Manufacturing for reimbursement.

My Reports Screens

The My Reports screens will provide access to multiple dealer reports to allow the dealership to maintain communication with the customer on the status of orders, claims, and phone contacts.

Technical Support Screens

The Technical Support screens will provide access to all currently published Operation and Maintenance and Service Publications. Access to Pierce Manufacturing Service Bulletins and Work Instructions, containing information on current service topics and recommendations will be provided.

Training

The Training screens will provide access to upcoming training classes offered by Pierce Manufacturing along with interactive electronic learning modules (Operators Guides) covering the operation of major vehicle components will be provided. Access to training manuals used in Pierce Manufacturing training classes will be provided.

About Pierce

Access to customer service articles, corporate news, quarterly newsletters, and key contacts within the

Customer Service Department will be provided. The current Customer Service Policy and Procedure

Manual, detailing the operation of the Customer Service group will also be accessible.

BID BOND

A bid bond as security for the bid in the form of a 10% bid bond, not to exceed $20,000.00 has been supplied as per the requirements in the purchasing authority's specifications. See the appropriate section of the bid package for the bond.

6 of 96

PERFORMANCE BOND, 1 YEAR

The successful bidder will furnish a Performance and Payment bond (Bond) equal to 100 percent of the total contract amount within 30 days of the notice of award. Such Bond will be in a form acceptable to the Owner and issued by a surety company included within the Department of Treasury's Listing of

Approved Sureties (Department Circular 570) with a minimum A.M. Best Financial Strength Rating of

A and Size Category of XV. In the event of a bond issued by a surety of a lesser Size Category, a minimum Financial Strength rating of A+ is required.

Bidder and Bidder's surety agree that the Bond issued hereunder, whether expressly stated or not, also includes the surety's guarantee of the vehicle manufacturer's Basic One (1) Year Limited Warranty period included within this proposal. Owner agrees that the penal amount of this bond will be simultaneously amended to 25 percent of the total contract amount upon satisfactory acceptance and delivery of the vehicle(s) included herein. Notwithstanding anything contained within this contract to the contrary, the surety's liability for any warranties of any type will not exceed one (1) year from the date of such satisfactory acceptance and delivery, or the actual Basic One (1) Year Limited Warranty period, whichever is shorter.

APPROVAL DRAWING

A drawing of the proposed apparatus will be prepared and provided to the purchaser for approval before construction begins. The Pierce sales representative will also be provided with a copy of the same drawing. The finalized and approved drawing will become part of the contract documents. This drawing will indicate the chassis make and model, location of the lights, siren, horns, compartments, major components, etc.

A "revised" approval drawing of the apparatus will be prepared and submitted by Pierce to the purchaser showing any changes made to the approval drawing.

ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS

Two (2) electrical wiring diagrams, prepared for the model of chassis and body, will be provided.

ARROW XT CHASSIS

The Pierce Arrow XT™ is the custom chassis developed exclusively for the fire service. Chassis provided will be a new, tilt-type custom fire apparatus. The chassis will be manufactured in the apparatus body builder's facility eliminating any split responsibility. The chassis will be designed and manufactured for heavy-duty service, with adequate strength, capacity for the intended load to be sustained, and the type of service required. The chassis will be the manufacturer's heavy-duty line tilt cab.

WHEELBASE

The wheelbase of the vehicle will be 184.5".

GVW RATING

The gross vehicle weight rating will be 42,000.

7 of 96

FRAME

The chassis frame will be built with two (2) steel channels bolted to five (5) cross members or more, depending on other options of the apparatus. The side rails will have a 13.38" tall web over the front and mid sections of the chassis, with a continuous smooth taper to 10.75" over the rear axle. Each rail will have a section modulus of 25.992 cubic inches and a resisting bending moment (rbm) of 3,119,040 in-lb over the critical regions of the frame assembly, with a section modulus of 18.96 cubic inches with an rbm of 2,275,200 in-lb over the rear axle. The frame rails will be constructed of 120,000 psi yield strength heat-treated 0.38" thick steel with 3.50" wide flanges.

FRAME REINFORCEMENT

In addition, a mainframe inverted "L" liner will be provided. It will be heat-treated steel measuring

12.00" x 3.00" x 0.25". Each liner will have a section modulus of 7.795 cubic inches, yield strength of

110,000 psi, and rbm of 857,462 in-lb. Total rbm at wheelbase center will be 3,976,502 in-lb.

The frame liner will be mounted inside of the chassis frame rail, beginning at the front edge of the mainframe rail and extending to the rear cab cross member.

FRONT NON DRIVE AXLE

The Oshkosh TAK-4® front axle will be of the independent suspension design with a ground rating of

22,800 lb.

Upper and lower control arms will be used on each side of the axle. Upper control arm castings will be made of 100,000 psi yield strength 8630 steel and the lower control arm casting will be made of 55,000 psi yield ductile iron.

The center cross members and side plates will be constructed out of 80,000 psi yield strength steel.

Each control arm will be mounted to the center section using elastomer bushings. These rubber bushings will rotate on low friction plain bearings and be lubricated for life. Each bushing will also have a flange end to absorb longitudinal impact loads, reducing noise and vibrations.

There will be nine (9) grease fittings supplied, one (1) on each control arm pivot and one (1) on the steering gear extension.

The upper control arm will be shorter than the lower arm so that wheel end geometry provides positive camber when deflected below rated load and negative camber above rated load.

Camber at load will be 0 degrees for optimum tire life.

The ball joint bearing shall be of low friction design and be maintenance free.

Toe links that are adjustable for alignment of the wheel to the center of the chassis will be provided.

The wheel ends will have little to no bump steer when the chassis encounters a hole or obstacle.

8 of 96

The steering linkage will provide proper steering angles for the inside and outside wheel, based on the vehicle wheelbase.

The axle will have a third party certified turning angle of 45 degrees. Front discharge, front suction, or aluminum wheels will not infringe on this cramp angle.

FRONT SUSPENSION

Front Oshkosh TAK-4™ independent suspension will be provided with a minimum ground rating of

22,800 lb.

The independent suspension system will be designed to provide maximum ride comfort. The design will allow the vehicle to travel at highway speeds over improved road surfaces and at moderate speeds over rough terrain with minimal transfer of road shock and vibration to the vehicle's crew compartment.

Each wheel will have torsion bar type spring. In addition, each front wheel end will also have energy absorbing jounce bumpers to prevent bottoming of the suspension.

The suspension design will be such that there is at least 10.00" of total wheel travel and a minimum of

3.75" before suspension bottoms.

The torsion bar anchor lock system allows for simple lean adjustments, without the use of shims. One can adjust for a lean within 15 minutes per side. Anchor adjustment design is such that it allows for ride height adjustment on each side.

The independent suspension was put through a durability test that simulated 140,000 miles of inner city driving.

FRONT SHOCK ABSORBERS

KONI heavy-duty telescoping shock absorbers will be provided on the front suspension.

FRONT OIL SEALS

Oil seals with viewing window will be provided on the front axle.

FRONT TIRES

Front tires will be Goodyear® 425/65R22.50 radials, 20 ply G296 MSA tread, rated for 22,800 lb maximum axle load and 68 mph maximum speed.

The tires will be mounted on Accuride® 22.50" x 12.25" steel disc type wheels with a ten (10)-stud,

11.25" bolt circle.

REAR AXLE

The rear axle will be a Meritor™, Model RS-25-160, with a capacity of 27,000 lb.

TOP SPEED OF VEHICLE

A rear axle ratio will be furnished to allow the vehicle to reach a top speed of 68 mph.

9 of 96

REAR SUSPENSION

Rear suspension will be a Hendrickson FMX 272 EX, air ride with a ground rating of 27,000 lb. The suspension will have the following features:

- Heavy-duty shock absorbers to protect air springs from overextension

- Heavy-duty torque rods and bushings

- Premium, heavy-duty rubber bushings require no lubrication

- Integrated stabilizer design results in greater stability

- Low spring rate air springs for excellent ride quality

- Dual height control valves to maintain level vehicle from side to side

REAR OIL SEALS

Oil seals will be provided on the rear axle.

REAR TIRES

Rear tires will be four (4) Goodyear® 12R22.50 radials, 16 ply all season G622 RSD tread, rated for

27,120 lb maximum axle load and 75 mph maximum speed.

The tires will be mounted on 22.50" x 8.25" steel disc type wheels with a ten (10)-stud, 11.25" bolt circle.

TIRE BALANCE

All tires will be balanced with Counteract balancing beads. The beads will be inserted into the tire and eliminate the need for wheel weights.

TIRE PRESSURE MANAGEMENT

There will be a VECSAFE LED tire alert pressure management system provided that will monitor each tire's pressure. A chrome plated brass sensor will be provided on the valve stem of each tire for a total of six (6) tires.

The sensor will calibrate to the tire pressure when installed on the valve stem for pressures between 20 and 120 psi. The sensor will activate an integral battery operated LED when the pressure of that tire drops 8 psi.

Removing the cap from the sensor will indicate the functionality of the sensor and battery. If the sensor and battery are in working condition, the LED will immediately start blinking.

CHROME LUG NUT COVERS

Chrome lug nut covers will be supplied on front and rear wheels.

10 of 96

WHEEL CHOCKS

There will be one (1) pair of folding Ziamatic, Model SAC-44-E, aluminum alloy, Quick-Choc wheel blocks, with easy-grip handle provided.

WHEEL CHOCK BRACKETS

There will be one (1) pair of Zico, Model SQCH-44-H, horizontal mounting wheel chock brackets provided for the Ziamatic, Model SAC-44-E, folding wheel chocks. The brackets will be made of aluminum and consist of a quick release spring loaded rod to hold the wheel chocks in place. The brackets will be mounted on the drivers side, just ahead of the rear axle.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

The vehicle will be equipped with a Meritor WABCO 4S4M, anti-lock braking system. The ABS will provide a 4-channel anti-lock braking control on both the front and rear wheels. A digitally controlled system that utilizes microprocessor technology will control the anti-lock braking system. Each wheel will be monitored by the system. When any particular wheel begins to lockup, a signal will be sent to the control unit. This control unit then will reduce the braking of that wheel for a fraction of a second and then reapply the brake. This anti-lock brake system will eliminate the lockup of any wheel thus helping to prevent the apparatus from skidding out of control.

BRAKES

The service brake system will be full air type.

The front brakes will be Knorr/Bendix disc type with a 17.00" ventilated rotor for improved stopping distance.

The brake system will be certified, third party inspected, for improved stopping distance.

The rear brakes will be Meritor™ 16.50" x 7.00" cam operated with automatic slack adjusters. Dust shields will be provided.

AIR COMPRESSOR, BRAKE SYSTEM

The air compressor will be a Bendix®, Model BA-921, with 15.80 cubic feet per minute output at 1,250 rpm.

BRAKE SYSTEM

The brake system will include:

Bendix® dual brake treadle valve with vinyl covered foot surface

Heated automatic moisture ejector on air dryer

Total air system capacity of 4,362 cubic inches

Two (2) air pressure gauges with a red warning light and an audible alarm, that activates when air pressure falls below 60 psi

Spring set parking brake system

11 of 96

Parking brake operated by a push-pull style control valve

A parking "brake on" indicator light on instrument panel

Park brake relay/inversion and anti-compounding valve, in conjunction with a double check valve system, with an automatic spring brake application at 40 psi

A pressure protection valve to prevent all air operated accessories from drawing air from the air system when the system pressure drops below 80 psi (550 kPa)

The air tank will be primed and painted to meet a minimum 750 hour salt spray test.

To reduce the effects of corrosion, the air tank will be mounted with stainless steel brackets.

BRAKE SYSTEM AIR DRYER

The air dryer will be WABCO System Saver 1200 with spin-on coalescing filter cartridge and 100 watt heater.

BRAKE LINES

Color-coded nylon brake lines will be provided. The lines will be wrapped in a heat protective loom in the chassis areas that are subject to excessive heat.

AIR INLET

One (1) air inlet with male coupling will be provided. It will allow station air to be supplied to the apparatus brake system through a shoreline hose. The inlet will be located mounted ahead of crew cab door at driver's side of cab. A check valve will be provided to prevent reverse flow of air. The inlet will discharge into the "wet" tank of the brake system. A mating female coupling will also be provided with the loose equipment.

ENGINE

The chassis will be powered by an electronically controlled engine as described below:

Make:

Model:

Power:

Torque:

Detroit™

DD13®

450 hp at 1800 rpm

1550 lb-ft at 1200 rpm

Governed Speed: 2080 rpm

Emissions Level: EPA 2013

Fuel:

Cylinders:

Displacement:

Diesel

Six (6)

781 cubic inches (12.8L)

Delco Remy 39MT™

Starter:

Fuel Filters:

Coolant Filter:

Dual cartridge style with check valve, water separator, and water in fuel sensor

Cartridge style with shut off valves on the supply and return line

12 of 96

The engine will include On-board diagnostics (OBD), which provides self diagnostic and reporting. The system will give the owner or repair technician access to state of health information for various vehicle sub systems. The system will monitor vehicle systems, engine and after treatment. The system will illuminate a malfunction indicator light on the dash console if a problem is detected.

HIGH IDLE

A high idle switch will be provided, inside the cab, on the instrument panel, that will automatically maintain a preset engine rpm. A switch will be installed, at the cab instrument panel, for activation/deactivation.

The high idle will be operational only when the parking brake is on and the truck transmission is in neutral. A green indicator light will be provided, adjacent to the switch. The light will illuminate when the above conditions are met. The light will be labeled "OK to Engage High Idle."

ENGINE BRAKE

A Jacobs® engine brake is to be installed with the controls located on the instrument panel within easy reach of the driver.

The driver will be able to turn the engine brake system on/off and have a high, medium and low setting.

The engine brake will be installed in such a manner that when the engine brake is slowing the vehicle the brake lights are activated.

The ABS system will automatically disengage the auxiliary braking device when required.

CLUTCH FAN

A Horton® fan clutch will be provided. The fan clutch will be automatic when the pump transmission is in "Road" position, and fully engaged in "Pump" position.

ENGINE AIR INTAKE

The air intake with an ember separator will be mounted high on the passenger side of the cab, to the front of the crew cab door. The ember separator is designed to prevent road dirt and recirculating hot air from entering the engine. The ember separator will be easily accessible through a hinged stainless steel grille, with one (1) flush quarter turn latch.

EXHAUST SYSTEM

The exhaust system will include a diesel particulate filter (DPF) and a selective catalytic reduction

(SCR) device to meet current EPA standards. The exhaust system will be stainless steel from the turbo to the inlet of the SCR device and will be 5.00" in diameter. An insulation wrap will be provided on all exhaust pipes between the turbo and SCR to minimize the transfer of heat to the cab. The exhaust will terminate horizontally ahead of the passenger side rear wheels. A tailpipe diffuser will be provided to reduce the temperature of the exhaust as it exits. Heat deflector shields will be provided to isolate chassis and body components from the heat of the tailpipe diffuser.

13 of 96

RADIATOR

The radiator and the complete cooling system will meet or exceed NFPA and engine manufacturer cooling system standards.

For maximum cooling performance, the radiator core will be made of copper fins having a serpentine design, soldered to brass tubes. The tubes will be welded to brass headers using the patented Beta-Weld process for increased strength, longer road life and solder-bloom corrosion protection. The radiator core will have a minimum frontal area of 1,396 square inches. Steel supply and return tanks will be bolted to the core headers and steel side channels to complete the radiator assembly. The radiator will be compatible with commercial antifreeze solutions.

The radiator will be mounted in such a manner as to prevent the development of leaks caused by twisting or straining when the apparatus operates over uneven ground. The radiator assembly will be isolated from the chassis frame rails with rubber isolators.

The radiator will include an integral de-aeration tank, with a remote-mounted overflow tank. For visual coolant level inspection, the radiator will have a built-in sight glass. The radiator will be equipped with a 15 psi pressure relief cap.

A drain port will be located at the lowest point of the cooling system and/or the bottom of the radiator to permit complete flushing of the coolant from the system.

A heavy-duty fan will draw in fresh, cool air through the radiator. Shields or baffles will be provided to prevent recirculation of hot air to the inlet side of the radiator.

COOLANT LINES

Gates® silicone hoses will be used for all engine/heater coolant lines installed by the chassis manufacturer.

The chassis manufacturer will also use Gates brand hose on other heater, defroster and auxiliary coolant circuits. There will be some areas in which an appropriate Gates product is not available. In those instances a comparable silicone hose from another manufacturer will be used.

Hose clamps will be stainless steel constant torque type to prevent coolant leakage. They will react to temperature changes in the cooling system and expand or contract accordingly while maintaining a constant clamping pressure on the hose.

FUEL TANK

A 65 gallon fuel tank will be provided and mounted at the rear of the chassis. The tank will be constructed of aluminum with the exterior painted to match the chassis frame It will be equipped with swash partitions and a vent. To eliminate the effects of corrosion, the fuel tank will be mounted with stainless steel straps.

A .75" drain plug will be located in a low point of the tank for drainage.

14 of 96

A fill inlet will be located on the left hand side of the body and is covered with a hinged, spring loaded, stainless steel door that is marked "Ultra Low Sulfur - Diesel Fuel Only."

A .50" diameter vent will be installed from tank top to just below fuel fill inlet.

The fuel tank will meet all FHWA 393.67 requirements, including a fill capacity of 95 percent of tank volume.

All fuel lines will be provided as recommended by the engine manufacturer.

DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID TANK

A 4.5 gallon diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) tank will be provided and mounted in the driver's side body forward of the rear axle.

A 0.50" drain plug will be provided in a low point of the tank for drainage.

A fill inlet will be located on the driver's side of the body and be covered with a hinged, spring loaded, polished stainless steel door that is marked "Diesel Exhaust Fluid Only".

The tank will meet the engine manufacturers requirement for 10 percent expansion space in the event of tank freezing.

The tank will include an integrated heater unit that utilizes engine coolant to thaw the DEF in the event of freezing.

AUXILIARY FUEL PUMP

An auxiliary electric fuel pump will be added to the fuel line for priming the engine. A switch located on the cab instrument panel will be provided to operate the pump.

FUEL COOLER

An air to fuel cooler will be installed in the engine fuel return line.

TRANSMISSION

An Allison 5th generation, Model EVS 4000P, electronic, torque converting, automatic transmission will be provided.

The transmission will be equipped with prognostics to monitor oil life, filter life, and transmission health. A wrench icon on the shift selector's digital display will indicate when service is due.

Two (2) PTO openings will be located on left side and top of converter housing (positions 8 o'clock and

1 o'clock).

A transmission temperature gauge with red light and buzzer will be installed on the cab instrument panel.

15 of 96

TRANSMISSION SHIFTER

A six (6)-speed T-Handle shift module will be mounted to right of driver on console. Shift position indicator will be indirectly lit for after dark operation.

The transmission ratio will be 1st - 3.51 to 1.00, 2nd - 1.91 to 1.00, 3rd - 1.43 to 1.00, 4th - 1.00 to 1.00,

5th - 0.75 to 1.00, 6th - 0.64 to 1.00, R- 4.80 to 1.00.

TRANSMISSION COOLER

A transmission oil cooler will be provided that is integral to the radiator and located at the bottom of the radiator. The cooler will use engine coolant to control the transmission oil temperature.

DRIVELINE

Drivelines will be a heavy-duty metal tube and be equipped with Spicer® 1810 universal joints.

The shafts will be dynamically balanced before installation.

A splined slip joint will be provided in each driveshaft. The slip joint will be coated with Glidecoat® or equivalent.

STEERING

Dual Sheppard, Model M110, steering gears, with integral heavy-duty power steering, will be provided.

For reduced system temperatures, the power steering will incorporate an air to oil cooler and an Eaton,

Model VN20, hydraulic pump with integral pressure and flow control. All power steering lines will have wire braded lines with crimped fittings.

A tilt and telescopic steering column will be provided to improve fit for a broader range of driver configurations.

STEERING WHEEL

The steering wheel will be 18.00" in diameter, have tilting and telescoping capabilities, and a 4-spoke design.

LOGO AND CUSTOMER DESIGNATION ON DASH

The dash panel will have an emblem containing the Pierce logo and customer name. The emblem will have three (3) rows of text for the customer's department name. There will be a maximum of eight (8) characters in the first row, 11 characters in the second row and 11 characters in the third row.

The first row of text will be: "NO TEXT"

The second row of text will be: Princeton

The third row of text will be: Fire

16 of 96

BUMPER

The bumper will be manufactured from .25" formed steel with a 3/8" bend radius. The bumper will be

10.00" high with a 1.5" top and bottom flange. The bumper will be one piece. With the front face of the bumper to be 81.00" with a 9.00" 45 degree corners with side plates extending back approximately

10.00". The bumper will be metal finished and painted job color.

The bumper will be extended 19.00" from front face of cab.

GRAVEL PAN

A gravel pan, constructed of bright aluminum treadplate, will be furnished between the bumper and cab face. The gravel pan will be properly supported from the underside to prevent flexing and vibration of the aluminum treadplate.

HOSE TRAY

A hose tray, constructed of aluminum, will be placed in the center of the bumper extension.

The tray will have a capacity of 30' of 5.00" double jacket cotton-polyester hose.

Black rubber grating will be provided at the bottom of the tray. Drain holes are also provided.

CENTER HOSE TRAY RESTRAINT

There will be one (1) pair of hose tray restraint straps located over the center mounted tray.

The restraints will be a pair of 2.00" wide black nylon straps with Velcro® fasteners provided. The strap(s) will be used to secure the hose in the tray.

LEFT SIDE HOSE TRAY

A hose tray will be placed in the left side of the extended bumper.

The tray will have a capacity of 100' of 1.75" double jacket cotton-polyester hose.

Black rubber grating will be provided at the bottom of the tray. Drain holes will be provided.

BUMPER HOSE RESTRAINT

There will be two (2) pairs hose tray restraint straps located over the left side mounted tray.

The restraints will be a pair of 2.00" wide black nylon straps with Velcro fasteners provided. The strap(s) will be used to secure the hose in the tray.

LIFT AND TOW MOUNTS

Mounted to the frame extension will be lift and tow mounts. The lift and tow mounts will be designed and positioned to adapt to certain tow truck lift systems.

The lift and tow mounts with eyes will be painted the same color as the frame.

17 of 96

TOW HOOKS

No tow hooks are to be provided. This truck will be equipped with a lift and tow package with integral tow eyes.

PORTABLE WINCH RECEIVER

A portable winch receiver will be installed at the front bumper extension of the apparatus.

The winch receiver will be constructed of heavy steel tubing and reinforced to the bumper extension framework for the receiving portion. The winch receiver will be a class IV receiver.

Winch power will be provided at location.

SIGHT RODS

There will be two (2) Bores, Model 848-211, lighted polished stainless steel sight rods mounted to the outside corners of the front bumper extension.

The lights at the end of each rod will be activated when the running lights are activated.

The lights will also flash with the respective directional light.

LINE-X® COATING - FRONT BUMPER

Protective Line-X coating will be provided on the outside exterior of the top front bumper flange. It will not be sprayed on the underside of the flange. The protective coating will be red in color.

The lining will be properly installed by an authorized Line-X dealer.

CAB

The Arrow XT cab will be designed specifically for the fire service and will be manufactured by the chassis builder.

The cab will be built by the apparatus manufacturer in a facility located on the manufacturer's premises.

For reasons of structural integrity and enhanced occupant protection, the cab will be of heavy duty design, constructed to the following minimal standards.

The cab will have 12 main vertical structural members located in the A-pillar (front cab corner posts), Bpillar (side center posts), C-pillar (rear corner posts) and rear wall areas. The A-pillar will be constructed of solid A356-T5 aluminum. The B-pillar and C-pillar will be constructed from 0.25" heavy wall extrusions. The rear wall will be constructed of two (2) 4.00" x 2.00" outer aluminum extrusions and two (2) 3.00" x 2.00" inner aluminum extrusions. All main vertical structural members will run from the floor to 6.50" x 4.875" x 0.1875" thick roof extrusions to provide a cage-like structure with the

A-pillar and roof extrusions being welded into a 0.36" thick corner casting at each of the front corners of the roof assembly.

18 of 96

The front of the cab will be constructed of a 0.25" thick gusset plate, covered with a 0.090" front skin

(for a total thickness of 0.34"), and reinforced with a 95.00" wide x 11.13" deep x 0.50" thick cross-cab support located just below the windshield. The cross-cab support will run the full width of the cab and weld to each A-pillar, the 0.25" thick gusset plate and the front skin.

The cab floors will be constructed of 0.1875" thick aluminum plate and reinforced at the firewall with an additional 0.50" thick cross-floor support providing a total thickness of 0.6875" of structural material at the front floor area. The front floor area will also be supported with one (1) 0.50" plate bolted to one (1)

0.78" plate that also provides the mounting point for the cab lift. This tubing will run from the front of the cab to the 0.187" thick engine tunnel, creating the structure to support the forces created when lifting the cab.

The cab will be 94.75" wide (outside door skin to outside door skin) to maintain maximum maneuverability.

The forward cab section will have an overall height (from the cab roof to the ground) of approximately

103.00". The crew cab section will have a 10.00" raised roof, with an overall cab height of approximately 113.00". The overall height listed will be calculated based on a truck configuration with the lowest suspension weight ratings, the smallest diameter tires for the suspension, no water weight, no loose equipment weight, and no personnel weight. Larger tires, wheels, and suspension will increase the overall height listed.

The floor to ceiling height inside the crew cab will be 64.00" in the center and 69.25" in the outboard positions.

The crew cab floor will measure 40.12" from rear wall to the back side of engine tunnel.

The engine tunnel, at the rearward highest point (knee level), will measure 47.75" to the back wall.

The crew cab will be of the totally enclosed design with access doors constructed in the same manner as the driver and passenger doors.

The cab will be a full tilt cab style.

A 3-point cab mount system with rubber isolators will improve ride quality by isolating chassis vibrations from the cab.

INTERIOR CAB INSULATION

The cab will include 1.50" insulation in the ceiling and side walls, and 2.00" insulation in the rear wall to maximize acoustic absorption and thermal insulation.

FENDER LINERS

Full circular inner fender liners in the wheel wells will be provided.

19 of 96

WINDSHIELD

A curved safety glass windshield will be provided with over 2,754 square inches of clear viewing area.

The cab windshield will have bright trim inserts in the rubber molding holding the glass in place.

Economical windshield replacement glass will be readily available from local auto glass suppliers.

All cab glass will be tinted.

WINDSHIELD WIPERS

Two (2) electric windshield wipers with washer will be provided that meet FMVSS and SAE requirements.

The washer reservoir will be able to be filled without raising the cab.

GLOVE BOX

A glove box with a drop-down door will be installed in the front dash panel in front of the officer's position.

ENGINE TUNNEL

Engine hood side walls will be constructed of 0.50" aluminum. The top will be constructed of 0.19" aluminum and will be tapered at the top to allow for more driver and passenger elbow room.

The engine hood will be insulated for protection from heat and sound. The noise insulation keeps the dBA level within the limits stated in the current NFPA 1901 standards.

CAB REAR WALL EXTERIOR COVERING

The exterior surface of the rear wall of the cab will be overlaid with bright aluminum treadplate except for areas that are not typically visible when the cab is lowered.

CAB LIFT

A hydraulic cab lift system will be provided consisting of an electric powered hydraulic pump, dual lift cylinders, and necessary hoses and valves.

The hydraulic pump will have a manual override for backup in the event of electrical failure.

Lift controls will be on a panel located on the pump panel or front area of the body in a convenient location.

The engine will be easily accessible and capable of being removed with the cab tilted. The cab will be capable of tilting 45 degrees and 90 degrees with crane assist.

Cab will be locked down by a 2-point automatic spring-loaded hook mechanism that actuates after the cab has been lowered.

The hydraulic cylinders will be equipped with a velocity fuse that protects the cab from accidentally descending when the control is located in the tilt position.

20 of 96

For increased safety, a redundant mechanical stay arm will be provided that must be manually put in place on the driver side between the chassis and cab frame when the cab is in the raised position. This device will be manually stowed to its original position before the cab can be lowered.

Cab Lift Interlock

The cab lift system will be interlocked to the parking brake. The cab tilt mechanism will be active only when the parking brake is set and the ignition switch is in the on position. If the parking brake is released, the cab tilt mechanism will be disabled.

GRILLE

A bright finished aluminum mesh grille screen, inserted behind a bright finished grille surround, will be provided on the front center of the cab.

MIRRORS

A Velvac®, Model 2010, west coast mirror will be mounted on each side of the front cab door. Mirror dimensions will be 7.00" wide x 16.00" high, and will be heated and motorized. The shell will be bright annealed stainless steel.

Both mirrors will be heated and have a remote control that is convenient to the driver.

FRONT CROSS VIEW MIRROR

There will be one (1) 8.00" diameter eyeball mirror provided on the passenger side front corner of the cab. It will be mounted high, above the windshield. The mirror will provide the driver with a view of the front bumper and the front of the truck.

The mirror housing, tubing, clamps and hardware will be constructed of corrosion resistant stainless steel.

Mirror head will be K-10, EB50S-S, 8.00" stainless steel housing with three (3) arms.

DOORS

To enhance entry and egress to the cab, the forward cab doors will be a minimum of 37.50" wide x

61.75" high. The crew cab doors will be located on the sides of the cab and will be constructed in the same manner as the forward cab doors. The crew cab doors will measure a minimum of 34.88" wide x

71.75" high.

The forward cab and crew cab doors will be constructed of extruded aluminum with a nominal material thickness of 0.125". The exterior door skins will be constructed from 0.090" aluminum.

A flush mounted, chrome plated paddle type door handle will be provided on the exterior of each cab door. Each door will also be provided with an interior flush paddle handle.

The cab doors will be provided with both interior (rotary knob) and exterior (keyed) locks as required by

FMVSS 206. The locks will be capable of activating when the doors are open or closed. The doors will remain locked if locks are activated when the doors are opened, then closed.

21 of 96

A full length, heavy duty, stainless steel, piano-type hinge with a 0.38" pin and 11 gauge leaf will be provided on all cab doors. There will be double automotive-type rubber seals around the perimeter of the door framing and door edges to ensure a weather-tight fit.

A chrome grab handle will be provided on the inside of each cab and crew cab door.

The cab steps at each door location will be located below the cab doors and will be exposed to the exterior of the cab.

DOOR PANELS

There will be a full height brushed stainless steel door panel installed on the inside of all cab doors. The cab door panels will be removable without disconnecting door and window mechanisms.

MANUAL CAB DOOR WINDOWS

All cab entry doors will contain a conventional roll down window.

CAB STEPS

The forward cab and crew cab access steps will be a full size two (2) step design to provide largest possible stepping surfaces for safe ingress and egress. The bottom steps will be designed with a grip pattern punched into bright aluminum treadplate material to provide support, slip resistance, and drainage. The bottom steps will be a bolt-in design to minimize repair costs should they need to be replaced. The forward cab steps will be a minimum 24.75" wide, and the crew cab steps will be 21.25" wide with an 8.00" minimum depth. The inside cab steps will not exceed 18.00" in height and be limited to two (2) steps. Three (3) step entrance designs will not be acceptable due to safety concerns.

A slip-resistant handrail will be provided adjacent to each cab door opening to assist during cab ingress and egress.

STEP LIGHTS

For reduced overall maintenance costs compared to incandescent lighting, there will be four (4) white

LED step lights provided. The lights will be installed at each cab and crew cab door, one (1) per step.

The lights will be located in the driver side front doorstep, driver side crew cab doorstep, passenger side front doorstep and passenger side crew cab doorstep.

In order to ensure exceptional illumination, each light will provide a minimum of 25 foot-candles (fc) covering an entire 15.00" x 15.00" square placed 10.00" below the light and a minimum of 1.5 fc covering an entire 30.00" x 30.00" square at the same 10.00" distance below the light.

The lights will be activated when the adjacent door is opened.

FENDER CROWNS

Rubber fender crowns will be provided around the cab wheel openings.

Crowns will be black.

22 of 96

CAB INTERIOR

The left and right side dash and center console will be a flat faced design to provide easy maintenance and will be constructed out of painted aluminum.

The engine tunnel will be padded and covered with 46 ounce leather grain vinyl resistant to oil, grease and mildew.

The headliner will be installed in both forward and rear cab sections. Headliner material will be vinyl.

A sound barrier will be part of its composition. Material will be installed on aluminum sheet and securely fastened to interior cab ceiling.

Forward portion of cab headliner will provide easy access for servicing electrical wiring or for other maintenance needs without removing the entire unit.

CAB INTERIOR UPHOLSTERY

The cab interior upholstery will be dark silver gray.

CAB INTERIOR PAINT

A rich looking interior will be provided by painting all the metal surfaces inside the cab gray, vinyl texture paint.

CAB FLOOR

The cab and crew cab flooring will be constructed with bright aluminum treadplate.

CAB DEFROSTER

There will be a 41,000 BTU defroster in the cab located under the engine tunnel.

The defroster ventilation will be built into the design of the cab dash instrument panel and will be easily removable for maintenance.

The defroster will have a 3-speed blower and temperature controls accessible to the driver and officer.

The defroster ducts will be designed to provide maximum defrosting capabilities for the front cab windows.

CAB/CREW CAB HEATER

Two (2) auxiliary heaters with 32,000 BTU each will be provided in the cab. The heaters will have a 3speed blower and temperature controls accessible to the driver and officer. There will also be louvers located below the rear facing seat riser and below the driver and officer positions for airflow.

The heaters will be mounted, one (1) within each rear facing seat riser.

AIR CONDITIONING

A high-performance, customized air conditioning system will be furnished inside the cab and crew cab.

A 19.10 cubic inch compressor will be installed on the engine.

23 of 96

The air conditioning system will be capable of cooling the average cab temperature from 100 degrees

Fahrenheit to 75 degrees Fahrenheit at 50 percent relative humidity within 30 minutes. The cooling performance test will be run only after the cab has been heat soaked at 100 degrees Fahrenheit for a minimum of 4 hours.

A roof-mounted condenser that meets and exceeds the performance specification will be installed on the cab roof. Mounting the condenser below the cab or body would reduce the performance of the system and will not be acceptable.

An evaporator unit that meets and exceeds the performance specification will be installed in the cab, located in the center of the cab ceiling over the engine tunnel. The evaporator will include two (2) high performance cores and plenums with multiple outlets, one (1) plenum directed to the front and one (1) plenum directed to the rear of the cab.

The evaporator unit will be provided with adjustable air outlets strategically located to direct air flow to the driver, officer and crew cab area.

All hose used will be class 1 type to reduce moisture ingression into the air conditioning system.

The air conditioner refrigerant will be R-134A and will be installed by a certified technician.

The air conditioner will be controlled by a single electronic control panel. For ease of operation, the control panel will include variable adjustment for temperature and fan control and be conveniently located on the dash in clear view of the driver. The control panel will include robust knobs for both fan speed and temperature adjustment.

SUN VISORS

Two (2) smoked Lexan™ sun visors provided. The sun visors will be located above the windshield with one (1) mounted on each side of the cab.

There will be no retention bracket provided to help secure each sun visor in the stowed position.

GRAB HANDLE

A black rubber covered grab handle will be mounted on the lower portion of the driver's side cab entrance to assist in entering the cab. The grab handle will be securely mounted to the post area between the door and steering wheel column.

A long rubber grab handle will be mounted on the dash board in front of the officer.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT LIGHT

An engine compartment light will be installed under the engine hood, of which the switch is an integral part. Light will have a .125" diameter hole in its lens to prevent moisture retention.

24 of 96

ACCESS TO ENGINE DIPSTICKS

For access to the engine oil and transmission fluid dipsticks, there will be a door on the engine tunnel, inside the crew cab. The door will be on the rear wall of the engine tunnel, on the vertical surface. The door will be 17.75" wide x 12.75" high and be flush with the wall of the engine tunnel.

The engine oil dipstick will allow for checking only. The transmission dipstick will allow for both checking and filling. An additional port will be provided for filling the engine oil.

The door will have a rubber seal for thermal and acoustic insulation. One (1) flush latch will be provided on the access door.

CAB SAFETY SYSTEM

The cab will be provided with a safety system designed to protect occupants in the event of a side roll or frontal impact, and will include the following:

A supplemental restraint system (SRS) sensor will be installed on a structural cab member behind the instrument panel. The SRS sensor will perform real time diagnostics of all critical subsystems and will record sensory inputs immediately before and during a side roll or frontal impact event.

A slave SRS sensor will be installed in the cab to provide capacity for eight (8) crew cab seating positions.

A fault-indicating light will be provided on the vehicle's instrument panel allowing the driver to monitor the operational status of the SRS system.

A driver side front air bag will be mounted in the steering wheel and will be designed to protect the head and upper torso of the occupant, when used in combination with the 3-point seat belt.

A passenger side knee bolster air bag will be mounted in the modesty panel below the dash panel and will be designed to protect the legs of the occupant, when used in combination with the 3point seat belt.

Air curtains will be provided in the outboard bolster of outboard seat backs to provide a cushion between occupant and the cab wall.

Suspension seats will be provided with devices to retract them to the lowest travel position during a side roll or frontal impact event.

Seat belts will be provided with pre-tensioners to remove slack from the seat belt during a side roll or frontal impact event.

FRONTAL IMPACT PROTECTION

The SRS system will provide protection during a frontal or oblique impact event. The system will activate when the vehicle decelerates at a predetermined G force known to cause injury to the occupants.

The cab and chassis will have been subjected, via third party test facility, to a crash impact during frontal and oblique impact testing. Testing included all major chassis and cab components such as mounting straps for fuel and air tanks, suspension mounts, front suspension components, rear suspensions components, frame rail cross members, engine and transmission and their mounts, pump

25 of 96

house and mounts, frame extensions and body mounts. The testing provided configuration specific information used to optimize the timing for firing the safety restraint system. The sensor will activate the pyrotechnic devices when the correct crash algorithm, wave form, is detected.

The SRS system will deploy the following components in the event of a frontal or oblique impact event:

Driver side front air bag

Passenger side knee bolster air bag

Air curtains mounted in the outboard bolster of outboard seat backs

Suspension seats will be retracted to the lowest travel position

Seat belts will be pre-tensioned to firmly hold the occupant in place

SIDE ROLL PROTECTION

The SRS system will provide protection during a fast or slow 90 degree roll to the side, in which the vehicle comes to rest on its side. The system will analyze the vehicle's angle and rate of roll to determine the optimal activation of the advanced occupant restraints.

The SRS system will deploy the following components in the event of a side roll:

Air curtains mounted in the outboard bolster of outboard seat backs

Suspension seats will be retracted to the lowest travel position

Seat belts will be pre-tensioned to firmly hold the occupant in place

SEATING CAPACITY

The seating capacity in the cab will be six (6).

DRIVER SEAT

A seat will be provided in the cab for the driver. The seat design will be a cam action type, with air suspension. For increased convenience, the seat will include a manual control to adjust the horizontal position (6.00" travel). The manual horizontal control will be a towel-bar style located below the forward part of the seat cushion. To provide flexibility for multiple driver configurations, the seat will have an adjustable reclining back. The seat back will be a high back style with side bolster pads for maximum support. For optimal comfort, the seat will be provided with 17.00" deep foam cushions designed with EVC (elastomeric vibration control).

The seat will include the following features incorporated into the side roll protection system:

Side air curtain will be mounted integral to the outboard bolster of the seat back. The air curtain will be covered by a decorative panel when in the stowed position.

A suspension seat safety system will be included. When activated in the event of a side roll, this system will pretension the seat belt and retract the seat to its lowest travel position.

The seat will be furnished with a 3-point, shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt tongue will be stored at waist position for quick application by the seat occupant. The seat belt receptacle will be provided on a

26 of 96

cable conveniently nested next to the seat cushion, providing easy accessibility. The seat belt will be furnished with dual automatic retractors that will provide ease of operation in the normal seating position.

OFFICER SEAT

A seat will be provided in the cab for the passenger. The seat will be a fixed type, with no suspension.

For optimal comfort, the seat will be provided with 17.00" deep foam cushions designed with EVC

(elastomeric vibration control). To ensure safe operation, the seat will be equipped with seat belt sensors in the seat cushion and belt receptacle that will activate an alarm indicating a seat is occupied but not buckled.

The seat back will be an SCBA back style with 5 degree fixed recline angle. The SCBA cavity will be adjustable from front to rear in 1.00" increments, to accommodate different sized SCBA cylinders.

Moving the SCBA cavity will be accomplished by unbolting, relocating, and re-bolting it in the desired location.

The seat will include the following features incorporated into the side roll protection system:

Side air curtain will be mounted integral to the outboard bolster of the seat back. The air curtain will be covered by a decorative panel when in the stowed position.

A seat safety system will be included. When activated, this system will pretension the seat belt.

The seat will be furnished with a 3-point, shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt tongue will be stored at waist position for quick application by the seat occupant. The seat belt receptacle will be provided on a cable conveniently nested next to the seat cushion, providing easy accessibility. The seat belt will be furnished with dual automatic retractors that will provide ease of operation in the normal seating position.

RADIO COMPARTMENT

A radio compartment will be provided under the officer's seat.

The inside compartment dimensions will be 14.00" wide x 7.50" high x 14.50" deep.

A drop-down door with a chrome plated lift and turn latch will be provided for access.

The compartment will be constructed of smooth aluminum and painted to match the cab interior.

REAR FACING DRIVER SIDE OUTBOARD SEAT

There will be one (1) rear facing seat provided at the driver side outboard position in the crew cab. For optimal comfort, the seat will be provided with 15.00" deep foam cushions designed with EVC

(elastomeric vibration control). To ensure safe operation, the seat will be equipped with seat belt sensors in the seat cushion and belt receptacle that will activate an alarm indicating a seat is occupied but not buckled.

27 of 96

The seat back will be an SCBA back style with 5 degree fixed recline angle. The SCBA cavity will be adjustable from front to rear in 1.00" increments, to accommodate different sized SCBA cylinders.

Moving the SCBA cavity will be accomplished by unbolting, relocating, and re-bolting it in the desired location.

The seat will include the following features incorporated into the side roll protection system:

Side air curtain will be mounted integral to the outboard bolster of the seat back. The air curtain will be covered by a decorative panel when in the stowed position.

A seat safety system will be included. When activated this system will pretension the seat belt around the occupant to firmly hold them in place in the event of a side roll.

The seat will be furnished with a 3-point, shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt tongue will be stored at waist position for quick application by the seat occupant. The seat belt receptacle will be provided on a cable conveniently nested next to the seat cushion, providing easy accessibility. The seat belt will be furnished with dual automatic retractors that will provide ease of operation in the normal seating position.

REAR FACING PASSENGER SIDE OUTBOARD SEAT

There will be one (1) rear facing seat provided at the passenger side outboard position in the crew cab.

For optimal comfort, the seat will be provided with 15.00" deep foam cushions designed with EVC

(elastomeric vibration control). To ensure safe operation, the seat will be equipped with seat belt sensors in the seat cushion and belt receptacle that will activate an alarm indicating a seat is occupied but not buckled.

The seat back will be an SCBA back style with 5 degree fixed recline angle. The SCBA cavity will be adjustable from front to rear in 1.00" increments, to accommodate different sized SCBA cylinders.

Moving the SCBA cavity will be accomplished by unbolting, relocating, and re-bolting it in the desired location.

The seat will include the following features incorporated into the side roll protection system:

Side air curtain will be mounted integral to the outboard bolster of the seat back. The air curtain will be covered by a decorative panel when in the stowed position.

A seat safety system will be included. When activated this system will pretension the seat belt around the occupant to firmly hold them in place in the event of a side roll.

The seat will be furnished with a 3-point, shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt tongue will be stored at waist position for quick application by the seat occupant. The seat belt receptacle will be provided on a cable conveniently nested next to the seat cushion, providing easy accessibility. The seat belt will be furnished with dual automatic retractors that will provide ease of operation in the normal seating position.

28 of 96

FORWARD FACING DRIVER SIDE EMS COMPARTMENT

A forward facing EMS compartment will be provided in the crew cab located at the driver side outboard position.

The compartment will be 17.00" wide x 54.00" high x 14.00" deep with one (1) Gortite roll up door, non-locking with anodized finish. The clear door opening of the compartment will be 13.00" wide x

44.00" high.

The compartment will be constructed of smooth aluminum, and painted to match the cab interior.

Compartment Light

There will betwo (2) white LED strip lights, one (1) each side of the compartment opening. The lights will be controlled by an automatic door switch.

FORWARD FACING CENTER SEATS

There will be two (2) forward facing seats provided at the center position in the crew cab. For optimal comfort, the seats will be provided with 15.00" deep foam cushions designed with EVC (elastomeric vibration control). To ensure safe operation, the seats will be equipped with seat belt sensors in the seat cushion and belt receptacle that will activate an alarm indicating a seat is occupied but not buckled.

The seat backs will be an SCBA style with 90 degree back. The SCBA cavity will be adjustable from front to rear in 1.00" increments to accommodate different sized SCBA cylinders. Moving the SCBA cavity will be accomplished by unbolting, relocating, and re-bolting it in the desired location.

The seats will include the following feature incorporated into the side roll protection system:

A seat safety system will be included. When activated, this system will pretension the seat belts around the occupants to firmly hold them in place in the event of a side roll.

The seats will be furnished with 3-point shoulder type seat belts. The seat belt tongue will be stored at waist position for quick application by the seat occupant. The seat belt receptacle will be provided on a cable conveniently nested next to the seat cushion, providing easy accessibility. The seat belts will be furnished with dual automatic retractors that will provide ease of operation in the normal seating position.

FORWARD FACING PASSENGER SIDE EMS COMPARTMENT

A forward facing EMS compartment will be provided in the crew cab located at the passenger side outboard position.

The compartment will be 17.00" wide x 54.00" high x 14.00" deep with one (1) Gortite roll up door, non-locking with anodized finish. The clear door opening of the compartment will be 13.00" wide x

44.00" high.

The compartment will be constructed of smooth aluminum, and painted to match the cab interior.

29 of 96

Compartment Light

There will be two (2) white LED strip lights, one (1) each side of the compartment opening. The lights will be controlled by an automatic door switch.

SHELVING

There will be two (2) shelves provided. Each shelf will be constructed of 0.090" aluminum with a 1.25" up-turned lip. Shelving will be infinitely adjustable by means of a threaded tightener sliding in a track.

The location will be one (1) shelf in the driver side forward facing EMS cabinet and one (1) shelf in the passenger side forward facing EMS cabinet.

SEAT UPHOLSTERY

All seat upholstery will be black Turnout Tuff material.

AIR BOTTLE HOLDERS

All SCBA type seats in the cab will have a "Hands-Free" auto clamp style bracket in its backrest. For efficiency and convenience, the bracket will include an automatic spring clamp that allows the occupant to store the SCBA bottle by simply pushing it into the seat back. For protection of all occupants in the cab, in the event of an accident, the inertial components within the clamp will constrain the SCBA bottle in the seat and will exceed the NFPA standard of 9G. Bracket designs with manual restraints (belts, straps, buckles) that could be inadvertently left unlocked and allow the SCBA to move freely within the cab during an accident, will not be acceptable.

There will be a quantity of five (5) SCBA brackets.

SEAT BELTS

All seating positions in the cab and crew cab will have red seat belts.

The belts will also include the Ready Reach® D-loop assembly to the shoulder belt system. The Ready

Reach feature adds an extender arm to the D-loop location placing the D-loop in a closer, easier to reach location.

SHOULDER HARNESS HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT

All seating positions furnished with 3-point shoulder type seat belts will include a height adjustment.

This adjustment will optimize the belts effectiveness and comfort for the seated firefighter.

SEAT BELT MONITORING SYSTEM

A seat belt monitoring system (SBMS) will be provided. The SBMS will be capable of monitoring up to ten (10) seat positions indicating the status of each seat position with a green or red LED indicator as follows:

Seat Occupied & Buckled = Green

Seat Occupied & Unbuckled = Red

No Occupant & Buckled = Red

30 of 96

No Occupant & Unbuckled = Not Illuminated

Audible Alarm

The SBMS will include an audible alarm that will be activated when a red illumination condition exists and the parking brake is released, or a red illumination condition exists and the transmission is not in park.

HELMET STORAGE

Helmet storage will be located in a fully enclosed and latched cab compartment.

CAB DOME LIGHTS

There will be four (4) dual LED dome lights with black bezels provided. Two (2) lights will be mounted above the inside shoulder of the driver and officer and two (2) lights will be installed and located, one

(1) on each side of the crew cab.

The color of the LED's will be red and white.

The white LED's will be controlled by the door switches and the lens switch.

The color LED's will be controlled by the lens switch.

In order to ensure exceptional illumination, each white LED dome light will provide a minimum of 10.1 foot-candles (fc) covering an entire 20.00" x 20.00" square seating position when mounted 40.00" above the seat.

OVERHEAD MAP LIGHTS

There will be two (2) white halogen, round adjustable map lights installed in the cab:

One (1) overhead in front of the driving position.

One (1) overhead in front of the passenger's position.

Each light will include a switch on the light housing.

The light switches will be connected directly to the battery switched power.

HAND HELD LIGHT

There will be two (2) Streamlight LiteBox lights with an orange thermoplastic body provided. The location will be TBD.

CAB INSTRUMENTATION

The cab instrument panel will consist of gauges, an LCD display, telltale indicator lights, alarms, control switches, and a diagnostic panel. The function of instrument panel controls and switches will be identified by a label adjacent to each item. Actuation of the headlight switch will illuminate the labels in low light conditions. Telltale indicator lamps will not be illuminated unless necessary. The cab instruments and controls will be conveniently located within the forward cab section directly forward of

31 of 96

the driver. Gauge and switch panels will be designed to be removable for ease of service and low cost of ownership.

CAB INTERIOR

The wrap-around style high impact ABS plastic cab dash fascia will be designed to provide unobstructed visibility to instrumentation. The dash layout will provide the driver with a quick reference to gauges that allows more time to focus on the road.

GAUGES

The gauge panel will include the following ten (10) ivory gauges with chrome bezels to monitor vehicle performance:

Voltmeter Gauge (Volts): o Low volts (11.8 VDC)

 Amber indicator on gauge assembly with alarm o High volts (15 VDC)

 Amber indicator on gauge assembly with alarm o Very low volts (11.3 VDC)

 Amber indicator on gauge assembly with alarm o Very high volts (16 VDC)

 Amber indicator on gauge assembly with alarm

Tachometer (RPM)

Speedometer (Primary (outside) MPH, Secondary (inside) Km/H)

Fuel Level Gauge (Empty - Full in fractions): o Low fuel (1/8 full)

 Amber indicator on gauge assembly with alarm o Very low fuel (1/32) fuel

 Amber indicator on gauge assembly with alarm

Engine Oil Pressure Gauge (PSI): o Low oil pressure to activate engine warning lights and alarms

 Red indicator on gauge assembly with alarm

Front Air Pressure Gauge (PSI): o Low air pressure to activate warning lights and alarm

 Red indicator on gauge assembly with alarm

Rear Air Pressure Gauge (PSI): o Low air pressure to activate warning lights and alarm.

 Red indicator on gauge assembly with alarm

Transmission Oil Temperature Gauge (Fahrenheit):

High transmission oil temperature activates warning lights and alarm o Amber indicator on gauge assembly with alarm

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge (Fahrenheit):

32 of 96

o High engine temperature activates an engine warning light and alarm

 Red indicator on gauge assembly with alarm

Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level Gauge (Empty - Full in fractions): o Low fluid (1/8 full)

 Amber indicator on gauge assembly with alarm

All gauges and gauge indicators will perform prove out at initial power-up to ensure proper performance.

INDICATOR LAMPS

To promote safety, the following telltale indicator lamps will be integral to the gauge assembly and are located above and below the center gauges. The indicator lamps will be "dead-front" design that is only visible when active. The colored indicator lights will have descriptive text or symbols.

The following amber telltale lamps will be present:

Low coolant

Trac cntl (traction control) (where applicable)

Check engine

Check trans (check transmission)

Aux brake overheat (Auxiliary brake overheat)

Air rest (air restriction)

Caution (triangle symbol)

Water in fuel

DPF (engine diesel particulate filter regeneration)

Trailer ABS (where applicable)

Wait to start (where applicable)

HET (engine high exhaust temperature) (where applicable)

ABS (antilock brake system)

MIL (engine emissions system malfunction indicator lamp) (where applicable)

SRS (supplemental restraint system) fault (where applicable)

DEF (low diesel exhaust fluid level)

The following red telltale lamps will be present:

Warning (stop sign symbol)

Seat belt

Parking brake

Stop engine

Rack down

The following green telltale lamps will be provided:

33 of 96

Left turn

Right turn

Battery on

The following blue telltale lamp will be provided:

High beam

ALARMS

Audible steady tone warning alarm: A steady audible tone alarm will be provided whenever a warning message is present.

Audible pulsing tone caution alarm: A pulsing audible tone alarm (chime/chirp) will be provided whenever a caution message is present without a warning message being present.

Alarm silence: Any active audible alarm will be able to be silenced by holding the ignition switch at the top position for three (3) to five (5) seconds. For improved safety, silenced audible alarms will intermittently chirp every 30 seconds until the alarm condition no longer exists. The intermittent chirp will act as a reminder to the operator that a caution or warning condition still exists. Any new warning or caution condition will enable the steady or pulsing tones respectively.

INDICATOR LAMP AND ALARM PROVE-OUT

Telltale indicators and alarms will perform prove-out at initial power-up to ensure proper performance.

CONTROL SWITCHES

For ease of use, the following controls will be provided immediately adjacent to the cab instrument panel within easy reach of the driver:

Emergency master switch: A molded plastic push button switch with integral indicator lamp will be provided. Pressing the switch will activate emergency response lights and siren control. A green lamp on the switch provides indication that the emergency master mode is active. Pressing the switch again disables the emergency master mode.

Headlight / Parking light switch: A three (3)-position maintained rocker switch will be provided.

The first switch position will deactivate all parking lights and the headlights. The second switch position will activate the parking lights. The third switch position will activate the headlights.

Panel back lighting intensity control switch: A three (3)-position momentary rocker switch will be provided. The first switch position decreases the panel back lighting intensity to a minimum level as the switch is held. The second switch position is the default position that does not affect the back lighting intensity. The third switch position increases the panel back lighting intensity to a maximum level as the switch is held.

The following standard controls will be integral to the gauge assembly and are located below the right hand gauges. All switches have backlit labels for low light applications:

34 of 96

High idle engagement switch: A two (2)-position momentary rocker switch with integral indicator lamp will be provided. The first switch position is the default switch position. The second switch position will activate and deactivate the high idle function when pressed and released. The "Ok To Engage High Idle" indicator lamp must be active for the high idle function to engage. A green indicator lamp integral to the high idle engagement switch will indicate when the high idle function is engaged.

"Ok To Engage High Idle" indicator lamp: A green indicator light will be provided next to the high idle activation switch to indicate that the interlocks have been met to allow high idle engagement.

The following standard controls will be provided adjacent to the cab gauge assembly within easy reach of the driver. All switches will have backlit labels for low light applications.

Ignition switch: A three (3)-position maintained/momentary rocker switch will be provided.

The first switch position will deactivate vehicle ignition. The second switch position will activate vehicle ignition. The third momentary position will disable the Command Zone audible alarm if held for three (3) to five (5) seconds. A green indicator lamp will be activated with vehicle ignition.

Engine start switch: A two (2)-position momentary rocker switch will be provided. The first switch position is the default switch position. The second switch position will activate the vehicle's engine. The switch actuator is designed to prevent accidental activation.

4-way hazard switch: A two (2)-position maintained rocker switch will be provided. The first switch position will deactivate the 4-way hazard switch function. The second switch position will activate the 4-way hazard function. The switch actuator will be red and includes the international 4-way hazard symbol.

Turn signal arm: A self-canceling turn signal with high beam headlight and windshield wiper/washer controls will be provided. The windshield wiper control will have high, low, and intermittent modes.

Parking brake control: An air actuated push/pull park brake control valve will be provided.

Chassis horn control: Activation of the chassis horn control will be provided through the center of the steering wheel.

CUSTOM SWITCH PANELS

The design of cab instrumentation will allow for emergency lighting and other switches to be placed within easy reach of the operator thus improving safety. There will be positions for up to three (3) switch panels in the overhead console on the driver's side, up to four (4) switch panels in the engine tunnel console facing the driver, up to three (3) switch panels in the overhead console on the officer's side and up to three (3) switch panels in the engine tunnel rear facing console accessible to both driver and officer. All switches will have backlit labels for low light applications.

DIAGNOSTIC PANEL

A diagnostic panel will be accessible while standing on the ground and located inside the driver's side door left of the steering column. The diagnostic panel will allow diagnostic tools such as computers to

35 of 96

connect to various vehicle systems for improved troubleshooting providing a lower cost of ownership.

Diagnostic switches will allow engine and ABS systems to provide blink codes should a problem exist.

The diagnostic panel will include the following:

Engine diagnostic port

Transmission diagnostic port

ABS diagnostic port

SRS diagnostic port (where applicable)

Command Zone USB diagnostic port

Engine diagnostic switch (blink codes flashed on check engine telltale indicator)

ABS diagnostic switch (blink codes flashed on ABS telltale indicator)

Diesel particulate filter regeneration switch (where applicable)

Diesel particulate filter regeneration inhibit switch (where applicable)

CAB LCD DISPLAY

A digital four (4)-row by 20-character dot matrix display will be integral to the gauge panel. The display will be capable of showing simple graphical images as well as text. The display will be split into three (3) sections. Each section will have a dedicated function. The upper left section will display the outside ambient temperature. The upper right section will display odometer, trip mileage, PTO hours, fuel consumption, engine hours, and other configuration specific information. The bottom section will display INFO, CAUTION, and WARNING messages. Text messages will automatically activate to describe the cause of an audible caution or warning alarm. The LCD will be capable of displaying multiple text messages should more than one caution or warning condition exist.

AIR RESTRICTION INDICATOR

A high air restriction warning indicator light LCD message with amber warning indicator and audible alarm will be provided.

"DO NOT MOVE APPARATUS" INDICATOR

A flashing red indicator light, located in the driving compartment, will be illuminated automatically per the current NFPA requirements. The light will be labeled "Do Not Move Apparatus If Light Is On."

The same circuit that activates the Do Not Move Apparatus indicator will activate a pulsing alarm when the parking brake is released.

DO NOT MOVE TRUCK MESSAGES

Messages will be displayed on the Command Zone™, color display located within sight of the driver whenever the Do Not Move Truck light is active. The messages will designate the item or items not in the stowed for vehicle travel position (parking brake disengaged).

The following messages will be displayed (where applicable):

Do Not Move Truck

36 of 96

DS Cab Door Open (Driver Side Cab Door Open)

PS Cab Door Open (Passenger's Side Cab Door Open)

DS Crew Cab Door Open (Driver Side Crew Cab Door Open)

PS Crew Cab Door Open (Passenger's Side Crew Cab Door Open)

DS Body Door Open (Driver Side Body Door Open)

PS Body Door Open (Passenger's Side Body Door Open)

Rear Body Door Open

DS Ladder Rack Down (Driver Side Ladder Rack Down)

PS Ladder Rack Down (Passenger Side Ladder Rack Down)

Deck Gun Not Stowed

Lt Tower Not Stowed (Light Tower Not Stowed)

Hatch Door Open

Fold Tank Not Stowed (Fold-A-Tank Not Stowed)

Aerial Not Stowed (Aerial Device Not Stowed)

Stabilizer Not Stowed

Steps Not Stowed

Handrail Not Stowed

Any other device that is opened, extended, or deployed that creates a hazard or is likely to cause major damage to the apparatus if the apparatus is moved will be displayed as a caution message after the parking brake is disengaged.

SWITCH PANELS

The emergency light switch panel will have a master switch for ease of use plus individual switches for selective control. Each switch panel will contain eight (8) membrane-type switches each rated for one million (1,000,000) cycles. Panels containing less than eight (8) switch assignments will include nonfunctioning black appliqués. Documentation will be provided by the manufacturer indicating the rated cycle life of the switches. The switch panel(s) will be located in the overhead position above the windshield on the driver side overhead to allow for easy access.

The switches will be membrane-type and also act as an integral indicator light. For quick, visual indication the entire surface of the switch will be illuminated white whenever back lighting is activated and illuminated red whenever the switch is active. For ease of use, a two (2)-ply, scratch resistant laser engraved Gravoply label indicating the use of each switch will be placed in the center of the switch. The label will allow light to pass through the letters for ease of use in low light conditions.

WIPER CONTROL

For simple operation and easy reach, the windshield wiper control will be an integral part of the directional light lever located on the steering column. The wiper control will include high and low wiper speed settings, a one (1)-speed intermittent wiper control and windshield washer switch. The

37 of 96

control will have a "return to park" provision, which allows the wipers to return to the stored position when the wipers are not in use.

INFORMATION CENTER

An information center employing a 7.00" diagonal touch screen color LCD display will be encased in an

ABS plastic housing.

The information center will have the following specifications:

Operate in temperatures from -40 to 185 degrees Fahrenheit

An Optical Gel will be placed between the LCD and protective lens

Five weather resistant user interface switches

Grey with black accents

Sunlight Readable

Linux operating system

Minimum of 1000nits rated display

Display can be changed to an available foreign language

A LCD display integral to the cab gauge panel will be included as outlined in the cab instrumentation area.

Programmed to read US Customary

GENERAL SCREEN DESIGN

Where possible, background colors will be used to provide "At a Glance" vehicle information. If information provided on a screen is within acceptable limits, a green background will be used.

If a caution or warning situation arises the following will occur:

An amber background/text color will indicate a caution condition

A red background/text color will indicate a warning condition

The information center will utilize an "Alert Center" to display text messages for audible alarm tones. The text messages will be written to identify the item(s) causing the audible alarm to sound. If more than one (1) text message occurs, the messages will cycle every second until the problem(s) have been resolved. The background color for the "Alert Center" will change to indicate the severity of the "warning" message. If a warning and a caution condition occur simultaneously, the red background color will be shown for all alert center messages.

A label for each button will exist. The label will indicate the function for each active button for each screen. Buttons that are not utilized on specific screens will have a button label with no text or symbol.

HOME/TRANSIT SCREEN

This screen will display the following:

Vehicle Mitigation (if equipped)

38 of 96

Water Level (if equipped)

Foam Level (if equipped)

Seat Belt Monitoring Screen

Tire Pressure Monitoring (if equipped)

Digital Speedometer

Active Alarms

ON SCENE SCREEN

This screen will display the following and will be auto activated with pump engaged (if equipped):

Battery Voltage

Fuel

Oil Pressure

Coolant Temperature

RPM

Water Level (if equipped)

Foam Level (if equipped)

Foam Concentration (if equipped)

Water Flow Rate (if equipped)

Water Used (if equipped)

Active Alarms

VIRTUAL BUTTONS

There will be four (4) virtual switch panel screens that match the overhead and lower lighting and

HVAC switch panels.

PAGE SCREEN

The page screen will display the following and allow the user to progress into other screens for further functionality:

Diagnostics o Faults

 Listed by order of occurrence

 Allows to sort by system o Interlock

 Throttle Interlocks

 Pump Interlocks (if equipped)

 Aerial Interlocks (if equipped)

 PTO Interlocks (if equipped) o Load Manager

39 of 96

 A list of items to be load managed will be provided. The list will provide a description of the load.

 The lower the priority numbers the earlier the device will be shed should a low voltage condition occur.

 The screen will indicate if a load has been shed (disabled) or not shed.

 "At a glance" color features are utilized on this screen. o Systems

 Command Zone

Module type and ID number

Module Version

Input or output number

Circuit number connected to that input or output

Status of the input or output

Power and Constant Current module diagnostic information

 Foam (if equipped)

 Pressure Controller (if equipped)

 Generator Frequency (if equipped) o Live Data

 General Truck Data

Maintenance o Engine oil and filter o Transmission oil and filter o Pump oil (if equipped) o Foam (if equipped) o Aerial (if equipped)

Setup o Clock Setup o Date & Time

 12 or 24 hour format

 Set time and date o Backlight

 Daytime

 Night time

 Sensitivity o Unit Selection o Home Screen o Virtual Button Setup o On Scene Screen Setup o Configure Video Mode

 Set Video Contrast

40 of 96

 Set Video Color

 Set Video Tint

Do Not Move o The screen will indicate the approximate location and type of item that is open or is not stowed for travel. The actual status of the following devices will be indicate

 Driver Side Cab Door

 Passenger's Side Cab Door

 Driver Side Crew Cab Door

 Passenger's Side Crew Cab Door

 Driver Side Body Doors

 Passenger's Side Body Doors

 Rear Body Door(s)

 Ladder Rack (if applicable)

 Deck Gun (if applicable)

 Light Tower (if applicable)

 Hatch Door (if applicable)

 Stabilizers (if applicable)

 Steps (if applicable)

Notifications o View Active Alarms

 Shows a list of all active alarms including date and time of the occurrence is shown with each alarm

 Silence Alarms - All alarms are silenced

Timer Screen

HVAC (if equipped)

Tire Information (if equipped)

Button functions and button labels may change with each screen.

VEHICLE DATA RECORDER

A vehicle data recorder (VDR) will be provided. The VDR will be capable of reading and storing vehicle information.

The information stored on the VDR can be downloaded through a USB port mounted in a convenient location determined by cab model. A CD provided with the apparatus will include the programming to download the information from the VDR. A USB cable can be used to connect the VDR to a laptop to retrieve required information.

The vehicle data recorder will be capable of recording the following data via hardwired and/or CAN inputs:

Vehicle Speed - MPH

41 of 96

Acceleration - MPH/sec

Deceleration - MPH/sec

Engine Speed - RPM

Engine Throttle Position - % of Full Throttle

ABS Event - On/Off

Seat Occupied Status - Yes/No by Position (7-12 Seating Capacity)

Seat Belt Buckled Status - Yes/No by Position (7-12 Seating Capacity)

Master Optical Warning Device Switch - On/Off

Time - 24 Hour Time

Date - Year/Month/Day

VEHICLE CAMERA SYSTEM

There will be a color vehicle camera system provided with the following:

One (1) camera located at the rear of the apparatus, pointing rearward, displayed automatically with the vehicle in reverse

The camera images will be displayed on the driver's Command Zone™, color display. Audio from the microphone on the active camera will be not provided.

The following components will be included:

One (1) SV-CW134639CAI, camera

One (1) amplified speaker (if applicable)

All necessary cables

ELECTRICAL POWER CONTROL SYSTEM

The primary power distribution will be located forward of the officer's seating position and be easily accessible while standing on the ground for simplified maintenance and troubleshooting. Additional electrical distribution centers will be provided throughout the vehicle to house the vehicle's electrical power, circuit protection, and control components. The electrical distribution centers will be located strategically throughout the vehicle to minimize wire length. For ease of maintenance, all electrical distribution centers will be easily accessible. All distribution centers containing fuses, circuit breakers and/or relays will be easily accessible.

Distribution centers located throughout the vehicle will contain battery powered studs for supplying customer installed equipment thus providing a lower cost of ownership.

Circuit protection devices, which conform to SAE standards, will be utilized to protect electrical circuits. All circuit protection devices will be rated per NFPA requirements to prevent wire and component damage when subjected to extreme current overload. General protection circuit breakers

42 of 96

will be Type-I automatic reset (continuously resetting). When required, automotive type fuses will be utilized to protect electronic equipment. Control relays and solenoid will have a direct current rating of

125 percent of the maximum current for which the circuit is protected per NFPA.

SOLID-STATE CONTROL SYSTEM

A solid-state electronics based control system will be utilized to achieve advanced operation and control of the vehicle components. A fully computerized vehicle network will consist of electronic modules located near their point of use to reduce harness lengths and improve reliability. The control system will comply with SAE J1939-11 recommended practices.

The control system will operate as a master-slave system whereas the main control module instructs all other system components. The system will contain patented Mission Critical software that maintains critical vehicle operations in the unlikely event of a main controller error. The system will utilize a Real

Time Operating System (RTOS) fully compliant with OSEK/VDX™ specifications providing a lower cost of ownership.

For increased reliability and simplified use the control system modules will include the following attributes:

Green LED indicator light for module power

Red LED indicator light for network communication stability status

Control system self test at activation and continually throughout vehicle operation

No moving parts due to transistor logic

Software logic control for NFPA mandated safety interlocks and indicators

Integrated electrical system load management without additional components

Integrated electrical load sequencing system without additional components

Customized control software to the vehicle's configuration

Factory and field re programmable to accommodate changes to the vehicle's operating parameters

Complete operating and troubleshooting manuals

USB connection to the main control module for advanced troubleshooting

To assure long life and operation in a broad range of environmental conditions, the solid-state control system modules will meet the following specifications:

Module circuit board will meet SAE J771 specifications

Operating temperature from -40C to +70C

Storage temperature from -40C to +70C

Vibration to 50g

IP67 rated enclosure (Totally protected against dust and also protected against the effect of temporary immersion between 15 centimeters and one (1) meter)

43 of 96

Operating voltage from eight (8) volts to 16 volts DC

The main controller will activate status indicators and audible alarms designed to provide warning of problems before they become critical.

CIRCUIT PROTECTION AND CONTROL DIAGRAM

Copies of all job-specific, computer network input and output (I/O) connections will be provided with each chassis. The sheets will indicate the function of each module connection point, circuit protection information (where applicable), wire numbers, wire colors and load management information.

ON-BOARD ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS

Advanced on-board diagnostic messages will be provided to support rapid troubleshooting of the electrical power and control system. The diagnostic messages will be displayed on the information center located at the driver's position.

The on-board information center will include the following diagnostic information:

Text description of active warning or caution alarms

Simplified warning indicators

Amber caution indication with intermittent alarm

Red warning indication with steady tone alarm

TECH MODULE WITH WIFI

An in cab module will provide Wifi wireless interface and data logging capability. (No Exception) The

Wifi interface will comply with IEEE 802.11 b/g/n capabilities while communicating at 2.4 Gigahertz.

The module will provide an external antenna connection allowing a line of site communication range of up to 300 feet with a roof mounted antenna.

The module will transmit a password protected web page to a wifi enabled device (i.e. most smart phones, tablets or laptops) allowing two levels of user interaction. The firefighter level will allow vehicle monitoring of the vehicle and firefighting systems on the apparatus. The technician level will allow diagnostic access to inputs and outputs installed on the Command Zone™, control and information system.

The data logging capability will record faults from the engine, transmission, ABS and Command Zone, control and information systems as they occur. No other data will be recorded at the time the fault occurs. The data logger will provide up to 2 Gigabytes of data storage.

A USB connection will be provided on the Tech Module. It will provide a means to download data logger information and update software in the device.

PROGNOSTICS

A software based vehicle tool will be provided to predict remaining life of the vehicles critical fluid and events (no exceptions).

44 of 96

The system will send automatic indications to the Command Zone, color display and/or wireless enabled device to proactively alert of upcoming service intervals.

Prognostics will include:

Engine oil and filter

Transmission oil and filter

Pump oil (if equipped)

Foam oil (if equipped)

Aerial oil and filter (if equipped)

ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS

An advanced, Windows-based, diagnostic software program will be provided for this control system.

The software will provide troubleshooting tools to service technicians equipped with a Windows-based computer or wireless enabled device.

The service and maintenance software will be easy to understand and use and have the ability to view system input/output (I/O) information.

INDICATOR LIGHT AND ALARM PROVE-OUT SYSTEM

A system will be provided which automatically tests basic indicator lights and alarms located on the cab instrument panel.

VOLTAGE MONITOR SYSTEM

A voltage monitoring system will be provided to indicate the status of the battery system connected to the vehicle's electrical load. The system will provide visual and audible warning when the system voltage is below or above optimum levels.

The alarm will activate if the system falls below 11.8 volts DC for more than two (2) minutes.

DEDICATED RADIO EQUIPMENT CONNECTION POINTS

There will be three (3) studs provided in the primary power distribution center located in front of the officer for two-way radio equipment.

The studs will consist of the following:

12-volt 40-amp battery switched power

12-volt 60-amp ignition switched power

12-volt 60-amp direct battery power

There will also be a 12-volt 100-amp ground stud located in or adjacent to the power distribution center.

ENHANCED SOFTWARE

The solid-state control system will include the following software enhancements:

45 of 96

All perimeter lights and scene lights (where applicable) will be deactivated when the parking brake is released.

Cab and crew cab dome lights will remain on for ten (10) seconds for improved visibility after the doors close. The dome lights will dim after ten (10) seconds or immediately if the vehicle is put into gear.

Cab and crew cab perimeter lights will remain on for ten (10) seconds for improved visibility after the doors close. The dome lights will dim after ten (10) seconds or immediately if the vehicle is put into gear.

EMI/RFI PROTECTION

To prevent erroneous signals from crosstalk contamination and interference, the electrical system will meet, at a minimum, SAE J551/2, thus reducing undesired electromagnetic and radio frequency emissions. An advanced electrical system will be used to ensure radiated and conducted electromagnetic interference (EMI) or radio frequency interference (RFI) emissions are suppressed at their source.

The apparatus will have the ability to operate in the electromagnetic environment typically found in fire ground operations to ensure clean operations. The electrical system will meet, without exceptions, electromagnetic susceptibility conforming to SAE J1113/25 Region 1, Class C EMR for 10Khz-1GHz to

100 Volts/Meter. The vehicle OEM, upon request, will provide EMC testing reports from testing conducted on an entire apparatus and will certify that the vehicle meets SAE J551/2 and SAE J1113/25

Region 1, Class C EMR for 10Khz-1GHz to 100 Volts/Meter requirements. Component and partial

(incomplete) vehicle testing is not adequate as overall vehicle design can impact test results and thus is not acceptable by itself.

EMI/RFI susceptibility will be controlled by applying appropriate circuit designs and shielding. The electrical system will be designed for full compatibility with low-level control signals and high-powered two-way radio communication systems. Harness and cable routing will be given careful attention to minimize the potential for conducting and radiated EMI/RFI susceptibility.

ELECTRICAL

All 12-volt electrical equipment installed by the apparatus manufacturer will conform to modern automotive practices. All wiring will be high temperature crosslink type. Wiring will be run, in loom or conduit, where exposed and have grommets where wire passes through sheet metal. Automatic reset circuit breakers will be provided which conform to SAE Standards. Wiring will be color, function and number coded. Function and number codes will be continuously imprinted on all wiring harness conductors at 2.00" intervals. Exterior exposed wire connectors will be positive locking, and environmentally sealed to withstand elements such as temperature extremes, moisture and automotive fluids.

Electrical wiring and equipment will be installed utilizing the following guidelines:

46 of 96

1. All holes made in the roof will be caulked with silicon, rope caulk is not acceptable. Large fender washers, liberally caulked, will be used when fastening equipment to the underside of the cab roof.

2. Any electrical component that is installed in an exposed area will be mounted in a manner that will not allow moisture to accumulate in it. Exposed area will be defined as any location outside of the cab or body.

3. Electrical components designed to be removed for maintenance will not be fastened with nuts and bolts. Metal screws will be used in mounting these devices. Also a coil of wire will be provided behind the appliance to allow them to be pulled away from mounting area for inspection and service work.

4. Corrosion preventative compound will be applied to all terminal plugs located outside of the cab or body. All non-waterproof connections will require this compound in the plug to prevent corrosion and for easy separation (of the plug).

5. All lights that have their sockets in a weather exposed area will have corrosion preventative compound added to the socket terminal area.

6. All electrical terminals in exposed areas will have silicon (1890) applied completely over the metal portion of the terminal.

All lights and reflectors, required to comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard #108, will be furnished. Rear identification lights will be recessed mounted for protection. Lights and wiring mounted in the rear bulkheads will be protected from damage by installing a false bulkhead inside the rear compartments.

An operational test will be conducted to ensure that any equipment that is permanently attached to the electrical system is properly connected and in working order.

The results of the tests will be recorded and provided to the purchaser at time of delivery.

BATTERY SYSTEM

There will be six (6) 12 volt Exide®, Model 31S950X3W, batteries that include the following features will be provided:

950 CCA, cold cranking amps

190 amp reserve capacity

High cycle

Group 31

Rating of 5700 CCA at 0 degrees Fahrenheit

-140 minutes of reserve capacity

Threaded stainless steel studs

47 of 96

Each battery case will be a black polypropylene material with a vertically ribbed container for increased vibration resistance. The cover will be manifold vented with a central venting location to allow a 45 degree tilt capacity.

The inside of each battery will consist of a "maintenance free" grid construction with poly wrapped separators and a flooded epoxy bottom anchoring for maximum vibration resistance.

BATTERY SYSTEM

There will be a single starting system with an ignition switch and starter button provided and located on the cab instrument panel.

MASTER BATTERY SWITCH

There will be a master battery switch provided within the cab within easy reach of the driver to activate the battery system.

An indicator light will be provided on the instrument panel to notify the driver of the status of the battery system.

BATTERY COMPARTMENTS

Batteries will be stored in well-ventilated compartments that are located under the cab and bolted directly to the chassis frame. The battery compartments will be constructed of 0.188" steel plate and be designed to accommodate a maximum of three (3) group 31 batteries in each compartment. The battery hold-downs will be of a non-corrosive material. All bolts and nuts will be stainless steel.

The compartments will include formed fit heavy duty roto-molded polyethylene battery trays with drain tubes for the batteries to sit in.

Heavy-duty battery cables will be used to provide maximum power to the electrical system. Cables will be color-coded.

Battery terminal connections will be coated with anti-corrosion compound. Battery solenoid terminal connections will be encapsulated with semi-permanent rubberized compound.

JUMPER STUDS

One (1) set of battery jumper studs with plastic color-coded covers will be installed on the bottom of the driver's side battery box. This will provide for easy jumper cable access.

BATTERY CHARGER

A Kussmaul Autocharge 1000, Model 091-56-12, battery charger with internal battery saver will be provided. A bar graph display indicating the state of charge will be included.

The battery saver circuit will be capable of supplying up to three (3) amps for external loads such as hand light or auxiliary radio batteries.

48 of 96

The battery charger will be wired to the AC shoreline inlet through an AC receptacle adjacent to this battery charger.

The battery charger will be located in the left body compartment mounted on the front wall as high as possible.

The battery charger indicator will be located in the driver's step area.

KUSSMAUL AUTO EJECT FOR SHORELINE

There will be one (1) Kussmaul Model 091-55-15-120, 15 amp 120 volt AC shoreline inlet(s) provided to operate the dedicated 120 volt AC circuits on the apparatus without the use of the generator.

The shoreline inlet(s) will include black weatherproof flip up cover(s).

There will be a release solenoid wired to the vehicle's starter to eject the AC connector when the engine is starting.

The shoreline(s) will be connected to the battery charger.

There will be a mating connector body supplied with the loose equipment.

There will be a label installed near the inlet(s) that state the following:

Line Voltage

Current Ratting (amps)

Phase

Frequency

The shoreline receptacle will be located on the driver side of cab, above wheel.

ELECTRIC POWER FOR WINCH

Electric power provisions will be furnished for the portable winch from the chassis battery system.

The receiver plug will be located by the rear reciever hitch and one on by each side reciever.

A total quantity of three (3) receptacles will be provided.

JUMPER STUDS

One (1) set of battery jumper studs with plastic color coded covers will be recessed in the side of the bumper extension on the driver's side. This will be an open compartment, just large enough for jumper cable access. A tag will be provided for positive/negative terminals.

ALTERNATOR

A C.E. Niehoff, model C680-1, alternator will be provided. It will have a rated output current of 430 amp as measured by SAE method J56. It will also have a custom three (3)-set point voltage regulator,

49 of 96

manufactured by C. E. Niehoff. The alternator will be connected to the power and ground distribution system with heavy-duty cables sized to carry the full rated alternator output.

ELECTRONIC LOAD MANAGER

An electronic load management (ELM) system will be provided that monitors the vehicles 12-volt electrical system, automatically reducing the electrical load in the event of a low voltage condition, and automatically restoring the shed electrical loads when a low voltage condition expires. This ensures the integrity of the electrical system.

For improved reliability and ease of use, the load manager system will be an integral part of the vehicle's solid state control system requiring no additional components to perform load management tasks. Load management systems which require additional components will not be allowed.

The system will include the following features:

System voltage monitoring.

A shed load will remain inactive for a minimum of five minutes to prevent the load from cycling on and off.

Sixteen available electronic load shedding levels.

Priority levels can be set for individual outputs.

High Idle to activate before any electric loads are shed and deactivate with the service brake. o If enabled:

 "Load Man Hi-Idle On" will display on the information center.

 Hi-Idle will not activate until 30 seconds after engine start up.

Individual switch "on" indicator to flash when the particular load has been shed.

The information center indicates system voltage.

The information center, where applicable, includes a "Load Manager" screen indicating the following:

Load managed items list, with priority levels and item condition.

Individual load managed item condition: o ON = not shed o SHED = shed

SEQUENCER

A sequencer will be provided that automatically activates and deactivates vehicle loads in a preset sequence thereby protecting the alternator from power surges. This sequencer operation will allow a gradual increase or decrease in alternator output, rather than loading or dumping the entire 12 volt load to prolong the life of the alternator.

For improved reliability and ease of use, the load sequencing system will be an integral part of the vehicle's solid state control system requiring no additional components to perform load sequencing tasks. Load sequencing systems which require additional components will not be allowed.

50 of 96

Emergency light sequencing will operate in conjunction with the emergency master light switch. When the emergency master switch is activated, the emergency lights will be activated one by one at halfsecond intervals. Sequenced emergency light switch indicators will flash while waiting for activation.

When the emergency master switch is deactivated, the sequencer will deactivate the warning light loads in the reverse order.

Sequencing of the following items will also occur, in conjunction with the ignition switch, at halfsecond intervals:

Cab Heater and Air Conditioning

Crew Cab Heater (if applicable)

Crew Cab Air Conditioning (if applicable)

Exhaust Fans (if applicable)

Third Evaporator (if applicable)

HEADLIGHTS

There will be two (2) Brightheadlight, kit number Bi-XP4656-Kit, rectangular HID lights mounted in the front quad style, chrome housing on each side of the cab grille:

The outside light on each side will contain a HID low and high beam module.

The inside light on each side will contain a halogen high beam module only.

DIRECTIONAL LIGHTS

There will be two (2) Whelen 600® series, LED combination directional/marker lights provided. The lights will be located on the outside cab corners, next to the headlights.

The color of the lenses will be the same color as the LED's.

CAB CLEARANCE/MARKER/ID LIGHTS

There will be seven (7) amber LED lights provided to indicate the presence and overall width of the vehicle in the following locations:

Three (3) amber LED identification lights will be installed in the center of the cab above the windshield.

Two (2) amber LED clearance lights will be installed, one (1) on each outboard side of the cab above the windshield.

Two (2) amber LED marker lights will be installed, one (1) on each side above the cab doors.

51 of 96

INTERMEDIATE LIGHT

There will be two (2) Truck-Lite, Model 30080Y, flange mounted amber LED turn signal marker lights furnished, one (1) each side, in the rear fender panel. The light will double as a turn signal and marker light. This installation will include a stainless steel cover.

REAR CLEARANCE/MARKER/ID LIGHTING

There will be a three (3) LED light bar used as identification lights located at the rear of the apparatus per the following:

As close as practical to the vertical centerline

Centers spaced not less than 6.00" or more than 12.00" apart

Red in color

All at the same height

There will be two (2) LED lights installed at the rear of the apparatus used as clearance lights located at the rear of the apparatus per the following:

To indicate the overall width of the vehicle

One (1) each side of the vertical centerline

As near the top as practical

Red in color

To be visible from the rear

All at the same height

There will be two (2) LED lights installed on the side of the apparatus used as marker lights as close to the rear as practical per the following:

To indicate the overall length of the vehicle

One (1) each side of the vertical centerline

As near the top as practical

Red in color

To be visible from the side

All at the same height

There will be two (2) red reflectors located on the rear of the truck facing to the rear. One (1) each side, as far to the outside as practical, at a minimum of 15.00", but no more than 60.00", above the ground.

There will be two (2) red reflectors located on the side of the truck facing to the side. One (1) each side, as far to the rear as practical, at a minimum of 15.00", but no more than 60.00", above the ground.

Per FMVSS 108 and CMVSS 108 requirements.

52 of 96

REAR FMVSS LIGHTING

There will be a pair of Weldon, Model 3884-0100-1*, LED tri tail lamp assemblies provided.

Each module will include the following:

One (1) LED stop and tail light

One (1) LED sequential turn light (right or left)

One (1) LED backup light

One (1) triple light, polished aluminum housing

The assemblies will be mounted on the face of the rear body compartments.

LICENSE PLATE BRACKET

There will be one (1) license plate bracket mounted on the rear of the body.

A white LED light will illuminate the license plate. A polished stainless steel light shield will be provided over the light that will direct illumination downward, preventing white light to the rear.

BACK-UP ALARM

A PRECO, Model 1040, solid-state electronic audible back-up alarm that actuates when the truck is shifted into reverse will be provided. The device will sound at 60 pulses per minute and automatically adjust its volume to maintain a minimum ten (10) dBA above surrounding environmental noise levels.

CAB PERIMETER SCENE LIGHTS

There will be four (4) Truck-lite, Model 44308C, 4.00" white LED lights with Model 40700 grommets provided, one (1) for the cab and crew cab door.

These lights will be activated automatically when the battery switch is on and the exit doors are opened or by the same means as the body perimeter scene lights.

PUMP HOUSE PERIMETER LIGHTS

There will be two (2) Truck-Lite, Model 44308C, 4.00" white LED 12 volt DC weatherproof lights with

Model 40700, grommets provided under the pump panel running boards, one (1) each side.

The lights will be controlled by the same means as the body perimeter lights.

BODY PERIMETER SCENE LIGHTS

There will be two (2) Truck-Lite, Model 44308C, 4.00" LED, lights with Model 40700, grommets provided under the rear step area on the body, one (1) each side shining to the rear.

The perimeter scene lights will be activated by a switch within reach of the driver is activated, a cab door is open, a crew cab door is open and the parking brake is applied.

53 of 96

STEP LIGHTS

Four (4) white LED step lights will be provided. One (1) step light will be provided on each side, on the front compartment face and two (2) step lights at the rear to illuminate the tailboard.

In order to ensure exceptional illumination, each light will provide a minimum of 25 foot-candles (fc) covering an entire 15.00" x 15.00" square placed 10.00" below the light and a minimum of 1.5 fc covering an entire 30.00" x 30.00" square at the same 10.00" distance below the light.

These step lights will be actuated with the pump panel light switch.

All other steps on the apparatus will be illuminated per the current edition of NFPA 1901.

12 VOLT LIGHTING

There will be four (4) Whelen® Pioneer™ Series, Model PCP2*, 12 volt LED combination spotlight and floodlight(s) installed in semi-recessed housing(s) Model PBA203, located one (1) each side high and rearward of crew cab doors, one (1) high and rearward on driver's side body and one (1) high and rearward on passenger's side body.

The painted parts of this light assembly to be black.

The light(s) selected above will be controlled by the following:

a switch at the driver's side switch panel

a switch at the passenger's side switch panel

opening the driver's side cab or crew cab doors

opening the passenger's side cab or crew cab doors

These light(s) may be load managed when the parking brake is applied.

12 VOLT LIGHTING

There will be one (1) Whelen® Pioneer™, Model PCP2*, 12 volt LED combination spot/flood light(s) provided on the front visor, centered.

The painted parts of this light assembly to be black.

The light(s) will be controlled by the following:

a switch at the driver's side switch panel

a switch at the passenger's side switch panel

no additional switch location

These light(s) may be load managed when the parking brake is set.

54 of 96

DECK LIGHTS

There will be two (2) Unity, Model AG-S-P46SLC, LED light installed at the rear of the apparatus, one each side.

Individual switches will be provided on each light for on/off.

WATER TANK

Booster tank will have a capacity of 500 gallons and be constructed of polypropylene plastic by United

Plastic Fabricating, Incorporated.

Tank joints and seams will be nitrogen welded inside and out.

Tank will be baffled in accordance with NFPA Bulletin 1901 requirements.

Baffles will have vent openings at both the top and bottom to permit movement of air and water between compartments.

Longitudinal partitions will be constructed of .38" polypropylene plastic and will extend from the bottom of the tank through the top cover to allow for positive welding.

Transverse partitions will extend from 4.00" off the bottom of the tank to the underside of the top cover.

All partitions will interlock and will be welded to the tank bottom and sides.

Tank top will be constructed of .50" polypropylene. It will be recessed .38" and will be welded to the tank sides and the longitudinal partitions.

Tank top will be sufficiently supported to keep it rigid during fast filling conditions.

Construction will include 2.00" polypropylene dowels spaced no more than 30.00" apart and welded to the transverse partitions. Two (2) of the dowels will be drilled and tapped (.50" diameter, 13.00" deep) to accommodate lifting eyes.

A sump that is 8.00" long x 8.00" wide x 6.00" deep will be provided at the bottom of the water tank.

Sump will include a drain plug and the tank outlet.

Tank will be installed in a fabricated cradle assembly constructed of structural steel.

Sufficient crossmembers will be provided to properly support bottom of tank. Crossmembers will be constructed of steel bar channel or rectangular tubing.

Tank will "float" in cradle to avoid torsional stress caused by chassis frame flexing. Rubber cushions,

.50" thick x 3.00" wide, will be placed on all horizontal surfaces that the tank rests on.

Stops or other provision will be provided to prevent an empty tank from bouncing excessively while moving vehicle.

55 of 96

Mounting system will be approved by the tank manufacturer.

Fill tower will be constructed of .50" polypropylene and will be a minimum of 8.00" wide x 14.00" long.

Fill tower will be furnished with a .25" thick polypropylene screen and a hinged cover.

An overflow pipe, constructed of 4.00" schedule 40 polypropylene, will be installed approximately halfway down the fill tower and extend through the water tank and exit to the rear of the rear axle.

HOSE BED

The hose bed will be fabricated of .125"-5052 aluminum with a nominal 38,000 psi tensile strength.

Standard hose bed width will be 68.00" inside.

Upper and rear edges of side panels will have a double break for rigidity, a split tube finish will not be acceptable.

The upper inside area of the beavertails will be covered with brushed stainless steel to prevent damage to painted surface when hose is removed.

Flooring of the hose bed will be removable aluminum grating with the top surface corrugated to aid in hose aeration. The grating slats will be a minimum of 0.50" x 4.50" with spacing between slats for hose ventilation.

Hose bed will accommodate 500' of 2.5", 800' of 5", 800' of 5", and 500' of 2.5".

HOSE BED DIVIDER

Three (3) adjustable hosebed dividers will be furnished for separating hose.

Each divider will be constructed of a .125" brushed aluminum sheet fitted and fastened into a slotted,

1.50" diameter radiused extrusion along the top, bottom, and rear edge.

Divider will be fully adjustable by sliding in tracks, located at the front and rear of the hose bed.

Divider will be held in place by tightening bolts, at each end.

Acorn nuts will be installed on all bolts in the hose bed which have exposed threads.

HOSE BED HOSE RESTRAINT

The hose in the hose bed will be restrained by a black nylon Velcro® strap at the top of the hosebed. At the rear of the hose bed, 2.00" black nylon webbing with a 1.50" x 4.00" box pattern will attach at the top rear outside corners with seat belt buckle fasteners. The webbing will have straps connected with seat belt buckle fasteners located at the rear body sheet below the hose bed.

RUNNING BOARDS

Running boards will be fabricated of .125" bright aluminum treadplate.

56 of 96

Each running board will be supported by a welded 2.00" square tubing and channel assembly, which will be bolted to the pump compartment substructure.

Running boards will be 12.75" deep and spaced .50" away from the pump panel.

A splash guard will be provided above the running board treadplate.

TAILBOARD

The tailboard will also be constructed of .125" bright aluminum treadplate and spaced .50" from the body, as well as supported by a structural steel assembly.

The tailboard area will be 18.00" deep in the center area and 8.00" deep to the rear of the side compartments. The tailboard will be T-shaped.

The exterior side will be flanged down and in for increased rigidity of tailboard structure.

REAR WALL, SMOOTH ALUMINUM/BODY MATERIAL

The rear facing surfaces of the center rear wall will be smooth aluminum.

The bulkheads, the surface to the rear of the side body compartments, will be smooth and the same material as the body.

Any inboard facing surfaces below the height of the hosebed will be aluminum diamondplate .

TOW BARS

Two (2) tow bars will be installed under the tailboard.

Tow bars will be fabricated of 1.00" CRS bar rolled into a 3.00" radius.

Tow bar assemblies will be constructed of .38" structural angle. When force is applied to the bar, it will be transmitted to the frame rail.

Tow bar assemblies will be designed and positioned to allow up to a 30 degree upward angled pull of

17,000 lb, or a 20,000 lb straight horizontal pull in line with the centerline of the vehicle.

Tow bar design will have been fully tested and evaluated using strain gauge testing and finite element analysis techniques.

HITCH RECEIVER

A hitch receiver will be installed at the rear and the sides of the apparatus. The side receivers will be located to the rear of the wheels, under the rear platform. The side hitch receivers will be capable of retaining a 9,000 lb portable winch.

The hitch receivers will be constructed of heavy steel tubing and reinforced to the truck framework, for the receiving portion.

57 of 96

Slide-in portion will be held in place by one (1) safety pin with clip.

LABEL

A label will be provided near each receiver explaining that a trailer is neither rated nor approved to be attached to the receiver.

RUNNING BOARD HOSE RESTRAINT

A pair of 2.00" wide black nylon straps with Velcro fasteners will be provided for each hose tray to secure the hose during travel. There will be Two (2) hose trays located one (1) in each side running board.

HOSE TRAY

Two (2) hose trays will be made free floating one (1) in each side running board.

The tray(s) will be flanged and drop in from the top. The ends will be tapered at the front and rear towards the center. No fasteners will be used to secure the tray(s).

Capacity of the tray will be two 25' rolls of DJ 5".

Rubber matting will be installed on the floor of the tray to provide proper ventilation.

COMPARTMENTATION

Body and compartments will be fabricated of .125", 5052-H32 aluminum.

Side compartments will be an integral assembly with the rear fenders.

Circular fender liners will be provided for prevention of rust pockets and ease of maintenance.

Compartment flooring will be of the sweep out design with the floor higher than the compartment door lip.

The compartment door opening will be framed by flanging the edges in 1.75" and bending out again

.75" to form an angle.

Drip protection will be provided above the doors by means of bright aluminum extrusion, formed bright aluminum treadplate or polished stainless steel.

The top of the compartment will be covered with bright aluminum treadplate rolled over the edges on the front, rear and outward side. These covers will have the corners welded.

Side compartment covers will be separate from the compartment tops.

Front facing compartment walls will be covered with bright aluminum treadplate.

All screws and bolts which protrude into a compartment will have acorn nuts on the ends to prevent injury.

58 of 96

UNDERBODY SUPPORT SYSTEM

Due to the severe loading requirements of this pumper a method of body and compartment support suitable for the intended load will be provided.

The backbone of the support system will be the chassis frame rails which is the strongest component of the chassis and is designed for sustaining maximum loads.

The support system will include .375" thick steel vertical angle supports bolted to the chassis frame rails with .625" diameter bolts.

Attached to the bottom of the steel vertical angles will be horizontal angles, with gussets welded to the vertical members, which extend to the outside edge of the body.

A steel frame will be mounted on the top of these supports to create a floating substructure which will result in a 500 lb equipment support rating per lower compartment.

The floating substructure will be separated from the horizontal members with neoprene elastomer isolators. These isolators will reduce the natural flex stress of the chassis from being transmitted to the body.

Isolators will have a broad load range, proven viability in vehicular applications, be of a fail safe design and allow for all necessary movement in three (3) transitional and rotational modes.

The neoprene isolators will be installed in a modified V three (3)-point mounting pattern to reduce the natural flex of the chassis being transmitted to the body.

AGGRESSIVE WALKING SURFACE

All exterior surfaces designated as stepping, standing, and walking areas will comply with the required average slip resistance of the current NFPA standards.

LOUVERS

Louvers will be stamped into compartment walls to provide the proper airflow inside the body compartments and to prevent water from dripping into the compartment. Where these louvers are provided, they will be formed into the metal and not added to the compartment as a separate plate.

TESTING OF BODY DESIGN

Body structural analysis has been fully tested. Proven engineering and test techniques such as finite element analysis, stress coating and strain gauging have been performed with special attention given to fatigue, life and structural integrity of the cab, body and substructure.

Body will be tested while loaded to its greatest in-service weight.

The criteria used during the testing procedure will include:

59 of 96

Raising opposite corners of the vehicle tires 9.00" to simulate the twisting a truck may experience when driving over a curb.

Making a 90 degree turn, while driving at 20 mph to simulate aggressive driving conditions.

Driving the vehicle at 35 mph on a washboard road.

Driving the vehicle at 55 mph on a smooth road.

Accelerating the vehicle fully, until reaching the approximate speed of 45 mph on rough pavement.

Evidence of actual testing techniques will be made available upon request.

COMPARTMENTATION, DRIVER'S SIDE

A full height, vertically hinged, single door compartment ahead of the rear wheels will be provided. The interior dimensions of this compartment will be 34.50" wide x 66.63" high x 25.75" deep. The depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door closed. The compartment interior will be fully open from the compartment ceiling to the compartment floor and designed so that no permanent dividers are required between the upper and lower sections. The clear door opening of this compartment will be 30.00" wide x 62.00" high.

A positive door holder will be furnished with this compartment.

A horizontally hinged, single lift-up door compartment over the rear wheels will be provided. The interior dimensions of this compartment will be 66.50" wide x 32.88" high x 25.75" deep. The depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door closed. The clear door opening of this compartment will be 59.50" wide x 28.25" high.

The lift-up door will be furnished with two gas-charged cylinders to assist in the opening of the door and to maintain the door in an open position. There will be a field adjustable, three-position bracket mounted on the vertical side door opening that will allow the door to be held open at 87°, 90°, or 93°.

Closing of the door will not require releasing, unlocking, or unlatching any mechanism.

A full height, vertically hinged, double door compartment behind the rear wheels will be provided. The interior dimensions of this compartment will be 47.50" wide x 67.63" high x 25.75" deep. The depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door closed. The compartment interior will be fully open from the compartment ceiling to the compartment floor and designed so that no permanent dividers are required between the upper and lower sections. The clear door opening of this compartment will be 46.00" wide x 63.00" high.

A positive door holder will be furnished with this compartment.

COMPARTMENTATION, PASSENGER'S SIDE

A full height, vertically hinged, single door compartment ahead of the rear wheels will be provided. The interior dimensions of this compartment will be 34.50" wide x 67.63" high x 25.75" deep. The depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door closed. The compartment interior will be

60 of 96

fully open from the compartment ceiling to the compartment floor and designed so that no permanent dividers are required between the upper and lower sections. The clear door opening of this compartment will be 30.00" wide x 63.00" high.

A positive door holder will be furnished with this compartment

A horizontally hinged, single lift-up door compartment over the rear wheels will be furnished. The interior dimensions of this compartment will be 66.50" wide x 32.88" high x 25.75" deep. The depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door closed. The clear door opening of this compartment will be 59.50" wide x 28.25" high.

The lift-up door will be furnished with two gas-charged cylinders to assist in the opening of the door and to maintain the door in an open position. There will be a field adjustable, three-position bracket mounted on the vertical side door opening that will allow the door to be held open at 87°, 90°, or 93°.

Closing of the door will not require releasing, unlocking, or unlatching any mechanism.

A full height, vertically hinged, double door compartment behind the rear wheels will be furnished. The interior dimensions of this compartment will be 47.50" wide x 67.63" high x 25.75" deep. The depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door closed. The compartment interior will be fully open from the compartment ceiling to the compartment floor and designed so that no permanent dividers are required between the upper and lower sections. The clear door opening of this compartment will be 46.00" wide x 63.00" high.

A positive door holder will be furnished with this compartment.

DOORS, SIDE COMPARTMENT

All hinged compartment doors will be lap style with double panel construction and will be a minimum of 1.50" thick. To provide additional door strength a "C" section reinforcement will be installed between the outer and interior panels.

Doors will be provided with a closed cell rubber gasket around the surface that laps onto the body. A second heavy-duty automotive rubber molding with a hollow core will be installed on the door framing that seals onto the interior panel, to ensure a weather resisting compartment.

All compartment doors will have polished stainless steel continuous hinge with a pin diameter of .25" that is bolted or screwed on with stainless steel fasteners.

All door locking mechanisms will be fully enclosed within the door panels to prevent fouling of the lock in the event equipment inside shifts into the lock area.

Doors will be latched with recessed, polished stainless steel "D" ring handles and FMVSS approved door locking mechanisms.

61 of 96

To prevent corrosion caused by dissimilar metals, compartment door handles will not be attached to outer door panel with screws. A rubber gasket will be provided between the "D" ring handle and the door.

COMPARTMENTATION, REAR

A vertically hinged, double door compartment above the rear tailboard will be provided. Interior dimensions of this compartment will be 40.00" wide x 40.63" high x 31.88" deep. Depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door closed.

For a chassis with a rear mounted fuel tank, a louvered removable access panel will be furnished on the back wall of the compartment.

Rear compartment will be open into the rear side compartments.

Clear door opening of this compartment will be 34.50" wide x 36.00" high.

Each of the vertically hinged compartment doors will be provided with a positive door holder.

ROLLUP DOOR, REAR COMPARTMENT

There will be a rear rollup door. The door will be double faced aluminum construction, an anodized satin finish and manufactured by A&A Manufacturing (Gortite).

Lath sections will be an interlocking rib design and will be individually replaceable without complete disassembly of door.

Between each slat at the pivoting joint will be a PVC inner seal to prevent metal to metal contact and prevent dirt or moisture from entering the compartments. Seals will allow door to operate in extreme temperatures ranging from plus 180 to minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit. Side, top and bottom seals will be provided to resist ingress of dirt and weather and be made of Santoprene.

All hinges, barrel clips and end pieces will be nylon 66. All nylon components will withstand temperatures from plus 300 to minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit.

A polished stainless steel lift bar to be provided for each roll-up door. Lift bar will be located at the bottom of door and have latches on the outer extrusion of the doors frame. A ledge will be supplied over lift bar for additional area to aid in closing the door.

Door will be constructed from an aluminum box section. The exterior surface of each slat will be flat.

The interior surface will be concave to provide strength and prevent loose equipment from jamming the door from inside.

To conserve space in the compartments, the spring roller assembly will not exceed 3.00" in diameter.

The header for the rollup door assembly will not exceed 4.00".

A heavy-duty magnetic switch will be used for control of open compartment door warning lights.

62 of 96

BODY MODIFICATION FROM STANDARD

The following body modifications will be required for the installation of a single axle air ride suspension:

- Rear compartment will be 5.00" shorter in depth.

- Special water tank mounting required if applicable.

SCUFFPLATE

A quantity of six (6)brushed stainless steel will be furnished all the PS and DS compartments. The scuffplates will be TBD.

COMPARTMENT LIGHTING

There will be nine (9) compartments with 24 volt DC LED compartment light strips. The strips will be centered vertically along each side of the door framing. The compartments with these strip lights will be located all body side compartments, the R1 compartment, and the two in cab EMS compartments..

Opening the compartment door will automatically turn the compartment lighting on.

MOUNTING TRACKS

There will be seven (7) sets of tracks for mounting shelf(s) in D3, D2, D1, P1, P2 and P3. These tracks will be installed vertically to support the adjustable shelf(s), and will be full height of the compartment.

The tracks will be painted to match the compartment interior.

ADJUSTABLE SHELVES

There will be five (5) shelves with a capacity of 500 lb provided. The shelf construction will consist of

.188" aluminum with 2.00" sides. Each shelf will be painted to match the compartment interior. Each shelf will be infinitely adjustable by means of a threaded fastener, which slides in a track.

The shelves will be held in place by .12" thick stamped plated brackets and bolts.

The location will be TBD .

SLIDE-OUT ADJUSTABLE HEIGHT TRAY

There will be three (3) slide-out trays provided.

Each tray will have 2.00" high sides and a minimum capacity rating of 250 lb in the extended position.

Each tray will be mounted on a pair of side mounted slides. The slide mechanisms will have ball bearings for ease of operation and years of dependable service. The slides will be mounted to shelf tracks to allow the tray to be adjustable up and down within the designated mounting location.

An automatic lock will be provided for both the in and out tray positions. The lock trip mechanism will be located at the front of the tray and will be easily operated with a gloved hand.

The tray(s) will be located TBD.

63 of 96

RUB RAIL

The bottom edge of the body panel will have a 2.00" high rubber rub rail the length of the body for protection.

BODY FENDER CROWNS

Black rubber fender crowns will be provided around the rear wheel openings.

HARD SUCTION HOSE

Two (2) lengths of 6.00" clear corrugated PVC hard suction hose, 10' in length, will be provided. The hose will be equipped with a long handle female coupling on one (1) end and a rocker lug male coupling on the other end. Couplings will be hard coated aluminum.

HOSE TROUGHS

Troughs for hard suction hose will be provided on top of the left side body compartments. Troughs will be V-shaped and located side by side. The hose will be held in place by Velcro straps.

Troughs will be constructed of aluminum and painted job color.

HANDRAILS

The handrails will be 1.25" diameter anodized aluminum extrusion, with a ribbed design, to provide a positive gripping surface.

Chrome plated end stanchions will support the handrail. Plastic gaskets will be used between end stanchions and any painted surfaces.

Drain holes will be provided in the bottom of all vertically mounted handrails.

Handrails will be provided to meet NFPA 1901 section 15.8 requirements. The handrails will be installed as noted on the sales drawing.

HANDRAILS

One (1) vertical handrail, not less than 29.00" long, will be located on each rear beavertail.

One (1) full width horizontal handrail will be provided below the hose bed at the rear of the apparatus.

AIR BOTTLE STORAGE (TRIPLE)

A quantity of three (3) air bottle compartments designed to hold (3) air bottles up to 7.25" in diameter x

26.00" deep will be provided on the driver side forward of the rear wheels, on the passenger side forward of the rear wheels and on the passenger side rearward of the rear wheels. A brushed stainless steel door with a chrome plated flush lift & turn latch will be provided to contain the air bottle. A dielectric barrier will be provided between the door hinge, hinge fasteners and the body sheet metal.

64 of 96

Inside the compartment, black rubber matting will be provided.

AIR BOTTLE COMPARTMENT STRAP

A strap will be provided in the air bottle compartment(s) to help contain the air bottles when the vehicle is parked on an incline. The strap will wrap around the neck and attach to the wall of the compartment.

EXTENSION LADDER

There will be a 24', two-section, aluminum, Duo-Safety, Series 900-A extension ladder provided.

ROOF LADDER

There will be a 14' aluminum, Duo-Safety, Series 775-A roof ladder provided.

HYDRAULIC LADDER RACK

Ground ladders will be mounted above the right side of the hose body in a specially designed swingdown cradle. This cradle will be electric/hydraulic operated. The system design will have been life cycle tested for at least 14 years of dependable service.

An independent hydraulic pump powered by a 12-volt electric motor will operate the hydraulics.

Operation of the hydraulic system for the ladder rack by an engine-powered pump will be totally unacceptable. The hydraulic pump and reservoir will be accessible from the ground through a stainless steel inspection door.

The ladder rack will incorporate two hydraulic rotary actuators, one each located inside the front compartment and the rear compartment. The actuators will be completely enclosed within each compartment to eliminate any pinch points while operating the ladder rack. Lifting arms will be attached outside the compartment body to the front and rear actuator. A center-lifting arm built into the compartment space is unnecessary and is unacceptable.

The rack can be designed in certain situations to provide lifting capabilities up to 500lbs.

The maximum height of the rack from the ground in the lowered position will be no more than 47.00".

The electric control panel will have a master switch on/off switch, an actuation switch, an operation indicator light and operation instructions. The electric controls will be located in such a manner to allow the operator full view of the area into which the ladders will be lowered.

Two (2) air operated safety locks will be furnished to securely maintain the ladder bracket assembly in the travel position. These air operated safety locks will be controlled from the ladder rack control panel.

Ladders will be secured to the brackets with two (2) locks retaining the roof ladder and the extension ladder. The locks will be such that when the roof ladder is removed, the clamps can be moved a half turn to hold the extension ladder in place.

65 of 96

LADDER RACK INTERLOCK AND NOT STOWED INDICATOR LIGHT

An interlock will be provided to prevent operation of the ladder rack unless the apparatus parking brake has been activated.

A steady red indicator light will be located on the cab instrument panel and illuminated when the hydraulic ladder rack is not in the stowed position. The light will be labeled "Ladder Rack". In addition, the "Do Not Move Apparatus" light located in the cab will be activated when the hydraulic ladder rack is not in the stowed position.

LIGHTS, FLASHING, HYDRAULIC LADDER RACK

Flashing amber lights facing the front and rear will be provided on the ladder rack and activated whenever the rack is in the down position.

FOLDING LADDER

One (1) 10.00' aluminum, Series 585-A, Duo-Safety folding ladder will be installed on the hydraulic ladder rack.

8' PIKE POLE

There will be one (1) Fire Hooks Unlimited, New York Hook , 8' long roof hook with steel shaft and chisel (pry) end provided.

6 FT PIKE POLE

There will be one (1) Fire Hooks Unlimited NY roof hook RH-6, 6 foot pike pole(s) with steel handles and pry end provided in the DS tube.

PIKE POLE STORAGE

Aluminum tubing will be used for the storage of two (2) pike poles and will be located on hydraulic ladder rack. If the head of a pike pole can come in contact with a painted surface, a stainless steel scuffplate will be provided.

REAR STEPS

Aluminum treadplate corner steps and bright finished, non-skid folding steps will be provided at the rear. The folding steps will have a a luminescent coating that is rechargeable from any light source and can hold a charge for up to 24 hours. Each folding step will incorporate an LED light to illuminate the stepping surface. The folding steps can be used as a hand hold with two openings wide enough for a gloved hand. All steps will provide adequate surface for stepping.

PUMP

Pump will be a Waterous CSU, 2000 gpm single (1) stage midship mounted centrifugal type.

Pump will be the class "A" type.

Pump will deliver the percentage of rated discharge at pressures indicated below:

- 100% of rated capacity at 150 psi net pump pressure.

66 of 96

-70% of rated capacity at 200 psi net pump pressure.

-50% of rated capacity at 250 psi net pump pressure.

Pump body will be close-grained gray iron, bronze fitted, and horizontally split in two (2) sections for easy removal of the entire impeller shaft assembly (including wear rings).

Pump will be designed for complete servicing from the bottom of the truck, without disturbing the pump setting or apparatus piping.

Pump case halves will be bolted together on a single horizontal face to minimize a chance of leakage and facilitate ease of reassembly. No end flanges will be used.

Discharge manifold of the pump will be cast as an integral part of the pump body assembly and will provide a minimum of three (3) 3.50" openings for flexibility in providing various discharge outlets for maximum efficiency.

The three (3) 3.50" openings will be located as follows: one (1) outlet to the right of the pump, one (1) outlet to the left of the pump, and one (1) outlet directly on top of the discharge manifold.

Impeller shaft will be stainless steel, accurately ground to size. It will be supported at each end by sealed, anti-friction ball bearings for rigid precise support. Impeller will have flame plated hubs assuring maximum pump life and efficiency despite any presence of abrasive matter in the water supply.

Bearings will be protected from water and sediment by suitable stuffing boxes, flinger rings, and oil seals. No special or sleeve type bearings will be used.

Stuffing boxes will be of the conventional two (2) piece, split-gland type, to permit adjustment or replacement of Grafoil packing without disturbing the pump. Water will be fed into stuffing box lantern rings for proper lubrication and cooling when the pump is operating.

Lantern rings will be located at the inner ends of the stuffing boxes, to avoid having to remove them when replacing pump packing.

Wear rings will be bronze and easily replaceable to restore original pump efficiency and eliminate the need to replace the entire pump casing due to wear.

PUMP TRANSMISSION

The pump transmission will be made of a three (3) piece, aluminum, horizontally split casing. Power transfer to pump will be through a high strength Morse HY-VO silent drive chain. By the use of a chain rather than gears, 50% of the sprocket will be accepting or transmitting torque, compared to two (2) or three (3) teeth doing all the work.

Drive shafts will be 2.35" diameter hardened and ground alloy steel and supported by ball bearings. The case will be designed to eliminate the need for water cooling.

67 of 96

AIR PUMP SHIFT

Pump shift engagement will be made by a two (2) position sliding collar, actuated pneumatically (by air pressure), with a three (3) position air control switch located in the cab. A manual back-up shift control will also be located on the pump operator's pump panel.

Two (2) indicator lights will be provided adjacent to the pump shift inside the cab. One (1) green light will indicate the pump shift has been completed and be labeled "pump engaged". The second green light will indicate when the pump has been engaged, and that the chassis transmission is in pump gear. This indicator light will be labeled "OK to pump".

Another green indicator light will be installed adjacent to the hand throttle on the pump panel and indicate either the pump is engaged and the road transmission is in pump gear, or the road transmission is in neutral and the pump is not engaged. This indicator light will be labeled "Warning: Do not open throttle unless light is on".

The pump shift control in the cab will be illuminated to meet NFPA requirements.

TRANSMISSION LOCK-UP

The direct gear transmission lock-up for the fire pump operation will engage automatically when the pump shift control in the cab is activated.

AUXILIARY COOLING SYSTEM

A supplementary heat exchange cooling system will be provided to allow the use of water from the discharge side of the pump for cooling the engine water. The heat exchanger will be cylindrical type and will be a separate unit. The heat exchanger will be installed in the pump or engine compartment with the control located on the pump operator's control panel. Exchanger will be plumbed to the master drain valve.

INTAKE RELIEF VALVE

An Elkhart relief valve will be installed on the suction side of the pump preset at 125 psig.

Relief valve will have a working range of 75 psig to 250 psig.

Outlet will terminate below the frame rails with a 2.50" National Standard hose thread adapter and will have a "do not cap" warning tag.

Control will be located behind an access door at a side pump panel.

PRESSURE GOVERNOR

This apparatus will be equipped with a Class1 "Total Pressure Governor" engine/pump governor/throttle system that is connected directly to the Electronic Control Module (ECM) mounted on the engine. The

"Total Pressure Governor" is to operate as a pressure sensor (regulating) governor (PSG).

68 of 96

A special preset feature will permit a predetermined pressure of RPM to be set. The preset pressure or

RPM will be displayed on the message display of the "Total Pressure Governor". The preset will be easily adjustable by the operator

The pressure sensor governor system will be operable only after the vehicle parking brake has been set, the transmission is the pumping mode, and the fire pump has been engaged.

The pressure sensor governor system will have two (2) modes of operation: pressure mode or rpm mode.

When in the pressure mode, the PSG system will automatically maintain the discharge pressure set by the operator regardless of flow (within engine/pump operating capabilities).

In the rpm mode, the PSG system will automatically maintain a set engine speed, regardless of engine load (within engine operation capabilities).

A pump cavitation protection feature will be provided which will return the engine to idle should the pump cavitate.

The pressure controller will incorporate monitoring for engine coolant temperature, oil pressure, and battery voltage.

PRIMING PUMP

The priming pump will be a Trident Emergency Products compressed air powered, high efficiency, multi-stage venturi based AirPrime System, conforming to standards outlined in NFPA pamphlet #1901.

All wetted metallic parts of the priming system are to be of brass and stainless steel construction.

One (1) priming control will open the priming valve and start the pump primer.

A second priming valve will be plumbed to the the front suction piping. The second control will be located at the pump operator's panel.

PUMP MANUALS

There will be a total of two (2) pump manuals provided by the pump manufacturer and furnished with the apparatus. The manuals will be provided by the pump manufacturer in the form of two (2) CDs.

Each manual will cover pump operation, maintenance, and parts.

PLUMBING

All inlet and outlet plumbing, 3.00" and smaller, will be plumbed with either stainless steel pipe or synthetic rubber hose reinforced with high-tensile polyester braid. If hose is used, it must have a minimum burst rating of 1,000 psi and be equipped with high pressure couplings. Larger inlets and outlets will be threaded or welded black iron pipe unless otherwise specified. Small diameter secondary plumbing such as drain lines will be stainless steel, brass or hose.

69 of 96

Where vibration or chassis flexing may damage or loosen piping or where a coupling is required for servicing, the piping will be equipped with victaulic or rubber couplings.

All lines to drain through either a master drain valve or will be equipped with individual drain valves.

All individual drain lines for discharges will be extended with a hose to drain below the chassis frame.

All water carrying gauge lines will be of flexible polypropylene tubing.

MAIN PUMP INLETS

A 6.00" pump manifold inlet will be provided on each side of the vehicle. The suction inlets will include removable die cast zinc screens that are designed to provide cathodic protection for the pump, thus reducing corrosion in the pump.

MAIN PUMP INLET CAP

The main pump inlets will have National Standard Threads with a long handle chrome cap.

The cap will be the Pierce VLH, which incorporates an exclusive thread design to automatically relieve stored pressure in the line when disconnected.

VALVES

All ball valves will be Akron® Brass. The Akron valves will be the 8000 series heavy-duty style with a stainless steel ball and a simple two-seat design. No lubrication or regular maintenance is required on the valve.

Valves will have a ten (10) year warranty.

LEFT SIDE INLET

On the left side pump panel will be one (1) - 2.50" auxiliary inlet, terminating in 2.50" National

Standard Hose Thread. The auxiliary inlet will be provided with a strainer, chrome swivel and plug.

The location of the valve for the one (1) inlet will be behind the pump panel.

INLET CONTROL

Control for the side auxiliary inlet(s) will be located at the inlet valve.

FRONT INLET

A 6.00" inlet front inlet that extends through the front bumper will be provided. It will be furnished with die cast zinc screens at the opening. The plumbing for the unit will be 5.00" welded black iron pipe and a 5.00" butterfly valve. Only radius elbows will be used in the piping, no mitered joints.

Drains will be furnished in all the low points of piping and have .75" valves with swing handle.

A bleeder valve will be located at the threaded connection.

The front inlet will be located on the passenger side of the bumper extension.

70 of 96

FRONT INLET CONTROL

The front inlet will be gated with the control located at the pump operator's panel. The valve operating mechanism will indicate the position of the valve or an indicator will be provided to show when the valve is closed.

There will be an electric valve controller provided. The control will be momentary to allow the valve to be gated for ease of operation. Indicator lights will be provided to show if the valve is open or closed.

INTAKE RELIEF VALVE

An intake relief valve, preset at 125 psig, will be installed on the inlet side of the valve.

Relief valve will have a working range of 75 psig to 250 psig.

Outlet will terminate below the frame rails.

FRONT INLET CAP

The front inlet will have National Standard hose threads with a long handle chrome plated cap.

The cap will be the Pierce VLH, which incorporates an exclusive thread design to automatically relieve stored pressure in the line when disconnected.

The piping for the front suction will extend through the front bumper and terminate with a chrome plated National Standard hose thread adapter.

LARGE DIAMETER REAR INLET

A 5.00" inlet rear inlet with screen will be provided using 4.00" plumbing and a 4.00" butterfly valve.

The screen will provide cathodic protection against corrosion in piping.

The piping will contain only large radius elbows, no mitered joints.

The plumbing will be routed to the rear through the water tank. The inlet will terminate beside the rear compartment, above the tailboard, on the passenger's side.

A bleeder valve will be located at the threaded connection.

REAR INLET CAP

The rear inlet will have a National Standard hose thread adapter with a long handle chrome cap.

The cap will be the Pierce VLH, which incorporates an exclusive thread design to automatically relieve stored pressure in the line when disconnected.

REAR INLET CONTROL

The rear inlet will be gated with an electric operated control at the pump operator's panel. The control will be momentary to allow the valve to be gated for ease of operation. Indicator lights will be provided to show if the valve is open or closed.

71 of 96

INTAKE RELIEF VALVE

An intake relief valve, preset at 125 psig, will be installed on the inlet side of the valve.

Relief valve will have a working range of 75 psig to 250 psig.

Outlet will terminate below the frame rails.

A 0.75" bleeder will be provided.

INLET BLEEDER VALVE

A 0.75" bleeder valve will be provided for each side gated inlet. The valves will be located behind the panel with a swing style handle control extended to the outside of the panel. The handles will be chrome plated and provide a visual indication of valve position. The swing handle will provide an ergonomic position for operating the valve without twisting the wrist and provides excellent leverage. The water discharged by the bleeders will be routed below the chassis frame rails.

TANK TO PUMP

The booster tank will be connected to the intake side of the pump with heavy duty piping and a quarter turn 3.00" full flow line valve with the control remotely located at the operator's panel. Tank to pump line will run straight (no elbows) from the pump into the front face of the water tank and angle down into the tank sump. A rubber coupling will be included in this line to prevent damage from vibration or chassis flexing.

A check valve will be provided in the tank to pump supply line to prevent the possibility of "back filling" the water tank.

TANK REFILL

A 1.50" combination tank refill and pump re-circulation line will be provided, using a quarter-turn full flow ball valve controlled from the pump operator's panel.

LEFT SIDE DISCHARGE OUTLETS

There will be two (2) discharge outlets with a 2.50" valve on the left side of the apparatus, terminating with 2.50" (M) National Standard hose thread adapter.

RIGHT SIDE DISCHARGE OUTLETS

There will be two (2) discharge outlets with a 2.50" valve on the right side of the apparatus, terminating with a 2.50" (M) National Standard hose thread adapter.

LARGE DIAMETER DISCHARGE OUTLET

There will be a 5.00" discharge outlet with a 3.50" Waterous valve installed on the right side of the apparatus, terminating with a 5.00" (M) National Standard hose thread adapter. This discharge outlet will be actuated with a handwheel control at the pump operator's control panel.

An indicator will be provided to show when the valve is in the closed position.

72 of 96

FRONT DISCHARGE OUTLET

There will be one (1) 1.50" discharge outlet piped to the front of the apparatus and located on the top of the left side of the front bumper.

Plumbing will consist of 2.00" piping and flexible hose with a 2.00" ball valve with control at the pump operator's panel. A fabricated weldment made of stainless steel pipe will be used in the plumbing where appropriate. The piping will terminate with a 1.50" NST with 90 degree stainless steel swivel.

There will be Class 1 automatic drains provided at all low points of the piping.

REAR DISCHARGE OUTLET

A 5.00" discharge outlet will be located at the rear of the hose bed, on driver's side. The discharge outlet will be plumbed with 5.00" pipe and gated with a Waterous 3.50" valve controlled at the pump operator's panel by means of a handwheel.

An indicator will be provided to show when the valve is in the closed position.

DISCHARGE OUTLET (REAR)

There will be two (2) discharge outlets piped to the rear of the hose bed, between the LDH intake and discharge. Proper clearance will be provided for spanner wrenches or adapters. Plumbing will consist of

2.50" piping along with a 2.50" full flow ball valve with the control from the pump operator's panel.

The discharge outlet(s) will terminate with a 2.50" male National Standard hose thread male adapter.

DISCHARGE CAPS

Chrome plated, rocker lug, caps with chains will be furnished for all side discharge outlets.

The caps will be the Pierce VLH, which incorporates an exclusive thread design to automatically relieve stored pressure in the line when disconnected.

OUTLET BLEEDERS

A 0.75" bleeder valve will be provided for each outlet 1.50" or larger. Automatic drain valves are acceptable with some outlets if deemed appropriate with the application.

The valves will be located behind the panel with a swing style handle control extended to the outside of the side pump panel. The handles will be chrome plated and provide a visual indication of valve position. The swing handle will provide an ergonomic position for operating the valve without twisting the wrist and provides excellent leverage. Bleeders will be located at the bottom of the pump panel.

They will be properly labeled identifying the discharge they are plumbed in to. The water discharged by the bleeders will be routed below the chassis frame rails.

LEFT SIDE OUTLET ELBOWS

The 2.50" discharge outlets located on the left side pump panel will be furnished with a 2.50" (F)

National Standard hose thread x 2.50" (M) National Standard hose thread, chrome plated, 45 degree elbow.

73 of 96

The elbow will be Pierce VLH, which incorporates an exclusive thread design to automatically relieve stored pressure in the line when disconnected.

RIGHT SIDE OUTLET ELBOWS

The 2.50" discharge outlets located on the right side pump panel will be furnished with a 2.50" (F)

National Standard hose thread x 2.50" (M) National Standard hose thread, chrome plated, 45 degree elbow.

The elbow will be Pierce VLH, which incorporates an exclusive thread design to automatically relieve stored pressure in the line when disconnected.

REAR OUTLET ELBOWS

The rear 5.00" outlet will be furnished with a 5.00" (F) National Standard hose thread x 5.00" Storz elbow adapter with Storz cap.

Elbows will be provided for one (1) discharge outlet.

ADDITIONAL REAR OUTLET ELBOWS

The 2.50" discharge outlets, located at the rear of the apparatus, will be furnished with a 2.50" (F)

National Standard hose thread x 2.50" (M) National Standard hose thread chrome plated, 45 degree elbow.

The elbow will be Pierce VLH, which incorporates an exclusive thread design to automatically relieve stored pressure in the line when disconnected.

LARGE DIAMETER OUTLET ELBOWS

The 5.00" outlet will be furnished with a 5.00" (F) National Standard hose thread x 5.00" Storz elbow adapter with Storz cap.

DISCHARGE OUTLET CONTROLS

The discharge outlets will incorporate a quarter-turn ball valve with the control located at the pump operator's panel. The valve operating mechanism will indicate the position of the valve.

If a handwheel control valve is used, the control will be a minimum of a 3.9" diameter stainless steel handwheel with a dial position indicator built in to the center of the handwheel.

DELUGE RISER

A 3.00" deluge riser will be installed above the pump in such a manner that a monitor can be mounted and used effectively. Piping will be rigidly braced and installed securely so no movement develops when the line is charged. The riser will be gated and controlled at the pump operator's panel. The outlet will include an Akron valve with a handwheel control.

MONITOR

An Akron Model #3440 "DeckMaster" waterway monitor shall be properly installed on the deluge riser.

74 of 96

This monitor shall include all electric U2 technology 12 VDC controls.

The monitor shall include the automatic stow feature.

A panel mounted control shall be installed on the pump operator's panel

Wireless remote control shall be provided.

The monitor shall be painted to match the body.

NOZZLE, DELUGE

An Akron 5177 Akromatic 1250 GPM Master Stream nozzle with 2.50" swivel and built in stream shaper will be provided. The nozzle will have a range of 250 to 1250 GPM.

The deluge riser will have male National Pipe Threads for mounting the monitor.

CROSSLAY HOSE BEDS, 1.50"

Two (2) crosslays with 1.50" outlets will be provided. Each bed to be capable of carrying 300' of 2" DJ hose and will be plumbed with 2.00" i.d. pipe and gated with a 2.00" quarter turn ball valve.

Outlets to be equipped with a 1.50" National Standard hose thread 90 degree swivel located in the hose bed so that hose may be removed from either side of apparatus.

The crosslay controls will be at the pump operator's panel.

The center crosslay dividers will be fabricated of .25" aluminum and will provide adjustment from side to side. The divider will be unpainted with a brushed finish.

Vertical scuffplates, constructed of stainless steel, will be provided at the front and rear ends of the bed on each side of vehicle.

Crosslay bed flooring will consist of removable perforated brushed aluminum.

CROSSLAY HOSE BEDS

One (1) crosslay with 2.50" outlets will be provided. Each bed to be capable of carrying TBD and will be plumbed with 2.50" i.d. pipe and gated with a 2.50" quarter turn ball valve.

Outlets to be equipped with a 2.50" National Standard hose thread 90 degree swivel located in the hose bed so that hose may be removed from either side of apparatus.

The crosslay controls will be at the pump operator's panel.

The center crosslay dividers will be fabricated of .25" aluminum and shall provide adjustment from side to side. The divider will be unpainted with a brushed finish. The remainder of the crosslay bed will be painted job color.

75 of 96

Stainless steel vertical scuffplates will be provided at hose bed ends (each side of vehicle). Bottom of hose bed ends (each side) will also be equipped with a stainless steel scuffplate.

Crosslay bed flooring will consist of removable perforated brushed aluminum.

CROSSLAY/DEADLAY HOSE RESTRAINT

Elastic netting will be provided across the top and ends of three (3) crosslay/deadlay opening(s) to secure the hose during travel. The netting will be permanently attached at the top center of the crosslay/deadlay bed and removable on each end.

CROSSLAY 8.00" LOWER THAN STANDARD

The crosslays will be lowered 8.00" from standard.

BOOSTER HOSE REEL

An Akron electric rewind booster hose reel will be installed over the pump in a recessed open compartment on the right side of the apparatus.

The reel features will include:

- Heavy-duty construction for durability

- All stainless steel hardware

- Rolled disc edges

- Chain guard

- Meets all NFPA requirements

- Standard inlet 90" super swivel with 1" female NPT threads

- Standard outlet 1" male NST threads

- 1000 psi pressure rating

- Capable of holding 250' of .75" or 150' of 1.00"

- Hand crank and brake

The exterior finish of the reel will be painted job color matching the body exterior.

A polished stainless steel roller and guide assembly will be mounted on the reel side of the apparatus.

Discharge control will be provided at the pump operator's panel. Plumbing to the reel will consist of

1.50" Aeroquip hose and a 1.50" valve.

76 of 96

REEL WARRANTY

The booster reel will have a five (5) year warranty provided by the reel manufacturer.

Reel motor will be protected from overload with a sized automatic reset circuit breaker.

An electric rewind control switch will be installed on the reel side pump panel.

Booster hose, 1.00" diameter and 150 feet, with chrome plated Barway, or equal couplings will be provided.

Working pressure of the booster hose will be a minimum of 800 psi.

Capacity of the hose reel will be 150 feet of 1.00" booster hose.

An Akron, model 1702, 1.00" booster hose nozzle with pistol grip will be provided.

There will be one (1) polished stainless steel, captive roller and guide assembly mounted on the passenger side.

FOAM SYSTEM

A foam system will not be required on this apparatus.

PUMP COMPARTMENT

The pump compartment will be separate from the hose body and compartments so that each may flex independently of the other. It will be a fabricated assembly of steel tubing, angles and channels which supports both the fire pump and the side running boards.

The pump compartment will be mounted on the chassis frame rails with rubber biscuits in a four point pattern to allow for chassis frame twist.

Pump compartment, pump, plumbing and gauge panels will be removable from the chassis in a single assembly.

PUMP MOUNTING

Pump will be mounted to a substructure which will be mounted to the chassis frame rail using rubber isolators. The mounting will allow chassis frame rails to flex independently without damage to the fire pump.

PUMP CONTROL PANELS (SIDE CONTROL)

All pump controls and gauges will be located at the left (driver's) side of the apparatus and properly marked.

The pump panel on the right (passenger's) side is removable with lift and turn type fasteners. The left

(driver's) side is fastened with screws.

The control panels will be 48.00" wide.

77 of 96

The gauge and control panels will be two (2) separate panels for ease of maintenance.

The side gauge panel will be hinged at the bottom with a full length stainless steel hinge. The fasteners used to hold the panel in the upright position will be quarter turn type. Vinyl covered cable or chains will be used to hold the gauge panel in the dropped position.

Polished stainless steel trim collars will be installed around all inlets and outlets.

All push/pull valve controls will have 1/4 turn locking control rods with polished chrome plated zinc tee handles. Guides for the push/pull control rods will be chrome plated zinc castings securely mounted to the pump panel. Push/pull valve controls will be capable of locking in any position. The control rods will pull straight out of the panel and will be equipped with universal joints to eliminate binding.

The identification tag for each valve control will be recessed in the face of the tee handle.

All discharge outlets will have color coded identification tags, with each discharge having its own unique color. Color coding will include the labeling of the outlet and the drain for each corresponding discharge.

All line pressure gauges will be mounted in individual chrome plated castings with the identification tag recessed in the casting below the gauge. All remaining identification tags will be mounted on the pump panel in chrome plated bezels. Mounting of the castings and identification bezels will be done with a threaded peg cast on the back side of the bezel or screws.

PUMP PANEL CONFIGURATION

The pump panel configuration will be neat and orderly.

PUMP AND GAUGE PANEL

The pump and gauge panels will be constructed of aluminum with a painted FormCoat black finish. A polished aluminum trim molding will be provided around each panel.

The passenger's side pump panel will be removable and fastened with swell type fasteners.

PUMP COMPARTMENT LIGHT

A pump compartment light will be provided inside the right side pump enclosure and accessible through a door on the pump panel.

A .125" weep hole will be provided in each light lens, preventing moisture retention.

Engine monitoring graduated LED indicators will be incorporated with the pressure controller.

Also provided at the pump panel will be the following:

- Master Pump Drain Control

78 of 96

AIR HORN SWITCH

An air horn control switch will be provided at the pump operator's control panel. This switch will be red and properly labeled. The button will be located within easy reach of the operator in the electrical switch panel.

VACUUM AND PRESSURE GAUGES

The pump vacuum and pressure gauges will be liquid filled and manufactured by Class 1, Inc.

The gauges will be a minimum of 4.00" in diameter and will have white faces with black lettering, with a pressure range of 30.00"-0-600#.

Gauge construction will include a Zytel nylon case with adhesive mounting gasket and threaded retaining nut.

The pump pressure and vacuum gauges will be installed adjacent to each other at the pump operator's control panel.

Test port connections will be provided at the pump operator's panel. One will be connected to the intake side of the pump, and the other to the discharge manifold of the pump. They will have 0.25 in. standard pipe thread connections and non-corrosive polished stainless steel or brass plugs. They will be marked with a label.

This gauge will include a 10 year warranty against leakage, pointer defect, and defective bourdon tube.

PRESSURE GAUGES

The individual "line" pressure gauges for the discharges will be Class 1© interlube filled.

They will be a minimum of 2.00" in diameter and have white faces with black lettering.

Gauge construction will include a Zytel nylon case with adhesive mounting gasket and threaded retaining nut.

Gauges will have a pressure range of 30"-0-400#.

The individual pressure gauge will be installed as close to the outlet control as practical.

This gauge will include a 10 year warranty against leakage, pointer defect, and defective bourdon tube.

WATER LEVEL GAUGE

There will be an electronic water level gauge provided on the operator's panel that registers water level by means of five (5) colored LED lights. The lights will be durable, ultra-bright five (5) LED design viewable through 180 degrees. The water level indicators will be as follows:

100 percent = Green

75 percent = Yellow

79 of 96

50 percent = Yellow

25 percent = Yellow

Refill = Red

The light will flash when the level drops below the given level indicator to provide an eighth of a tank indication. To further alert the pump operator, the lights will flash sequentially when the water tank is empty.

The level measurement will be based on the sensing of head pressure of the fluid in the tank.

The display will be constructed of a solid plastic material with a chrome plated die cast bezel to reduce vibrations that can cause broken wires and loose electronic components. The encapsulated design will provide complete protection from water and environmental elements. An industrial pressure transducer will be mounted to the outside of the tank. The field calibratable display measures head pressure to accurately show the tank level.

LIGHT SHIELD

There will be a polished, 16 gauge stainless steel light shield installed over the pump operator's panel.

There will be 12 volt DC white LED lights installed under the stainless steel light shield to illuminate the controls, switches, essential instructions, gauges, and instruments necessary for the operation of the apparatus. These lights will be activated by the pump panel light switch.

Additional lights will be included every 18.00" depending on the size of the pump house.

One (1) pump panel light will come on when the pump is in ok to pump mode.

There will be a light activated above the pump panel light switch when the parking brake is set. This is to afford the operator some illumination when first approaching the control panel.

There will be a green pump engaged indicator light activated on at the operator's panel when the pump is shifted into gear from inside the cab.

AIR HORN SYSTEM

Two (2) Grover Stutter tone air horns will be provided and located in the front bumper, recessed in the bumper. The horn system will be piped to the air brake system wet tank utilizing .38" tubing. A pressure protection valve will be installed in-line to prevent loss of air in the air brake system.

AIR HORN CONTROL

A lanyard rope pull control will be provided within reach of the passenger.

ELECTRONIC SIREN

A Whelen®, Model 295SLSA1, electronic siren with noise canceling microphone will be provided.

This siren to be active when the battery switch is on and that emergency master switch is on.

Electronic siren head will be located in the center console.

80 of 96

Siren will be actuated by a foot switch on the officer's side and by the horn button in the steering wheel.

The driver will have the option to control the siren or the chassis horns from the horn button by means of a selector switch.

SPEAKER

There will be one (1) speaker provided. Each speaker will be a Whelen®, Model SA315P, black nylon composite, 100-watt, with through bumper mounting brackets and polished stainless steel grille. Each speaker will be connected to the siren amplifier.

The speaker(s) will be recessed in the front bumper on the driver's side.

AUXILIARY MECHANICAL SIREN

A Federal Q2B® siren will be furnished. A siren brake button will be installed on the switch panel.

The control solenoid will be powered up after the emergency master switch is activated.

The mechanical siren will be mounted on the bumper deck plate. It will be mounted on the right side. A reinforcement plate will be furnished to support the siren.

SWITCHES, MECHANICAL SIREN

The mechanical siren will be actuated by two (2) foot switches, one (1) on the officer's side and one (1) on drivers side, and by a horn button in the steering wheel. The driver will have the option to control the siren or the chassis horns from the horn button by means of a selector switch located on the instrument panel.

CAB ROOF LIGHTBAR

There will be one (1) 82.00" Whelen Freedom, Model: FN**QLED lightbar mounted on the cab roof.

This lightbar will include the following:

Two (2) red flashing forward facing LED modules.

Two (2) white flashing forward facing LED modules.

Two (2) red flashing front corner LED modules.

One (1) red flashing driver side facing LED module.

One (1) red flashing officer side facing LED module.

There will be a switch located in the cab on the switch panel to control the lightbars.

The color of the lenses will be clear.

The white LED lights will be deactivated when the parking brake is applied.

ADDITIONAL CAB ROOF SIDE LIGHTBARS

There will be two (2) 24.00" Whelen, Freedom, mini LED lightbars mounted on the roof, one (1) on each side, over the crew cab doors.

81 of 96

Each lightbar will include the following:

Two (2) red flashing corner LED modules.

One (1) blue flashing forward LED module.

These lightbars will be activated with the roof light.

The lenses of each lightbar will be clear.

The lights in the lightbars may be load managed when the parking brake is applied.

FRONT ZONE LOWER LIGHTS

There will be two (2) pair of warning lights installed on the cab face above the headlights in a rectangular common bezel.

The outer lights will be Whelen, Model 60*02F*R LED lights.

These lights will be red Super LED/clear lens.

The inboard lights will be Code-3, Model OL13FX, 35W halogen oscillating lights.

The color of the both inside lights blue.

There will be a switch located in the cab on the switch panel to control these lights.

The inside lights will be disabled if white, or may be load managed if colored, when the parking brake is applied.

TRAFFIC WARNING LIGHT

There will be two (2) Tri Lite Mars "888" Traffic Breaker, Model TB8-L1-P/*, white LED lights with a figure-eight (8) light pattern mounted on stainless steel pedestals, one (1) light located on each side of cab face, just below the windshield.

The lens color to be red.

There will be a switch located in the cab, on the switch panel to control the lights.

The lights will be load managed if colored, or disabled if white, when the parking brake is applied.

SIDE ZONE LOWER LIGHTING

There will be four (4) Whelen, Model M6*, LED flashing warning lights with bezels located in the following positions:

Two (2) lights, one (1) each side on the bumper extension.

The side front light to be red to the front and blue to the rear.

82 of 96

Two (2) lights, above the rear wheel well.

The side rear lights to be blue to the front and red to the rear.

All four (4) lights will include a clear lens.

There will be a switch located in the cab on the switch panel to control the lights.

Any white warning lights will be disabled when the parking brake is set.

SIDE WARNING LIGHTS

There will be two (2) Whelen, Model M9* LED flashing warning light(s) with bezel(s) provided one on each side of cab, behind crew cab doors below the scene lights.

The color of the light(s) to be red to the front and blue to the rear.

All of these lights will include a clear lens.

These lights will be activated with the side warning switch.

Any white warning lights will be deactivated when the parking brake is set.

These lights may be load managed when the parking brake is applied.

SIDE WARNING LIGHTS

There will be two (2) pairs of Whelen Model Strip-Lite™, PS*00F*R LED lights, recessed within the rear body rub rail, one each side, under the D1 and D3, P1 and P3 compartment.

The color of the lights will be red.

The lens color will be clear.

These lights will be activated with the side warning switch.

Any white warning lights will be deactivated when the parking brake is set.

SIDE WARNING LIGHTS

There will be two (2) Whelen, Model M6*C LED flashing warning light(s) with bezel(s) provided behind crew cab doors, in line with the door handles, one each side.

The color of the lights will be red.

All of these lights will include a clear lens.

These lights will be activated with the Side Zone Lower warning lights.

83 of 96

REAR ZONE LOWER LIGHTING

There will be two (2) Whelen, Model M6* LED flashing warning lights with Whelen, Model M6FC chrome flanges located at the rear of the apparatus.

The driver's side rear light to be red to the outside and blue to the inside.

The passenger's side rear light to be red to the outside and blue to the inside.

Both lights will include a lens that is clear.

There will be a switch located in the cab on the switch panel to control the lights.

REAR WARNING LIGHTS

There will be two (2) Whelen®, Model 6RB**, LED flashing warning light(s) with Whelen, Model

6EFLANG, chrome flange(s) provided one each side, just below the scene lights.

The color of the lights will be red.

The color of the lens of the light(s) will be clear.

These lights will be activated with the rear upper warning switch.

REAR/SIDE ZONE UPPER WARNING LIGHTS

There will be two (2) Whelen®, Model L31H*FN, LED warning beacons provided at the rear of the truck, located one (1) each side. There will be a switch located in the cab on the switch panel to control the beacons.

The color of the lights will be red LEDs with both domes clear.

The rear warning lights will be mounted on stainless steel brackets with all wiring totally enclosed.

These brackets will also support the clearance/marker lights.

LIGHT TOWER

There will be one (1) Will-Burt, Model NS2.3-600 WHL, light tower provided.

There will be four (4) Whelen, Model PFP2, 150 watt 12 volt LED DC light heads included on this tower.

The painted parts of the light tower and the light heads to be black.

This tower will be connected to the Do Not Move Truck Indicator in the cab.

The lights included on this tower may be load managed when the parking brake is applied.

LIGHT TOWER LOCATION

The light tower will be installed on the crew cab roof.

84 of 96

LIGHT TOWER CONTROLLER

There will be one (1) handheld wired controller included.

LOCATION FOR THE LIGHT TOWER CONTROLLER

The light tower controller will be installed in the driver's side front body compartment.

LOOSE EQUIPMENT

The following equipment will be furnished with the completed unit:

- One (1) bag of chrome, stainless steel, or cadmium plated screws, nuts, bolts and washers, as used in the construction of the unit.

NFPA REQUIRED LOOSE EQUIPMENT,PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT

The following loose equipment as outlined in NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, section 5.8.2 and 5.8.3 will be provided by the fire department. All loose equipment will be installed on the apparatus before placed in emergency service, unless the fire department waives NFPA section 4.21.

800 ft (60 m) of 2.50" (65 mm) or larger fire hose.

400 ft (120 m) of 1.50" (38 mm), 1.75" (45 mm), or 2.00" (52 mm) fire hose.

One (1) handline nozzle, 200 gpm (750 L/min) minimum.

Two (2) handline nozzles, 95 gpm (360 L/min) minimum.

One (1) playpipe with shutoff and 1.00" (25 mm), 1.125" (29 mm), and 1.25" (32 mm) tips.

One (1) SCBA complying with NFPA 1981, Standard on Open-Circuit Self-Contained

Breathing Apparatus for Fire and Emergency Services, for each assigned seating position, but not fewer than four (4), mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus or stored in containers supplied by the SCBA manufacturer.

One (1) spare SCBA cylinder for each SCBA carried, each mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus or stored in a specially designed storage space(s).

One (1) first aid kit.

Four (4) combination spanner wrenches mounted in bracket(s) fastened to the apparatus.

Two (2) hydrant wrenches mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus.

Four (4) ladder belts meeting the requirements of NFPA 1983, Standard on Fire Service Life

Safety Rope and System Components (if equipped with an aerial device).

One (1) double female 2.50" (65 mm) adapter with National Hose threads, mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus.

One (1) double male 2.50' (65 mm) adapter with National Hose threads, mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus.

One (1) rubber mallet, for use on suction hose connections, mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus.

Two (2) salvage covers each a minimum size of 12 ft x 14 ft (3.7 m x 4.3 m).

85 of 96

One (1) traffic vest for each seating position, each vest to comply with ANSI/ISEA 207,

Standard for High Visibility Public Safety Vests, and have a five-point breakaway feature that includes two (2) at the shoulders, two (2) at the sides, and one (1) at the front.

Five (5) fluorescent orange traffic cones not less than 28.00" (711 mm) in height, each equipped with a 6.00" (152 mm) retro-reflective white band no more than 4.00" (152 mm) from the top of the cone, and an additional 4.00" (102 mm) retro-reflective white band 2.00" (51 mm) below the

6.00" (152 mm) band.

Five (5) illuminated warning devices such as highway flares, unless the five (5) fluorescent orange traffic cones have illuminating capabilities.

One (1) automatic external defibrillator (AED).

If the supply hose carried does not use sexless couplings, an additional double female adapter and double male adapter, sized to fit the supply hose carried, will be carried mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus.

If none of the pump intakes are valved, a hose appliance that is equipped with one or more gated intakes with female swivel connection(s) compatible with the supply hose used on one side and a swivel connection with pump intake threads on the other side will be carried. Any intake connection larger than 3.00" (75 mm) will include a pressure relief device that meets the requirements of 16.6.6.

If the apparatus does not have a 2.50" National Hose (NH) intake, an adapter from 2.50" NH female to a pump intake will be carried, mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus if not already mounted directly to the intake.

If the supply hose carried has other than 2.50" National Hose (NH) threads, adapters will be carried to allow feeding the supply hose from a 2.50" NH thread male discharge and to allow the hose to connect to a 2.50" NH female intake, mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus if not already mounted directly to the discharge or intake.

SOFT SUCTION HOSE

There will be a 15' length of 6.00" soft suction hose provided with a 6.00" long handle swivel coupling on one (1) end and a 4.50" long handle swivel coupling on the other.

- One (1)-6.00" National Standard hose thread barrel strainer, chrome plated

DRY CHEMICAL EXTINGUISHER PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT

NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, section 5.8.3 requires one (1) approved dry chemical portable fire extinguisher with a minimum 80-B:C rating mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus.

The extinguisher is not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide and mount the extinguisher.

WATER EXTINGUISHER PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT

NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, section 5.8.3 requires one (1) 2.5 gallon or larger water extinguisher mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus.

86 of 96

The extinguisher is not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide and mount the extinguisher.

FLATHEAD AXE PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT

NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, Section 5.8.3 requires one (1) flathead axe mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus.

The axe is not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide and mount the axe.

PICKHEAD AXE PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT

NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, Section 5.8.3 requires one (1) pickhead axe mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus.

The axe is not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide and mount the axe.

PAINT - BODY PAINTED TO MATCH CAB

The exterior custom cab and body painting procedure will consist of a seven (7) step finishing process as follows:

1. Manual Surface Preparation - All exposed metal surfaces on the custom cab and body will be thoroughly cleaned and prepared for painting. Imperfections on the exterior surfaces will be removed and sanded to a smooth finish. Exterior seams will be sealed before painting. Exterior surfaces that will not be painted include; chrome plating, polished stainless steel, anodized aluminum and bright aluminum treadplate.

2. Chemical Cleaning and Pretreatment - All surfaces will be chemically cleaned to remove dirt, oil, grease, and metal oxides to ensure the subsequent coatings bond well. The aluminum surfaces will be properly cleaned and treated using a high pressure, high temperature 4 step Acid

Etch process. The steel and stainless surfaces will be properly cleaned and treated using a high temperature 3 step process specifically designed for steel or stainless. The chemical treatment converts the metal surface to a passive condition to help prevent corrosion. A final pure water rinse will be applied to all metal surfaces.

3. Surfacer Primer - The Surfacer Primer will be applied to a chemically treated metal surface to provide a strong corrosion protective basecoat. A minimum thickness of 2 mils of Surfacer

Primer is applied to surfaces that require a Critical aesthetic finish. The Surfacer Primer is a two-component high solids urethane that has excellent sanding properties and an extra smooth finish when sanded.

4. Finish Sanding - The Surfacer Primer will be sanded with a fine grit abrasive to achieve an ultrasmooth finish. This sanding process is critical to produce the smooth mirror like finish in the topcoat.

5. Sealer Primer - The Sealer Primer is applied prior to the Basecoat in all areas that have not been previously primed with the Surfacer Primer. The Sealer Primer is a two-component high solids urethane that goes on smooth and provides excellent gloss hold out when topcoated.

87 of 96

6. Basecoat Paint - Two coats of a high performance, two component high solids polyurethane basecoat will be applied. The Basecoat will be applied to a thickness that will achieve the proper color match. The Basecoat will be used in conjunction with a urethane clear coat to provide protection from the environment.

7. Clear Coat - Two (2) coats of Clear Coat will be applied over the Basecoat color. The Clear

Coat is a two-component high solids urethane that provides superior gloss and durability to the exterior surfaces. Lap style and roll-up doors will be Clear Coated to match the body. Paint warranty for the roll-up doors will be provided by the roll-up door manufacture.

Specifications are written to define cyclic corrosion testing, physical strengths, durability and minimum appearance requirements must be met in order for an exterior paint finish to be considered acceptable as a Pierce quality finish.

Each batch of basecoat color is checked for a proper match before painting of the cab and the body.

After the cab and body are painted, the color is verified again to make sure that it matches the color standard. Electronic color measuring equipment is used to compare the color sample to the color standard entered into the computer. Color specifications are used to determine the color match. A Delta

E reading is used to determine a good color match within each family color.

All removable items such as brackets, compartment doors, door hinges, and trim will be removed and separately if required, to ensure paint behind all mounted items. Body assemblies that cannot be finish painted after assembly will be finish painted before assembly.

The cab will be two-tone, with the upper section painted #101 black and lower section of the cab and body painted #106 dark red.

PAINT - ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT

Contractor will meet or exceed all current State regulations concerning paint operations. Pollution control will include measures to protect the atmosphere, water and soil. Controls will include the following conditions:

Topcoats and primers will be chrome and lead free.

Metal treatment chemicals will be chrome free. The wastewater generated in the metal treatment process will be treated on-site to remove any other heavy metals.

Particulate emission collection from sanding operations will have a 99.99% efficiency factor.

Particulate emissions from painting operations will be collected by a dry filter or water wash process. If the dry filter is used, it will have an efficiency rating of 98.00%. Water wash systems will be 99.97% efficient

Water from water wash booths will be reused. Solids will be removed on a continual basis to keep the water clean.

Paint wastes are disposed of in an environmentally safe manner.

Empty metal paint containers will be to recover the metal.

88 of 96

Solvents used in clean-up operations will be recycled on-site or sent off-site for distillation and returned for reuse.

Additionally, the finished apparatus will not be manufactured with or contain products that have ozone depleting substances. Contractor will, upon demand, present evidence that the manufacturing facility meets the above conditions and that it is in compliance with his State EPA rules and regulations.

PAINT CHASSIS FRAME ASSEMBLY

The chassis frame assembly will be painted black before the installation of the cab and body, and before installation of the engine and transmission assembly, air brake lines, electrical wire harnesses, etc.

Components that are included with the chassis frame assembly that will be painted are:

Frame rails

Frame liners

Cross members

Axles

Suspensions

Steering gear

Battery boxes

Bumper extension weldment

Frame extensions

Body mounting angles

Rear Body support substructure (front and rear)

Pump house substructure

Air tanks

Fuel tank

Castings

Individual piece parts used in chassis and body assembly

Components treated with epoxy E-coat protection prior to paint:

Two (2) C-channel frame rails

Two (2) frame liners

The E-coat process will meet the technical properties shown.

PAINT, FRONT WHEELS

All wheel surfaces, inside and outside, will be provided with powder coat paint #101 black.

PAINT, REAR WHEELS

All wheel surfaces, inside and outside, will be provided with powder coat paint #101 black.

89 of 96

COMPARTMENT INTERIOR PAINT

The compartment interior will be painted with a gray spatter finish for ease of cleaning and to make it easier to touch up scratches and nicks.

REFLECTIVE BAND

A 6.00" black reflective band will be provided across the front of the vehicle and along the sides of the body.

The reflective band provided on the cab face will be at the headlight level.

CHEVRON STRIPING, REAR

There will be alternating chevron striping located on the rear-facing vertical surface of the apparatus.

The rear surface, excluding the rear compartment door, will be covered.

The colors will be red and fluorescent yellow green diamond grade.

Each stripe will be 6.00" in width.

This will meet the requirements of NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, which states that 50% of the rear surface will be covered with chevron striping.

REFLECTIVE STRIPE, CAB DOORS

A 6.00" x 16.00" black reflective stripe will be provided across the interior of each cab door. The stripe will be located approximately 1.00" up from the bottom, on the door panel.

This stripe will meet the NFPA 1901 requirement.

CAB FACE STRIPE

There will be a printed effect gold leaf stripe provided around each of the two (2) warning light bezels on the front of the cab.

CAB STRIPE

There shall be a printed effect gold leaf stripe located just below the window line on each side of the cab.

LETTERING

The lettering will be totally encapsulated between two (2) layers of clear vinyl.

LETTERING

Forty-one (41) to sixty (60) genuine gold leaf lettering, 3.00" high, with outline and shade will be provided.

LETTERING/NUMERALS ON CAB GRILLE

Two (2) painted letters/numerals with outline, as determined by the fire department, will be provided on the cab grille.

90 of 96

EMBLEM

There will be two (2) pair of "stop sign" emblems 12.00" high x 12.00" wide installed on the inside of each cab door to be seen when door is open. The emblem will have a red reflective background with white lettering. Emblems will be installed on a smooth surface.

MALTESE CROSS INSTALLATION

There will be one (1) pair of maltese crosses, comprised of printed effect gold leaf material, provided and installed on the front cab doors.

FIRE APPARATUS PARTS CD MANUAL

There will be two (2) custom parts manuals for the complete fire apparatus provided in CD format with the completed unit.

The manuals will contain the following:

Job number

Part numbers with full descriptions

Table of contents

Parts section sorted in functional groups reflecting a major system, component, or assembly

Parts section sorted in alphabetical order

Instructions on how to locate parts

The manuals will be specifically written for the chassis and body model being purchased. It will not be a generic manual for a multitude of different chassis and bodies.

SERVICE PARTS INTERNET SITE

The service parts information included in these manuals are also available on the factory website. The website offers additional functions and features not contained in this manual, such as digital photographs and line drawings of select items. The website also features electronic search tools to assist in locating parts quickly.

CHASSIS SERVICE CD MANUALS

There will be two (2) CD format chassis service manuals containing parts and service information on major components provided with the completed unit.

The manual will contain the following sections:

Job number

Table of contents

Troubleshooting

Front Axle/Suspension

Brakes

EngineTires

91 of 96

Wheels

Cab

Electrical, DC

Air Systems

Plumbing

Appendix

The manual will be specifically written for the chassis model being purchased. It will not be a generic manual for a multitude of different chassis and bodies.

CHASSIS OPERATION CD MANUALS

There will be two (2) CD format chassis operation manuals provided.

ONE (1) YEAR MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP

A Pierce basic apparatus limited warranty certificate, WA0008, is included with this proposal.

ENGINE WARRANTY

A Detroit Diesel five (5) year limited engine warranty will be provided. A limited warranty certificate,

WA0180, is included with this proposal.

STEERING GEAR WARRANTY

A Sheppard three (3) year limited steering gear warranty shall be provided. A copy of the warranty certificate shall be submitted with the bid package.

FIFTY (50) YEAR STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY

The Pierce custom chassis frame limited warranty certificate, WA0013, is included with this proposal.

FRONT AXLE THREE (3) YEAR MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP WARRANTY

The Pierce TAK-4 suspension limited warranty certificate, WA0050, is included with this proposal.

REAR AXLE TWO (2) YEAR MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP WARRANTY

A Meritor axle limited warranty certificate, WA0046, is included with this proposal.

ABS BRAKE SYSTEM THREE (3) YEAR MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP WARRANTY

A Meritor Wabco™ABS brake system limited warranty certificate, WA0232, is included with this proposal.

TEN (10) YEAR STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY

The Pierce custom cab limited warranty certificate, WA0012, is included with this proposal.

TEN (10) YEAR PRO-RATED PAINT AND CORROSION

A Pierce cab limited pro-rated paint warranty certificate, WA0055, is included with this proposal.

92 of 96

FIVE (5) YEAR MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP

The Pierce Command Zone electronics limited warranty certificate, WA0014, is included with this proposal.

.

CAMERA SYSTEM WARRANTY

A Pierce fifty four (54) month warranty will be provided for the camera system.

COMPARTMENT LIGHT WARRANTY

A ten (10) year material and workmanship limited warranty will be provided for the Pierce 12 volt DC

LED strip lights. The warranty will cover the LED strip lights to be free from defects in material and workmanship that would arise under normal use.

A copy of the warranty certificate will be submitted with the bid package (No Exception).

TRANSMISSION WARRANTY

The transmission will have a five (5) year/unlimited mileage warranty covering 100 percent parts and labor. The warranty will be provided by Allison Transmission.

Note: The transmission cooler is not covered under any extended warranty you may be getting on your

Allison Transmission. Please review your Allison Transmission warranty for coverage limitations.

TRANSMISSION COOLER WARRANTY

The transmission cooler will carry a five (5) year parts and labor warranty (exclusive to the transmission cooler). In addition, a collateral damage warranty will also be in effect for the first three (3) years of the warranty coverage and will not exceed $10,000 per occurrence. A copy of the warranty certificate will be submitted with the bid package.

WATER TANK WARRANTY

A UPF poly water tank limited warranty certificate, WA0195, is included with this proposal.

TEN (10) YEAR STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY

The Pierce apparatus body limited warranty certificate, WA0009, is included with this proposal.

ROLL UP DOOR MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP WARRANTY

A Gortite roll-up door limited warranty will be provided. The mechanical components of the roll-up door will be warranted against defects in material and workmanship for the lifetime of the vehicle. A

six (6) year limited warranty will be provided on painted and satin roll up doors.

The limited warranty certificate, WA0190, is included with this proposal.

93 of 96

PUMP WARRANTY

A Waterous pump limited warranty certificate, WA0225, is included with this proposal.

TEN (10) YEAR PUMP PLUMBING WARRANTY

The Pierce apparatus plumbing limited warranty certificate, WA0035, is included with this proposal.

TEN (10) YEAR PRO-RATED PAINT AND CORROSION

A Pierce body limited pro-rated paint warranty certificate, WA0057, is included with this proposal.

THREE (3) YEAR MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP

The Pierce Goldstar gold leaf lamination limited warranty limited warranty certificate, WA0018, is included with this proposal.

VEHICLE STABILITY CERTIFICATION

The fire apparatus manufacturer will provide a certification stating the apparatus complies with NFPA

1901, current edition, section 4.13, Vehicle Stability. The certification will be provided at the time of bid.

ENGINE INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION

The fire apparatus manufacturer will provide a certification, along with a letter from the engine manufacturer stating they approve of the engine installation in the bidder's chassis. The certification will be provided at the time of bid.

POWER STEERING CERTIFICATION

The fire apparatus manufacturer will provide a certification stating the power steering system as installed meets the requirements of the component supplier. The certification will be provided at the time of bid.

CAB INTEGRITY CERTIFICATION

Pierce manufacturing will provide a cab crash test certification with this proposal. The certification states that the cab must meet or exceed the requirements below:

- European Occupant Protection Standard ECE Regulation No.29

- SAE J2422 Cab Roof Strength Evaluation - Quasi-Static Loading Heavy Trucks

- SAE J2420 COE Frontal Strength Evaluation - Dynamic Loading Heavy Trucks

- Roof Crush

The cab will be subjected to a roof crush force of 100,000 lb. This value will be 450 percent of the ECE

29 criteria, which must be equivalent to the front axle rating up to a maximum of ten (10) metric tons.

- Side Impact

94 of 96

The cab will be subjected to dynamic preload with a 13,275-lb moving barrier is slammed into the side of the cab at 5.50 mph, striking with an impact of 13,000 ft-lb of energy. This test will closely represent the forces a cab will see in a rollover incident.

- Frontal Impact

The cab will withstand a frontal force produced from 65,200 ft-lb of energy using a swing-bob type platen.

The same cab will withstand all tests without any measurable intrusion into the survival space of the occupant area.

CAB DOOR DURABILITY CERTIFICATION

Robust cab doors help protect occupants. Cab doors will survive a 200,000 cycle door slam test where the slamming force exceeds 20 G's of deceleration. The bidder will certify that the sample doors similar to those provided on the apparatus have been tested and have met these criteria without structural damage, latch malfunction, or significant component wear.

WINDSHIELD WIPER DURABILITY CERTIFICATION

Visibility during inclement weather is essential to safe apparatus performance. Windshield wipers will survive a 3 million cycle durability test in accordance with section 6.2 of SAE J198 Windshield Wiper

Systems - Trucks, Buses and Multipurpose Vehicles. The bidder will certify that the wiper system design has been tested and that the wiper system has met these criteria.

SEAT BELT ANCHOR STRENGTH

Seat belt attachment strength is regulated by Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards and should be validated through testing. Each seat belt anchor design will withstand 3000 lb of pull on both the lap and shoulder belt in accordance with FMVSS 571.210 Seat Belt Assembly Anchorages. The bidder will certify that each anchor design was pull tested to the required force and met the appropriate criteria.

SEAT MOUNTING STRENGTH

Seat attachment strength is regulated by Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards and should be validated through testing. Each seat mounting design will be tested to withstand 20 G's of force in accordance with FMVSS 571.207 Seating Systems. The bidder will certify that each seat mount and cab structure design was pull tested to the required force and met the appropriate criteria.

CAB DEFROSTER CERTIFICATION

Visibility during inclement weather is essential to safe apparatus performance. The defroster system will clear the required windshield zones in accordance with SAE J381 Windshield Defrosting Systems

Test Procedure And Performance Requirements - Trucks, Buses, And Multipurpose Vehicles. The bidder will certify that the defrost system design has been tested in a cold chamber and passes the SAE

J381 criteria.

95 of 96

CAB HEATER CERTIFICATION

Good cab heat performance and regulation provides a more effective working environment for personnel, whether in-transit, or at a scene. The cab heaters will warm the cab 77 degrees Fahrenheit from a cold-soak, within 30 minutes when tested using the coolant supply methods found in SAE J381.

The bidder will certify that a substantially similar cab has been tested and has met these criteria.

AMP DRAW REPORT

The bidder will provide, at the time of bid and delivery, an itemized print out of the expected amp draw of the entire vehicle's electrical system.

The manufacturer of the apparatus will provide the following:

Documentation of the electrical system performance tests.

A written load analysis, which will include the following: o The nameplate rating of the alternator. o The alternator rating under the conditions specified per:

 Applicable NFPA 1901 or 1906 (Current Edition). o The minimum continuous load of each component that is specified per:

 Applicable NFPA 1901 or 1906 (Current Edition). o Additional loads that, when added to the minimum continuous load, determine the total connected load. o Each individual intermittent load.

All of the above listed items will be provided by the bidder per the applicable NFPA 1901 or 1906

(Current Edition).

96 of 96

Bid Number:

Department:

247

Princeton, Borough of

Turning Performance Analysis

5/27/2015

Chassis:

Body:

Arrow XT Chassis, Aerials, Single Axle, 75' HAL

Aerial, HD Ladder, 75' HAL, Quint, Alum Body

Parameters:

Inside Cramp Angle:

Axle Track:

Wheel Offset:

Tread Width:

Chassis Overhang:

Additional Bumper Depth:

Front Overhang:

Wheelbase:

Calculated Turning Radii:

Inside Turn:

Curb to curb:

Wall to wall:

Comments:

40 o

82.92 in.

5.25 in.

17.4 in.

68.99 in.

13 in.

81.99 in.

226.5 in.

21 ft. 4 in.

36 ft. 1 in.

39 ft. 11 in.

OptionDescription

Axle, Front, Oshkosh TAK-4, Non Drive, 24,000 lb,

Qtm/AXT/DCF

Wheels, Front, 22.50" x 12.25", Steel, Hub Pilot

Tires, Front, Goodyear, G296 MSA, 425/65R22.50, 20 ply,

Fire Service Load Rating

Bumper, 19" Extd, Painted/Reinforced, "Chicago Design",

All Chassis

Aerial, 75' HAL, Single Axle, 750# Tip Load

1

Bid Number:

Department:

247

Princeton, Borough of

Definitions:

Turning Performance Analysis

Chassis:

Body:

Arrow XT Chassis, Aerials, Single Axle, 75' HAL

Aerial, HD Ladder, 75' HAL, Quint, Alum Body

5/27/2015

Tread Width

Chassis Overhang

Additional Bumper Depth

Wheelbase

Inside Turning Radius

Curb to Curb Turning Radius

Wall to Wall Turning Radius

Width of the tire tread.

Distance of the center-line of the front axle to the front edge of the cab. This does not include the bumper depth.

Depth that the bumper assembly adds to the front overhang.

Distance between the center lines of the vehicle's front and rear axles.

Radius of the smallest circle around which the vehicle can turn.

Radius of the smallest circle inside of which the vehicle's tires can turn. This measurement assumes a curb height of 9 inches.

Radius of the smallest circle inside of which the entire vehicle can turn. This measurement takes into account any front overhang due to chassis,bumper extensions and/or aerial devices.

2

EXHIBIT C

AFFIRMATIVE ACTION/ EQUAL EMPLOYMENT GOAL COMPLIANCE

ATTACHMENT for

PROCUREMENT AND SERVICE CONTRACTS, INCLUDING

PROFESSIONAL SERVICES AGREEMENTS

Pursuant to N.J.A.C. 17:27-3.5 and 4.3, the Contractor/Vendor shall submit to the Municipality

(also referred to as “public agency” or “agency”), after notification of award but prior to execution of a goods and services contract with the Municipality, one of the following three documents:

(1) Appropriate evidence that the contractor is operating under an existing Federally approved or sanctioned affirmative action program; or

(2) A certificate of employee information report approval, issued in accordance with N.J.A.C. 17:27-

4; or

(3) An employee information report (Form AA302), electronically provided by the Division and distributed to the Municipality, through the Division’s website, to be completed by the contractor, in accordance with N.J.A.C. 17:27-4. A contractor shall not be eligible to submit an employee information report unless the contractor certifies on the AA302 form that he or she has never before applied for a certificate of employee information report in accordance with rules promulgated by the Treasurer pursuant to N.J.S.A. 10:5-31 et seq., as amended and supplemented from time to time; and agrees to submit immediately to the Division a copy of the employee information report.

During performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows:

A. The contractor or subcontractor, where applicable, will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of age, race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, affectional or sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, disability, nationality or sex. Except with respect to affectional or sexual orientation and gender identity or expression, the contractor will ensure that equal employment opportunity is afforded to such applicants in recruitment and employment, and that all employees are treated during employment, without regard to their age, race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, affectional or sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, disability, nationality or sex. Such equal employment opportunity shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the public agency compliance officer setting forth provisions of this nondiscrimination clause.

B. The contractor or subcontractor, where applicable will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to age, race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, affectional or sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, disability, nationality or sex.

C. The contractor or subcontractor will send to each labor union, with which it has a collective bargaining agreement, a notice, to be provided by the agency contracting officer, advising the labor union of the contractor's commitments under this chapter and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment.

D. The contractor or subcontractor, where applicable, agrees to comply with any regulations promulgated by the Treasurer, pursuant to N.J.S.A. 10:5-31 et seq., as amended and supplemented from time to time and the Americans with Disabilities Act.

E. The contractor or subcontractor agrees to make good faith efforts to meet targeted county employment goals established in accordance with N.J.A.C. 17:27-5.2.

F. The contractor or subcontractor agrees to inform in writing its appropriate recruitment agencies including, but not limited to, employment agencies, placement bureaus, colleges, universities and labor unions, that it does not discriminate on the basis of age, race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, affectional or sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, disability, nationality or sex, and that it will discontinue the use of any recruitment agency which engages in direct or indirect discriminatory practices.

G. The contractor or subcontractor agrees to revise any of its testing procedures, if necessary, to assure that all personnel testing conforms with the principles of job-related testing, as established by the statutes and court decisions of the State of New Jersey and as established by applicable Federal law and applicable Federal court decisions;

H. In conforming with the targeted employment goals, the contractor or subcontractor agrees to review all procedures relating to transfer, upgrading, downgrading and layoff to ensure that all such actions are taken without regard to age, race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, affectional or sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, disability, nationality or sex, consistent with the statutes and court decisions of the State of New Jersey, and applicable Federal law and applicable

Federal court decisions.

I. The contractor and its subcontractors shall furnish such reports or other documents to the Division of

Contract Compliance and EEO as may be requested by the Division from time to time in order to carry out the purposes of these regulations, and public agencies shall furnish such information as may be requested by the Division of Contract Compliance and EEO for conducting a compliance investigation pursuant to

Subchapter 10 of the Administrative Code (N.J.A.C. 17:27).

As required by N.J.S.A. 10:2-1 (“Discrimination in employment on public works; contract provisions; set-aside programs”), the contractor agrees as follows:

A. In the hiring of persons for the performance of work under this contract or any subcontract hereunder, or for the procurement, manufacture, assembling or furnishing of any such materials, equipment, supplies or services to be acquired under this contract, no contractor, nor any person acting on behalf of such contractor or subcontractor, shall, by reason of race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, gender identity or expression, affectional or sexual orientation or sex, discriminate against any person who is qualified and available to perform the work to which the employment relates;

B. No contractor, subcontractor, nor any person on his behalf shall, in any manner, discriminate against or intimidate any employee engaged in the performance of work under this contract or any

subcontract hereunder, or engaged in the procurement, manufacture, assembling or furnishing of any such materials, equipment, supplies or services to be acquired under such contract, on account of race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, gender identity or expression, affectional or sexual orientation or sex;

C. There may be deducted from the amount payable to the contractor by the Municipality, under this contract, a penalty of $50.00 for each person for each calendar day during which such person is discriminated against or intimidated in violation of the provisions of the contract; and

D. This contract may be canceled or terminated by the Municipality, and all money due or to become due hereunder may be forfeited, for any violation of this section of the contract occurring after notice to the contractor from the Municipality of any prior violation of this section of the contract.

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement